Mtec Bu Syllabus

BANGALORE UNIVERSITY
Department of Mechanical Engineering, UVCE, Bengaluru
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)
Vision and Mission of the Bangalore University, UVCE and

Department of Mechanical Engineering.
Program Educational Objectives (PEOs), Program Outcomes

(Pos), Scheme of Teaching, Syllabus and Examination of the
following Post Graduate programmes:
1. M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

Major: Machine Design - MD 1to MD 89

Major: Manufacturing Science and Engineering - MS 1to MS 84

Major: Thermal Science and Engineering - MT 1to MT 97

Major: Advanced Materials Technology - MA 1to MA 84
5.Open Electives offered by the Department - ME 1to ME 5
University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering

K. R. Circle, Bengaluru : 560 001.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, U. V. C. E., M. Tech. – Machine Design
Department of Mechanical Engineering,

University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering,
KR Circle, Bengaluru – 560 001
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)-2018
M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

Major: MACHINE DESIGN
MD-1
VISION
―To strive for excellence in education for the realization of a vibrant and
inclusive society through knowledge creation and dissemination‖
MISSION
 Impart quality education to meet national and global challenges

 Blend theoretical knowledge with practical skills
 Pursue academic excellence through high quality research and
publications
 Provide access to all sections of society to pursue higher education
 Inculcate right values among students while encouraging competitiveness
to promote leadership qualities
 Produce socially sensitive citizens
 Hasten the process of creating a knowledge society
 To contribute to nation building
MD-2
UNIVERSITY VISVESVARAYA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
K R Circle, Bengaluru – 560 001.
University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering (UVCE) was started as a School of Mechanical

Engineering by Bharat Ratna Sir. M. Visvesvaraya in the year 1913 to meet the needs of the State
for skilled workers with S V Setty as its Superintendent. Later, it was converted to a full-fledged
Engineering College in the year 1917 under the name Government Engineering College and was
affiliated to the University of Mysore. It is the fifth Engineering College to be established in the
country.
After the formation of Bangalore University in 1964, UVCE became one of the
Constituent Colleges of Bangalore University. This is one of the oldest Institutions in the country
imparting technical education leading to B.E., M.E, B.Arch., M.Sc. (Engineering), M.Arch.and
Ph.D. degrees in various disciplines of Engineering and Architecture. The Institution currently
offers 7 Undergraduate (B.E. / B.Arch.) Full-time, three Undergraduate (B.E.) Part-time and 24
Postgraduate (M.E. / M.Arch.) Programmes.
VISION
The vision of UVCE is to strive for excellence in advancing engineering education through path
breaking innovations across the frontiers of human knowledge to realize a vibrant, inclusive and
humane society.
MISSION
The mission of UVCE is to prepare human resource and global leaders to achieve the above vision
through discovery, invention and develop friendly technologies to promote scientific temper for a
healthy society. UVCE shapes engineers to respond competently and confidently to the economic,
social and organizational challenges arising from globally advancing technical needs.
MD-3
Department of Mechanical Engineering, UVCE
Name of programme: M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

Major: Machine Design
Outcome based Education curricula (Academic Year 2018-19)
Vision of the Department

Strive for Centre of Excellence in advancing Mechanical Engineering education to produce
highly qualified human resources to meet local and global requirement.
Mission of the Department

MEM1. Implementing effectively, the outcome based education by imparting knowledge of
basics and advances in Mechanical Engineering and other allied disciplines.
MEM2. Preparing and equipping human resources to become global leaders through
innovation, discovery, sustainable and environment friendly technology.
MEM3. Creating conducive environment for effective teaching and learning process through
interdisciplinary research, online courses, interaction with institutions of higher learning and
industries, R and D laboratories of national importance, alumini, employers and other internal &
external stake holders.
MEM4. Imbibing awareness of entrepreneurship, ethics, honesty, credibility, social and

environmental consciousness.
MEM5. Providing opportunity to the faculty and technical staff for continuous academic
improvement and to equip them with the latest trends in Mechanical Engineering and thereby
inculcate the habit of continuous learning in faculty, staff and students.
Program Educational Objectives (PEO)

MDPEO1: Have successful carrier through the application of latest developments in the field of
Machine Design.
MDPEO2: Communicate effectively and ability to work individually and in team with venturing
into entrepreneurship and involve in lifelong learning.
MDPEO3: Pursue high level research, higher studies and choose professional carriers.
MD-4
Program outcomes (PO):

Post Graduate with M.Tech (Machine Design) degree will be able to
MDPO1: Independently carry out research/investigation and development work to solve

practical problems of the domain of program
MDPO2: Prepare and present a substantial technical report/document.

MDPO3: Demonstrate a higher degree of mastery in the various fields of Machine Design.
MD-5
PROPOSED SCHEME OF STUDIES AND EXAMINATIONS FOR 24 MONTHS COURSE
FOR THE AWARD OF M. Tech. DEGREE IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING UNDER CBCS SCHEME
(2K18 Scheme)
MAJOR: MACHINE DESIGN
Semester-I
Course Teaching Scheme Teaching Total CIE *SEE
Sl.
Type/Cours Course Name (No of hrs per week) Dept hrs/Week Mark Marks Credits
No.
Code L T P S s
1. 18MD1C01 Mathematics Methods for Engineering 3 2 0 0 Maths 5 50 50 4
2. 18MD1C02 Applied Elasticity 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18MD1C03 Advanced Mechanism and Synthesis 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MD1E1A 1. Advanced Machine Design
4. 18MD1E1B 2. Design for Manufacturing and Assembly 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MD1E1C 3. Mechanics of Composite Materials
18MD1E2A 1. Material Selection in Machine Design Mech.
4 0 0 0
5. 18MD1E2B 2. Bio-Materials and Mechanics Mech. 4 50 50 4
18MD1E2C 3. Computer Aided Design 3 0 2 0 Mech. 5
6. 18MD1L01 Design Lab – I 0 0 4 0 Mech. 4 50 50 2
7. 18ME1M01 Research Methodology and IPR 2 0 0 0 Mech. 2 50 50 2
8. 18MD1S01 Seminar-I 0 0 2 0 Mech. 2 50 --- 1
18ME1M02 Audit Course - I English 2
9. 2 0 0 0 50 --- 1
(Technical Paper Writing)
Total 23 02 06 --- 31 450 350 26
MD-6
Semester-II
Teaching Scheme Total CIE *SEE
Sl. Course
Course Name (No of hrs per week) Teaching hrs/Week Mar Marks Credits
No. Type/Code
L T P S Dept ks
1. 18MD2C01 Advanced Vibrations and Acoustics 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
2. 18MD2C02 Advanced Finite Element Methods 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
3. 18MD2C03 Theory of Fracture Mechanics 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
18MD2E1A 1. Tribology and Bearing Design
4. 18MD2E1B 2. Robotics 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
18MD2E1C 3. Experimental Stress Analysis
18MD2E2A 1. Multi-Body Dynamics
5. 18MD2E2B 2. Smart Materials and Structures 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
18MD2E2C 3. Mechatronics System Design
6. 18MD2L01 Design Lab - II 0 0 4 0 Mech. 4 50 50 2
7. 18MD2S01 Seminar-II 0 0 2 0 Mech. 2 50 --- 1
8. 18ME2M01 Audit Course - II Pedagogy Studies 2 0 0 0 Mech. 2 50 --- 1
Total 22 --- 06 --- 28 400 300 24
Semester-III
Teaching Scheme Teaching Total CIE *SEE
Sl. Course
Course Name (No of hrs per week) Dept hrs/Week Mark Mark Credits
No. Type/Code
L T P S s s
18MD3E1A 1. Theory of Plates and Shells
1. 18MD3E1B 2. Theory of Plasticity 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
18MD3E1C 3. Optimization Techniques
2. Open Elective 4 0 0 0 Mech. 4 50 50 4
3. 18MD3S01 Seminar-III 0 0 2 0 Mech. 2 50 1
4. 18MD3I01 Mini Project/ Internship 0 0 10 0 Mech. 10 50 50 5
18MD3D01 Dissertation Phase-I 0 0 10 0 Mech. 10 50 50 5
Total 08 --- 22 --- 30 250 200 19
MD-7
Semester-IV
Teaching Scheme in hrs. Teaching Total CIE *SEE Credits
Sl. Course Course Name
Dept hrs/Week Mark Marks
No. Type/Code L T P S
s
1. 18MD4S01 Seminar-IV 0 0 2 0 Mech. 2 50 1
2. 18MD4D01 Dissertation Phase-II 0 0 0 30 Mech. 30 50 50 15
Total --- --- --- --- 32 100 50 16
1. 18MEMOOC MOOC Course --- --- --- --- 03
Grand Total --- --- --- --- 88
COURSE TYPE
ME : Mechanical Engineering MD : Machine Design C : Professional Core E : Professional Elective
P : Open Elective M : Mandatory L : Lab
S : Seminar I : Mini Project/Internship D : Dissertation Phase
L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial, P –Lab work, S – Self Study:

Number under teaching scheme indicates contact clock hours.
NOTE:
1) In any course(Program Core or Program Elective), if self study of 4 hrs per week for students is allocated, then the teaching scheme
of such courses will be 3-0-0-4 and the total credits will be 4.
2) * = SEE shall be conducted for100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
3) # = The CIE test of the lab component of integrated course shall be conducted with the external examiner for 50 marks and shall be
reduced to 25 marks.
MD-8
SCHEME OF STUDIES AND EXAMINATION FOR 24 MONTHS COURSE FOR THE AWARD OF
M. Tech. DEGREE IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING under CBCS Scheme - 2K18 Scheme
Open Elective for M.Tech CBCS Scheme
Semester III
Sr. Course Teaching Scheme
No. Type /Course Course Name (No. of hrs per week) Teaching Total CIE *SEE Credits
Code Dept hrs / Marks Marks
L T P S
week
18CV3P1A Significance of National Building Codes
1. 18CV3P1B Water Laws, Rights & Administration
18CV3P1C Waste to Energy 4 0 0 0 Civil 4 50 50 4
Remote Sensing and Geographic
18CV3P1D
Information System
18ME3P1A Composite and Smart Materials
2. 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18ME3P1B Industrial Safety
18EE3P1A Real Time Embedded Systems
3. 18EE3P1B Robotics and Automation 4 0 0 0 EEE 4 50 50 4
18EE3P1C Solar and Wind Energy
18EC3P1A Reliability and Engineering
4. 18EC3P1B M-Commerce and Applications 4 0 0 0 ECE 4 50 50 4
18EC3P1C Optimisation Techniques
18CS3P1A Artificial Intelligence
5. 18CS3P1B Business Analytics 4 0 0 0 CSE 4 50 50 4
18CS3P1C Modeling and Simulation
MD-9
Course Code 18MD1C01 M.Tech (Machine Design )

Category Program Core Semester: I
Course title MATHEMATICAL METHODS IN ENGINEERING
No. of Hours/Week
Scheme and Credits L T P S Credits Total hours = 48
3 2 0 0 4
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Total Max. Marks: 100 Duration of SEE: 3Hrs
Prerequisites (if any): NIL
COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

1. Analyse the concepts and importance of Probability theory and various distributions.
2. Analyse the concepts of statistical technique to analyse multi variant functions.
3. Apply the knowledge of ordinary and partial differential equations of solving engineering
problems.
4. Apply the basic concepts of partial differential equations and complex algebra for
engineering problems.
5. Analyse some of the major equations for solving engineering problems.
UNIT I
Probability Distributions: Baye's rule, Discrete random variables and their probability distributions;
The binomial probability distribution, The Poisson probability distribution, The normal probability
distribution for continuous random variables. Sampling distributions like x2,t, F. 6 hours
UNIT II
Probability and Statistics: Statistics and sampling distributions, central limit theorem, the
sampling distribution of the sample mean and of the sample proportion. Testing hypothesis about
population parameters. A Statistical test of hypothesis, large sample test of a population mean.
6 hours
UNIT III
Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations: Initial value problems : Difference

equations, Single step methods: Classical Runge Kutta 2nd and 4th order methods- Stability
analysis. Predictor Corrector methods : Modified Euler's method, Milne's Predictor-Corrector
method. 12 hours
UNIT IV
Numerical solution of Partial differential equations: Finite difference solution of one

dimensional heat equation, one dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace equation.
Stability analysis of finite difference methods for heat and wave equations- Von-Neumann
method. 12 hours
MD-10
UNIT V
Calculus of Variations: Functionals, Variation of a functional, necessary condition for

extremisation of a functional. Euler-Lagrange equation and Euler-Poisson equation- special
cases.
Constrained extremisation problems-isoperimetric problems. 12 hours
UNIT VI
Recent advances and research being done in the topics mentioned in the above units.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students shall be able to:

1. Determine the appropriateness of applying probability distributions under various
engineering applications.
2. Differentiate hypothesis testing procedures based on type of outcome variable and number of
samples.
3. Select appropriate numerical methods to apply to various types of problems in engineering in
consideration of the mathematical operations involved and accuracy requirements.
4. Derive and analyze standard finite difference methods for the one dimensional wave and heat
equations and are able to understand the concepts of stability of numerical methods.
5. Solve engineering problems using the methods and techniques of the calculus of variations
and prepare for the study of modern optimal control theory.
REFERENCES including e-resources and books
1. Mendenhall, Beaver J and Beaver M: Introduction to Probability and Statistics,

Twelth edition. 2012.
2. Jain, Iyengar and Jain: Numerical methods for scientific and engineering computation,
Fifth edition, New age international publishers, 2014
3. E. Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 10th Ed., 2015
4. B.S. Grewal: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 43rd Ed., 2015.
5. Ronald E, Walpole, Sharon L. Myers, Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for
Engineers and Scientists (8th Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 07 (for Units I & II).
6. J. B. Doshi, Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers, Narosa, New Delhi, 10
(for Units III & IV).
7. Douglas C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments (7th Edition), Wiley
Student Edition, 09.
8. S. P. Gupta, Statistical Methods, S. Chand & Sons, 37th revised edition, 08.
9. William W. Hines, Douglas C. Montgomery, David M. Goldsman, Probability and
Statistical for Engineering, (4th Edition), Willey Student edition, 06.
MD-11
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
Test I (Unit I, II &III) = 15 marks

CIE – 50 Quiz / AAT = 5 marks Total:50
marks Unit-VI(AAT) =15 marks marks
Test II (Unit IV & V) = 15marks
Answer FIVE full questions

 Questions Q1 & Q 2 from Unit I and Unit II
SEE – 100 respectively shall be answered and shall not have 20* 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
marks internal choice. marks
 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5 from Unit III, Unit
IV & Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
shall have internal choice
Note: SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
Mapping of Course Outcomes (COS) to Program Outcomes (POs)
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
1. Low, 2. Medium, 3. High
MD-12
Course Code 18MD1C02 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Program Core Semester : I
Course title APPLIED ELASTICITY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the equilibrium equations of the components
subjected to various loads and compatibility conditions, stress and strain deviatiors.
2. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Generalised Hooke’s law and Lame’s
constants, St. Venant’s Principles.
3. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Airy’s Stress Function in Cartesian
Coordinates, for complex geometry and loading conditions.
4. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Airy’s Stress Function in Cylindrical
Coordinate, for complex geometry and loading conditions.
5. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Warping function for Torsion loading, effect of
temperature on various cross-section.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT - I
Analysis of Stress: Introduction to Stresses, State of Stress at a point, Differential Equations of
Equilibrium, for two and three dimensional cases, Stress Deviators and its invariants in Cartesian
and Cylindrical Coordinates, problems.
Analysis of Strain: Introduction to Strains,State of Strain at a Point, Compatibility Conditions,
Strain Deviator and its Invariants, problems. 14hrs.
UNIT – II
Generalised Hooke‘s Law,Generalised Hooke‘s Law in terms of Engineering Elastic Constants,
Displacement Equations of Equilibrium, Strain Energy, St. Venant‘s Principles, Existence and
Uniqueness of Solutions, Principle of Virtual work, problems. 06hrs.
UNIT – III
Introduction, Plane Stress and Plane Strain Problems, Airy‘s Stress function: Bending,
Uniformly Distributed Load, Simply supported rectangular beam under triangular load,problems.
06hrs.
UNIT – IV
Introduction, Plane Stress and Plane Strain Problems, Airy‘s Stress function: Exact analysis,
thick cylinder and rotating disc & cylinder,rotating disc of variable thickness, Shrink fitted
rotating disc and shaft, stress concentration: Circular hole in a stressed plate,problems. 08hrs.
UNIT – V
Introduction, warping function, St. Venant‘s Theory: elliptical, rectangle and triangle, Torsion of
hollow tubes, Membrane Analogy: Torsion of solid sections, Torsion of thin walled closed
hollow single & multiple sections and open section, problems.
Introduction, Thermal stress: in free plate and rectangular beam with temperature variation
through the thickness, thick circular disk and cylinder with radial temperature variation,
problems. 14hrs.
MD-13
UNIT – VI
Recent advances and research being done in the topics mentioned in the above units
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Apply the equilibrium equations and compatibility conditions, stress and strain deviators for
various loading conditions.
2. Analyze, using the Generalised Hooke’s law and Lame’s constants, the plane stress and plane
strain problems.
3. Analyze apply the Airy’s Stress Function in Cartesian Coordinates, for complex geometry and
loading conditions.
4. Analyze the Airy’s Stress Function in Cylindrical Coordinate, for complex geometry and
loading conditions.
5. Evaluate the Torsion problems using Warping function. The effect of temperature on the
stress and strain of various cross-section.
References:
1. Theory of Elasticity: Sadhu Singh, Khanna Publishers, edition - 2015.
2. Advanced Mechanics of Solids: L S Srinath, Tata McGraw-Hill publishers, edition - 2009.
3. Theory of Elasticity: S P Timoshenko and J N Goodier, McGraw Hill,edition - 2009.
4. Applied Elasticity: C T Wang,McGraw Hill,edition - 2009.
5. Elasticity: M H Sadd,Elsevier,edition - 2014.
6. Applied Elasticity: T G Sitharam and L Govindaraju,Interline Publishing,edition - 2008.
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:
CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 marks Quiz = 05 marks Total:50
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks Unit VI [AAT]= 15 marks marks
 Questions Q1 & Q2 from Unit I and Unit II
 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5from Unit III, Unit IV &
Unit V respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
have internal choice
Note: SEEshall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
MD-14

Course title ADVANCED MECHANISM DESIGN
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Planar, Spherical, and Spatial
Mechanisms, Classification of Mechanisms.
2. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Position Analysis, Displacements Rotation
and Translation.
3. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the various methods and theorems to find the
Velocity and Acceleration.
4. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Two, Three, Four-Position and other
methods of Synthesis of Mechanisms.
5. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Spatial Mechanism, using various
methods: Position, Velocity and Acceleration Analyses.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction, Analysis and Synthesis, The Science of Mechanics, Terminology, Definitions and
Assumptions, Planar, Spherical, and Spatial Mechanisms, Mobility, Classification of
Mechanisms, Kinematic Inversion, Grashof's Law, Mechanical Advantage.
Position Analysis, Loop Closure Equation, Planar Vector: the Chace Solutions, Coupler-Curve
Generation, Displacements Rotation and Translation. 14hrs.
UNIT – II
Definition of Velocity, Graphic Methods: Velocity Polygons, Direct and Rolling Contacts,
Complex-Algebra Methods, Instantaneous Center of Velocity,The Aronhold - Kennedy
Theorem, Velocity Analysis Using Instant Centers, The Angular - Velocity-Ratio Theorem,
Freudenstein' s Theorem, Centrodes. 06 hrs.
UNIT – III
Definition of Acceleration, Acceleration Polygons, Direct and Rolling Contact,Analytic
Methods, Complex-Algebra Methods, The Chace Solutions, The Instant Center of Acceleration,
The Euler-Savary Equation, The Bobillier Constructions. 06 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Type, Number, and Dimensional Synthesis, Function Generation, Path Generation, and Body
Guidance, Two, Three, Four-Position Synthesis of Slider-Crank Mechanisms, Crank-and-Rocker
Mechanisms, Precision Positions; Structural Error; Chebychev Spacing, The Overlay Method,
Coupler-Curve Synthesis, Cognate Linkages; The Roberts-Chebychev Theorem, Bloch's Method
of Synthesis, Freudenstein's Equation, Analytic Synthesis Using Complex Algebra, Synthesis of
Dwell Mechanisms, Intermittent Rotary Motion. 14hrs.
MD-15
UNIT – V
Introduction, Exceptions in the Mobility of Mechanisms, The Position-Analysis Problem,
Velocity and Acceleration Analyses, The Eulerian Angles, The Denavit-Hartenberg Parameters,
Transformation-Matrix Position Analysis, Matrix Velocity and Acceleration Analyses,
Generalized Mechanism Analysis Computer Programs. 08 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Apply the knowledge of Planar, Spherical, and Spatial Mechanisms relate the input forces and
movement into a desired set of output forces and movement.
2. Apply the knowledge of the Position Analysis, Displacements, to find the location of all links
as the mechanism is moved into another position.
3. Analyze using the various methods and theorems of Velocity and Acceleration, the time rate of
change of the position variables of the mechanism.
4. Evaluate the Two, Three, Four-Position and other methods of Synthesis, to design or create
a mechanism to attain specific motion.
5. Create optimally the mechanism for function, path and motion generation problems using the
knowledge of Spatial Mechanism.
References:
1. Theory of Machines and Mechanisms: J J Uicker,G R Pennock & J E Shigley,Oxford
University Press 3rdedition - 2008.
2. Design of Machinery: Robert L Norton, McGraw Hill,3rd edition - 2005.
3. Theory of Mechanisms and Machines: Amitabha Ghosh and Mallik,, East West Press,3rd
edition - 2006.
4. Theory of Machines: S S Ratan,4thMcGraw Hill,4thedition - 2009.
5. Advanced Mechanism Design: G N Sandoo rand A G Erdman,Printice Hall,edition -
1988.
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION.
 Questions Q1 &Q2 from Unit I & Unit II respectively
SEE – shall be answered and shall have internal choice. 20* 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
100 marks marks
 Questions, Q3, Q4 and Q5from Unit III, Unit IV and
Unit V respectively shall be answered and shall have 20*3= 60 Marks
no internal choice
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
MD-16
Course Code 18MD1E1A M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Program Elective Semester : I
Course title ADVANCED MACHINE DESIGN
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the product development.
2. Analyze to know manufacturing concepts in design of a product
3. Understand the basic concepts of fatigue
4. Apply their knowledge and to know the design of component on the basis of design for creep,
fracture and impact.
5. Create a conceptual model of the speed reduction gear box
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Development processes and organizations, Product Planning. Need Identification and problem
definition, product specification, concept generation and selection, evaluation, creativity
methods, Concept testing. 06 hrs.
UNIT – II
Design for manufacture, assembly, maintenance, casting, forging. Design for Reliability,
Strength based reliability, Parallel and series systems, Robust design. Industrial design: Design
for Emotion and experience, Introduction to retrofit and Ecodesign, Human behavior in design.
12 hrs.
UNIT – III
Fatigue of Materials: Introductory concepts, High cycle and low cycle fatigue, Fatigue design
models, Fatigue design methods, Fatigue design criteria, Fatigue testing, Test methods and
standard test specimens, Fatigue fracture surfaces and macroscopic features, Fatigue mechanisms
and microscopic features. 12 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Design of machine components on the basis of Creep, design of machine components on the
basis of Impact, design of machine components on the basis of fracture. 06 hrs.
UNIT – V
Design of speed reduction gear box. 12 hrs.
UNIT – VI
MD-17
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Describe the various steps in product development
2. Interpret the importance of industrial design
3. Highlight the various fatigue failure
4. Access the creep, impact and fracture in designing
5. Develop the speed reduction gear box.
References:
1. Woodson T.T., ―Introduction to Engineering Design‖, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1966.
2. George E Dieter, ―Engineering Design‖, McGraw Hill Company, 00.
3. Jack. A. Collins, ―Failure of Materials in Mechanical Design‖, John Wiley, Newyork 1992.
4. S. Suresh, ―Fatigue of Materials‖, Cambridge University Press, -1998
5. Prashant Kumar, ―Product Design, Creativity, Concepts and Usability‖, Eastern Economy
Edition, PHI New Delhi. 12
6. John J.C. ―Design Methods‖, Wiley Inter science, 1970.
7. Averill M. Law and W. David Kelton ―Simulation, modelling and analysis‖, McGraw Hill
Book Company, 1991.
8. Pahl, G.and W.Beitz, Engineering Design–A Systematic Approach – Springer, 2nd Ed., 1996.
9. Product Design and development Karl T. Ulrich, Steven Eppinger.
10. Ralph I. Stephens, Ali Fatemi, Robert, Henry o. Fuchs, ―Metal Fatigue in engineering‖, John
Wiley Newyork, Second edition. 2001
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 Quiz = 05 marks

CIE – 50 marks Total:50
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 Unit VI [AAT]= 15 marks marks
marks
 Questions Q1& Q4 from Unit I & Unit IV
 Questions, Q2, Q3 & Q5from Unit II, Unit III &
Unit V respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 3
MD-18
Course Code 18MD1E1B M.Tech (Machine Design)

Course title DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the material selection
2. Analyse the concept of selective assembly
3. Understand the different manufacturing processes
4. Apply the knowledge on metal joining processes
5. Understand Reliability and Quality
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction Need Identification and Problem Definition, Concept Generation andEvaluation,
Embodiment Design, Selection of Materials and Shapes. Properties of Engineering Materials,
Selection of Materials -I, Selection of Materials -II,Case Studies -I, Selection of Shapes, Co-
selection of Materials and Shapes, Case Studies –II. 12 hrs.
UNIT – II
Selective Assembly:Interchangeable part manufacture and selective assembly, Deciding the
numberof groups -Model -1: Group tolerance of mating parts equal, Model total and group
tolerances of shaft equal. Control of axial play-Introducing secondary machining operations,
Laminated shims, examples. Datum Features: Functional datum, Datum for manufacturing,
Changing the datum, Examples. 12 hrs.
UNIT – III
Selection of Manufacturing Processes, Review of Manufacturing Processes, Design forCasting,
Design for Bulk Deformation Processes, Design for Sheet Metal Forming Processes, Design for
Machining, Design for Powder Metallurgy, Design for Polymer Processing, Co-selection of
Materials and Processes, Case-Studies – III. 12 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Design for Assembly, Review of Assembly Processes, Design for Welding – I, Design
forWelding – II, Design for Brazing and Soldering, Design for Adhesive Bonding, Design for
Joining of Polymers, Design for Heat Treatment, Case-Studies – IV. 07 hrs.
UNIT – V
Design for Reliability, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis and Quality, Design for Quality,Design
for Reliability, Approach to Robust Design, Design for Optimization. 05 hrs.
UNIT – VI
MD-19
COURSE OUT COMES

1. Explain concept generation
2. Compare the difference in assembly in manufacturing and design
3. Review the design for failure concept
4. Highlights the importance of metal joining processes while designing
5. Develop the robust design
References:
1. G Dieter, Engineering Design - a materials and processing approach, McGraw Hill, NY, 00
2. M F Ashby, Material Selection in Mechanical Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.
3. K G Swift and J D Booker, Process selection: from design to manufacture, London: Arnold,
1997.
4. Geoffrey Boothroyd, Peter dewhurst, Winston Knight, ―Product design for manufacture and
assembly‖, Merceldekker. Inc. CRC Press, Third Edition
5. M F Ashby and K Johnson, Materials and Design - the art and science of material selection in
product design, Butterworth-Heinemann, 03.
6. T H Courtney, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, McGraw Hill, NY, 00.
7. S S Rao, Engineering Optimization: theory and practice, John Wiley, NY, 1996.
8. G Boothroyd, P Dewhurst and W Knight, Product design for manufacture and assembly,
John
9. Wiley, NY: Marcel Dekkar, 1994.
10. J G Bralla, Handbook for Product Design for Manufacture, McGraw Hill, NY, 1998.
11. Houldcroft, Which Process – an introduction to welding and related processes and guide to
their selection, Cambridge, Abington Pub., 1990.
12. ASTM Design handbook.
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 marks Quiz = 05 marks
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks Unit VI [AAT]= 15 marks
marks
 Questions Q4 & Q5 from Unit IV& Unit V
respectively shall be answered and shall not have 20* 2 = 40 Marks
SEE – 100 Total:100
internal choice.
marks marks
 Questions, Q2, Q3 and Q4from Unit II, Unit III and
Unit IV respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 1
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2
MD-20
Course Code 18MD1E1C M.Tech (Machine Design)

Course title MECHANICS OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the properties of fiber and matrix materials used in commercial composites, as
well as some common manufacturing techniques.
2. Use long and short fiber composites based on the constituent properties.
3. Analyse Classical Laminate Theory to study stresses in composites in an isotropic layered
structure
4. Evaluate the failure of a laminated composite plate.
5. Create the laminate design for different combinations of plies and orientation of the fiber.
UNIT – I
Introduction Definition and characteristics, Overview of advantage and limitations of composite
materials, Significance and objectives of composite materials, Science and technology, current
status and future prospectus. Basic Concepts and Characteristics Structural performance of
conventional material, Geometric and physical definition, Material response, Classification of
composite materials, Scale of analysis; Micromechanics, Basic lamina properties, Constituent
materials and properties, Properties of typical composite materials. 08 hrs.
UNIT – II
Elastic Behavior of Unidirectional Lamina Stress-strain relations, Relation between
mathematical and engineering constants, transformation of stress, strain and elastic 08 hrs.
UNIT – III
Strength of Unidirectional Lamina Micromechanics of failure; failure mechanisms, Macro-
mechanical strength parameters, Macromechanical failure theories, Applicability of various
failure theories 13 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Elastic Behavior of Laminate Basic assumptions, Strain-displacement relations, Stress-strain
relation of layer within a laminate, Force and moment resultant, General load–deformation
relations, Analysis of different types of laminates. 12 hrs.
UNIT – V
Stress and Failure Analysis of Laminates Types of failures, Stress analysis and safety factors for
first ply failure of symmetric laminates, Micromechanics of progressive failure; Progressive and
ultimate laminate failure, Design methodology for structural composite materials. 15 hrs.
UNIT – VI
Recent trends in Mechanics of Composite Materials
MD-21
COURSE OUT COMES

1. Compare the composite materials with conventional materials.
2. Distinguish the role of constituent materials in defining the average properties and response
of composite materials on macroscopic level.
3. Determine various failure theories applicable to composite materials
4. Validate various joints of composite structures
5. Develop a effective composite materials and structures
References:
1. Isaac M. Daniels, Ori Ishai, ―Engineering Mechaincs of Composite Materials‖, Oxford
University Press, 1994.
2. Bhagwan D. Agarwal, Lawrence J. Broutman, ―Analysis and Performance of fiber
composites‖, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1990.
3. Mathews, F. L. and Rawlings, R. D., ―Composite Materials: Engineering and Science‖, CRC
Press, Boca Raton.
4. Madhujit Mukhopadhyay, ―Mechanics of Composite Materials and Structures‖, University
Press.
5. Mazumdar S. K., ―Composaite Manufacturing – Materials, Product and Processing
Engineering‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton. 6. Robert M. Jones, ―Mechanics of Composite
Materials‖, Taylor and Francis, Inc., 1999.

internal choice.
marks marks
 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5 from Unit III, Unit IV&
internal choice
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
MD-22

Course title MATERIALS SELECTION IN MACHINE DESIGN
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the study of properties of material
2. Apply their knowledge to know imperfections in Solids and Mechanical Properties
3. Analyse the Phase Diagrams
4. Analyse the Processing of Metals and Alloys
5. Evaluate economic Considerations of material properties
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction, Atomic Structure, Interatomic Bonding and Structure of Crystalline Solids:
Historical perspective of Materials Science. Why study properties of materials? Classification of
materials. Advanced Materials, Future materials and modern materials, Atomicstructure. Atomic
bonding in solids, Crystal structures, Crystalline and noncrystalline materials. Miller indices.
Anisotropic elasticity. Elastic behaviour of composites. Structure and properties of polymers.
Structure and properties of ceramics. 06 hrs.
UNIT – II
Imperfections in Solids and Mechanical Properties of Metals, Diffusion, Dislocations and
Strengthening Mechanisms:Point defects. Theoretical yield point. Line defects and dislocations.
Interfacial defects. Bulk orvolume defects. Atomic vibrations; Elastic deformation. Plastic
deformation. Interpretation of tensile stress-strain curves Yielding under multiaxial stress. Yield
criteria and macroscopic aspects of plastic deformation. Property variability and design factors,
Diffusion mechanisms. Steady and non-steady state diffusion. Factors that influence diffusion.
Non-equilibrium transformation and microstructure, Dislocation and plastic deformation.
Mechanisms of strengthening in metals. Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth.
Strengthening by second phase particles. Optimum distribution of particles. Latticeresistance to
dislocation motion. 12 hrs.
UNIT – III
Phase Diagrams: Equilibrium phase diagrams. Particle strengthening by precipitation.
Precipitation reactions. Kinetics of nucleation and growth. The iron-carbon system. Phase
transformations. Transformation rate effects and TTT diagrams. Microstructure and property
changes in iron-carbon system. 06 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Applications and Processing of Metals and Alloys, Polymers, Ceramics, and composites:Types
of metals and alloys. Fabrication of metals. Thermal processing of metals. Heat treatment.
Precipitation hardening. Types and applications of ceramics. Fabrication and processing of
ceramics, Mechanicalbehaviour of polymers. Mechanisms of deformation and strengthening of
MD-23
polymers. Crystallization, melting and glass transition. Polymer types. Polymer synthesis and
processing, Particle reinforced composites. Fibre reinforced composites. Structural composites
12 hrs.
UNIT – V
Electrical, Thermal, Optical and Magnetic Properties and economic Considerations:Electrical
conduction. Semi conductivity. Super conductivity. Electrical conduction in ionic ceramics and
in polymers. Dielectric behaviour. Ferroelectricity. Piezoelectricity Heat capacity. Thermal
expansion. Thermal conductivity. Thermal stresses Diamagnetism and Para magnetism.
Ferromagnetism.Antiferromagnetism and ferrimagnetism. Influence of temperature on magnetic
behaviour. Domains and Hysteresis, Basic concepts. Optical properties of metals. Optical
properties of non-metals. Application of optical phenomena. Economic, Environmental and
Social Issues of Material Usage - Economic considerations. Environmental and societal
considerations. Recycling issues. Life cycle analysis and its use in design. 12 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Describe the modern materials
2. Apply concepts of microstructure of materials
3. Compare the importance of phase diagram
4. Verify the applications of modern materials
5. Determine the thermal, electrical properties of materials.
References:
1. Advanced Engineering Materials and Modeling by Ashutosh Tiwari, N. Arul Murugan,
Rajeev Ahuja.
2. Advanced Engineering Materials, Editor-in-Chief: Sandra Kalveram; Deputy Editor: Jolke
Perelaer
3. Materials Science and Engineering, William D. Callister, Jr, John Wiley & sons, 07
4. Modern Physical Metallurgy and Material Engineering, Science, Process, application,
Smallman R.E., Bishop R J, Butterworth Heinemann, Sixth Ed., 1999.

 Questions Q1& Q3 from Unit I & Unit III
internal choice.
marks marks
 Questions, Q2, Q4 and Q5from Unit II, Unit IV and
internal choice
marks.
MD-24
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2
MD-25

Course title BIOMATERIALS & BIOMECHANICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand what are biomaterials, its classification, and motion in human body
2. Understand the terminologies in biomechanics, statics in human body and introduction to
muscles
3. Analyse the kinematic study of human body
4. Evaluate Mechanical understanding of human body
5. Analyse the Testing, compatibility and applications of Biomaterials
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction, classification and requirements of Biomaterials, Metallic Implant Materials,
Polymeric Implant Materials, Ceramic Implant Materials, Composite Implant Materials, motion
in the human machine, the standard human scaling relationships 12 hrs.
UNIT – II
Terminologies used in Bio-mechanics, Statics in the human body, the sense of touch, study of
muscles 05 hrs.
UNIT – III
Kinematics and musculature, mechanics of standing, walking, running, jumping, throwing a ball
and other types of motions, collisions of the human body, sustained acceleration, physics of
sports. 07 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Mechanical Property of the Human Body
Material components of the body and their elastic properties, time-independent deviations in
hookean materials, static equilibrium of deformable bodies, time-dependent deviations from
elastic behavior: viscoelasticity, viscoelasticity in bone, bone fractures, common sports injuries,
avoiding fractures and other injuries: materials for helmets 12 hrs.
UNIT – V
Wear and Corrosion in Biomaterials, Testing of Biomaterials, Surface Characterization of
Biomaterials, Bio Compatibility and Toxicological Screens of Biomaterials, Sterilization
Techniques Selection of Biomaterials, Biomaterials for Medical applications. 12 hrs.
UNIT – VI
MD-26
COURSE OUT COMES

1. Understanding on biomaterials, its classification, and motion in human body
2. Identify the terminologies used in Bio-mechanics
3. Relate the Kinematics of human body
4. Predict the mechanical behaviour of human body
5. Understand the testing, compatibility and applications of Biomaterials in medical
applications
References:
1. Irving P. Herman Physics of the Human Body, Springer, New York, NY, November 2006
2. Susan J.Hall, Basics Bio Mechanics 5th Edition, McGraw - Hill Publishing Co, Newyork,
2007
3. Zatsiorsky, Kinetics of Human motion, Human Kinetics publishers, 2002
4. Zatsiorsky and Prilutsky, Biomechanics of Skeletal muscles, 2012
5. J.B.Park, Biomaterials, Science and Engineering Plenum Press 1984.
6. Sujata V. Bhat Biomaterials Nonosa Publishing house-2002.
Quiz = 05 marks
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 marks
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks
 Questions Q2 & Q3from Unit II & Unit III
 Questions, Q1, Q4 and Q5from Unit I, Unit IV
and Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MD-27

Course title COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN (Theory And Practical’s)
No. of Hours/Week Total Hours:
Scheme and Credits L T P S Credits Theory: 36,
3 0 2 0 4 Practical’s:24
1. Understand the basics of CAD System Architecture.
2. Understand the Graphics Standards, representation of geometric entities and curves.
3. Analyse the geometric modeling techniques.
4. Apply 2D & 3D transformations on the basic geometric entities and visual realism techniques
to manipulate the geometric model.
5. Create and evaluate mechanical assembly model using a CAD tool.
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit I
Elements Of Interactive Computer Graphics: Introduction, Design process, the role of
modeling & communication, modeling using CAD, Product life cycle, Concurrent engineering in
Product design & development, Collaborative Engineering, computers for design Process, CAD
System Architecture. 06Hrs
Unit II
Techniques for Geometric Modeling: Graphics Standards, Line, circle, ellipse algorithm,
parametric representation of line, circle, ellipse &parabola, representation of analytic curves and
synthetic curves,Problems on Bezier,Cubic, B-Spline. Wireframe models, wireframe entities,
simple problems. 08Hrs
Unit III
Surfacemodelling: Types and Mathematical Representations of Surfaces; Surface models,
surface entities, surface representation, parametric representation of analytic surfaces and
synthetic surfaces, simple problems.
Solid Modeling:Types and Mathematical Representations of Solids; Solid models, solid entities,
solid representation, fundamentals of solid modeling, half spaces, Boundary Representation (B-
rep), Constructive Solid Geometry (CSG), Sweep Representation, Analytic Solid Modeling
(ASM). 08Hrs
Unit IV
Transformation, Manipulation: 2D & 3D Transformations (Translation, Rotation, & Scaling
&Magnification), Concatenations, Matrix representation, Problems & programming on
Transformations.
Visual realism: Model clean-up, hidden line removal, hidden surface removal, hidden solid
removal, Shading and Coloring. 06Hrs
MD-28
Unit V
Mechanical Assembly: Assembly modeling, representation schemes, generation of assembly
sequence, assembly analysis. Mass property calculations:Geometrical property formulation, mass
property formulation, property evaluation, properties of composite objects. 08Hrs
Unit VI
UNIT – VII (Lab Component)

Part A
Modeling 2D sketches and solid models of machine parts like shaft support, machine
block, sliding block & support, bearing bracket, vice-body, flange coupling, etc.
[To get well conversant with: Design tree, visualization tools, command and GUI managers,
units etc.; Sketcher tools – profiles, dimensional & geometric constraints, transformation tools,
coordinate systems etc.]
Part B
(i) Solid modeling, assembly and drafting with GD&T of assembly like Universal
coupling,Tool post, etc.
[To get well conversant with: Solid modeling –Sketch based features like extrude, revolve,
sweep, etc and variational sweep, loft, etc., dress based features like fillet, chamfer, draft, shell
etc. Boolean operations etc. design table macros, formulas and other design automation tools,
mass property calculations, multibody features, functional modeling etc.Assembly modeling :
Assembly planning - Insert, position and orientation, assembly mating and simulation,
interference and assembly analysis, assembly properties like CG etc., assembly approaches,
Drafting – standard views, dimensioning, layouts, GD&T, Bill of materials, explodedviews etc.]
(ii) Surface modeling of parts like mobile phone case, soap bottle with its plastic tool design,
Creation of surfaces from reverse engineered data from a toy car, etc.
[To get well conversant with: Surface modeling - wire frame models and manipulations,
analytical surfaces,generative shape design - Extrude, Sweep, Trim .etc and Mesh of curves, Free
formetc, multi-section & blended surfaces, surface manipulations, automation tools etc. Surface
reconstruction from cloud point data and from other reverse engineering toolsetc.]
For the above exercises make a professional CAD documentation for professional
productpresentations.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Illustrate the use of computers in Design Process.
2. Describe the representation of geometric entities, curves.
3. Differentiate between wireframe modelling, surface modelling and solid modelling.
4. Implement 2D/3D Transformation and Visualize techniques to manipulate a Geometrical
model.
5. Design, Modeling of Assembly using a CAD tool as per industry standards and Assess.
MD-29
References:
1.Computer aided design and manufacturing Groover, Mikell P.. 1987.
2.CAD/CAM theory and practice, Zeid, Ibrahim. e. McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 1991.
3. CAD/CAM: principles, practice and manufacturing management, McMahon, C. A., and J.
Browne., 1998.
4. CAD/CAM/CIM, Radhakrishnan, Pezhingattil, S. Subramanyan, and V. Raju.. New Age
International, 2008.
5.Mathematical elements for computer graphics, Rogers, David F., and J. Alan Adams..
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 1989.
(i) Theory
 Questions Q3& Q4 from Unit III and Unit IV
SEE – 100 respectively shall be answered and shall not have 20x 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
marks internal choice. * marks
 Questions Q1, Q2 and Q5 from Unit I, Unit II&
Unit V respectively shall be answered and shall 20x3= 60 Marks
Note: *=SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
(ii) Practical’s
Conduction of Experiments, Performance of students in Lab every week and Lab
record = 50#
Total:
CIE Lab Test: 50 marks
Part A = 10, Part B = 30 (one question either i or ii) and Viva-Voce = 10 Marks
( 50 ##)
Note: # = CIE marks for Laboratory performance is to be evaluated for 50 marks and the marks
obtained shall be reduced for 25 marks.
## = Lab Test is to be conducted for 50 marks and the marks obtained shallbe reduced for
25 marks. Lab Test shall be conducted by two examiners out of which one examiner is the
faculty taught the course.
There is no SEE for the Practical‘s portion of Integrated course.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 3
MD-30
Course Code 18MD1L01 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Laboratory Semester : I
Course title DESIGN LAB-I
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 2
1. Understand computational skills to solve various engineering problems.
2. Apply MATLAB features and programming.
3. Analyse experimental studies on strain and stress for different loading conditions.
4. Evaluate the experimental and computational methods
5. Create methodology of solving the problems using computational and experimental
methods
Part A
Solving the following using MATLAB program
1. An introduction to MATLAB.
2. A half cylinder rolling on a horizontal plane.
3. A three bar linkage problem.
4. Slider-Crank mechanism.
5. Two bar linkage assembly supported by a pivot joint and a horizontal plane.
6. Determination of invariance, principal stresses and strains and directions for rectangular
and circular cross section.
7. Case studies.
Part B
Experimental Analysis
1. Determination of stress and strain of a component subjected to bending and torsion using
strain gauges.
2. Wear test using pin on disc equipment
3. Impact test of metals and composites.
4. Determination of viscosity of oils using 4 ball testers.
5. Determination of invariance, principal stresses and strains and directions using strain
gauges.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify knowledge of stress strains and failure theories and analyse them in terms of
mathematical models.
2. Demonstrate experiments involving viscosity, wear and strain gauge rosettes.
3. Verify results from MATLAB and experiments
4. Validate the computational and experimental methods
5. Design of new mechanical systems using computational and experimental results
MD-31
For examination an experiment each from Part-A and Part-B shall be set.
Continuous Internal Marks Semester End Evaluation (SEE) Marks
Evaluation (Laboratory– 50 (Laboratory – 100 marks)
marks)
Performance of the student in 20 Write up 10

the laboratory every week
Test at the end of the semester 20 Experiment-1 (Part-A) = 35 marks 70
Experiment-2 (Part-B) = 35 marks
Viva Voce 10 Viva Voce 20

Total 100
Total (CIE) 50 Total(SEE) 50*
Note:* = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be
reduced for 50 marks.
Mapping of course outcomes (COs) to Program Outcomes (POs )

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2 2
MD-32
Course Code 18ME1M01 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Mandatory Audit Semester: I
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
Course title
RIGHTS
No. of Hours/Week
Scheme and Credits L T P SS Credits Total hours = 24
2 0 0 0 2

1. Understand the criteria for selection of research problem.
2. Understand the basics of literature survey, ethics, effective technical writing and
developments of research proposal.
3. Understand the basics and importance of IPR.
4. Analyse the issues related to patentability.
5. Understand the administrative system of IPR and analyse the typical case studies.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Meaning of research problem, sources of research problem, Criteria, Characteristics of a good
research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and Objectives of research
problems.
Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, Analysis,
Interpretation, necessary instrumentations. 05hrs
UNIT – II
Effective literature studies approaches, analysis, Plagiarism, Research ethics.
Effective technical writing, How to write report, Paper, Developing a research proposal, Format
of research proposal, presentation and assessment by a review committee. 05hrs
UNIT – III
Introduction to Intellectual Property (IP), Overview of Copyright, Related Rights, Trademarks,
Geographical Indications, Industrial Design, Patents, Protection of New Varieties of Plants.05hrs
UNIT – IV
Patentability: Patentable Subject Matter, Patentable and Non Patentable Inventions, Procedure
for grants of patents in India, Patent licensing and transfer of Technology, Patent information and
databases. International scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property, Patenting
under Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT). 05hrs
UNIT-V
New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System, New Developments in IPR;
Traditional Knowledge Case studies of IPR including topics of respective branches of
specialisation. 04hrs
MD-33
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Explain the steps involved in defining a research problem.
2. Analyse the various issues related to effective literature survey and developing a research
proposal.
3. Discuss the various issues related to IPR and its importance.
4. Discuss the various issues related to patentability and international scenario of patent
rights.
5. Highlight the new development and exposure to case studies.
REFERENCES including e-resources and books:
1. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, ―research Methodology; an introduction for science
and engineering students‖
2. Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville,” Research Methodology an Introduction”
3. Ranjit Kumar 2nd edition,” Research Methodology; a step by step guide for
Beginners”
4. Halbert, “Resisting Intellectual Property”,Taylor and francies Ltd. 2007.
5. Mayall,’Industrial Design” McGraw Hill,1992
6. Niebel,” Product design”,McGrraw Hill,1974.
7. Asimv, “Introduction to design”,Prentice Hall,1962.
8. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley,” Intellectual Property in New
Technology Age” 2006.
9. T.Ramappa,” Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chanda,2008
CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III) = 15 marks Quiz / AAT = 5 marks Total:50
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) = 15 marks Unit-VI(AAT)=15 marks marks
 Questions Q1 & Q 3 from Unit I and Unit III
20* 2 = 40
SEE – 100 respectively shall be answered and shall not Total:100
Marks
marks have internal choice. marks
 Questions Q2, Q4 and Q5 from Unit II, Unit
IV& Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MD-34
Course Code 18MD1S01 M.Tech. (Machine Design)

Category Seminar Semester: I
Course title SEMINAR - I
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 0 Total Max. Marks: 50 Duration of SEE: ---
The objectives of the SEMINAR-I is to prepare the students to learn to:
1. Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and analyse the
same effectively.
2. Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected
area/topic and prepare content rich presentation.
3. Acquire communication and time management skills for effective and impactful
presentation. Interact with peers to acquire the qualities of thoughtfulness, friendliness,
adaptability, responsiveness, and politeness in-group discussion. Overcome stage fear
during the presentation.
GUIDE LINES
1. Seminar preparation and presentation is an individual student activity.
2. Topic may be of general/ specific interest to program of engineering or electives not
offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the faculty/Guide.
3. Select one pertinent research paper for the seminar presentation.
4. Prepare and submit a detailed technical report of the seminar topic.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Carry out the literature survey of topic of seminar.
2. Prepare a technical report on the selected area/topic.
3. Make an effective presentation with seamless flow of content within the time allocated.
Overcome inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the spirit of team work.
Overcome stage fear during the presentation.
MD-35
CIE – 50 Phase -1 Marks =15 Seminar Report Total:50
marks Phase -2 Marks =15 Marks =20 Marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
Scheme of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE):

Evaluation would be carried out in TWO phases. The Seminar Evaluation Committee
shall comprise of Chairman of the Department, Faculty/Guide and one more faculty member
nominated by Chairman. The evaluation criteria shall be as per the rubrics given below:
Rubrics for Evaluation:

Topic - Technical Relevance, Sustainability and Societal Concerns : 15%
Review of literature : 25%
Presentation Skills : 35%
Report : 25%
MD-36
Course Code 18MD1M02 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Course title TECHNICAL PAPER WRITING
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: --- Total Max. Marks: 50 Duration of SEE: 3 Hrs

1. Understand the technique to improve technical report writing skills and level of
readability.
2. Learn about what to write contents section of a technical report.
3. Analyse the contents of literature.
4. Create a typical technical article.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Planning and preparation, word order, breaking up long sentences, structuring paragraphs and
sentences, being concise and removing redundancy, avoiding ambiguity and vagueness. 05hrs
UNIT – II
Clarifying who did what, highlighting your findings, hedging and criticizing, Paraphrasing and
plagiarism, sections of paper, Abstracts, Introduction. 05hrs
UNIT – III
Review of the literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The final check. 04hrs
UNIT – IV
Key skills needed when writing a title, Key skills needed when writing an Abstract, Key skills
needed when writing an Introduction, Skills needed when writing a review of the literature.05hrs
UNIT – V
Key skills needed when writing the methods, Key skills needed when writing the Results, Skills
needed when writing a Discussion, Skills needed when writing the Conclusions. 05hrs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe the importance of basics of technical writing skills.
2. Review and emphasise the result of literature review.
3. Discuss the importance of various sections of technical report.
4. Develop a complete conceptual technical report.

1. Goldbort (2006) writing for science, Yale University Press ( Available on Google books)
2. Day R (2006) How to write and publish a scientific paper, Cambridge university Press.
3. Highman N (1998) Handbook of writing for the mathematical sciences,SIAM, Highman’s
book.
4. Adian Wallwork, English for writing research papers, Springer New York Dordrecht
Heidelberg London, 2011
MD-37
CIE – 50 Total:50
AAT = 20 marks
marks marks
Test II (Unit IV & V) = 15 marks
Note:SEEshall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MD-38

Category Program Core Semester : II
Course title ADVANCED VIBRATIONS AND ACOUSTICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1 Remember the basic theory and concepts of mechanical vibrations.
2 Understand the importance of continuous systems and understand the significance of
vibration control and the methods of achieving the same.
3 Analyse the use of modal analysis and condition monitoring in vibration signal analysis.
4 Understand the concepts of nonlinear vibrations and its applications and evaluate the
basic methods of understanding and analyzing random vibrations.
5 Understand the fundamentals of sound, methods for reduction of noise in automotive
parts and to evaluate the natural frequencies and mode shapes using MATLAB..
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Basic concepts of Mechanical vibrations, free vibration of single DOF systems with and without
damping, forced vibration of single DOF systems, Force and motion isolation, Two DOF
systems – Natural frequency determination and mode shapes. 08 hrs
UNIT – II
Introduction to Continuous systems,Transverse vibration of a string or cable, Lateral vibration of
beams, Longitudinal vibration of rods, vibration of membranes.
Introduction to Vibration Control, vibration isolation theory, vibration isolation for harmonic
excitation for different types of foundations, undamped dynamic vibration absorbers, types of
vibration absorbers, types of vibration dampers. 12 hrs
UNIT – III
Introduction to vibration measurement, Transducers, Vibration pickups, Frequency measuring
instruments, Vibration exciters, Signal analysis.
IntroductionModal analysis and Condition Monitoring, Dynamic testing of Machines and
Structures, Experimental Modal analysis, Machine Condition Monitoring & Diagnosis.
08 hrs
UNIT – IV
Introduction to nonlinear vibrations, sources of nonlinearity, qualitative analysis of non linear
systems, phase plane, conservative systems, Stability of equilibrium, Method of Isoclinics,
Perturbation method, Method of Iteration, Self-excited oscillations.
Random phenomena, Time averaging and expected value, Frequency response function,
Probability distribution, Correlation, Power spectrum and power spectral density, Fourier
Transforms and response. 08 hrs
MD-39
UNIT – V
The scope of acoustics, acoustics waves, Acoustic Intensity, Acoustic Impedance, Transmission
of sound from one fluid to the other, sound power transmission coefficient, The range of
quantities encountered in sound, the decibel scale, addition of sound levels, frequency bands,
noise measurement system, microphones, acoustic calibration.
Typical noise levels in machinery, noise created by fluid flow through pipes, air conditioning
diffusers, air compressors, hydraulic pumps, fans, jet, combustion noise, steam turbine, power
plant, gas turbines, bearings, gear, punch press, roller chain drives, petrol engine, piston slap
from diesel engine, roll noise of small cars, some experimental results, noise inside the car.
Hemholtz resonator, analogous quantities, pressure amplification at resonance, expansion
chamber type of muffler, concentric perforated tube cavity resonator, concentric perforated tube
cavity resonator. 12 hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES

1 Define the basic theory and concepts of mechanical vibrations and solve the problems
using these concepts.
2 Predict the importance of continuous systems, verify the significance of transient
vibrations and assess vibration control.
3 Analyse vibration measurements and its applications, modal analysis and condition
monitoring in vibration signal analysis.
4 Relate the concepts of nonlinear vibrations and distinguish the basic methods of random
vibrations.
5 Define the fundamentals of sound, select the methods reduce the noise in automotive
parts and solve the vibration problems using MATLAB .
References:
1 Mechanical Vibrations - S. S. Rao , 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
2 Vibrations and Noise for Engineers - Kewal pujara, 2001 edition, Dhanpat rai & Co.,
New Delhi.
3 Theory of Vibrations with Applications - William T. Thomson, Marie Dillon Dahleh and
Chandramouli Padmanabhan, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
4 Mechanical Vibrations - J. S. Mehta and A. S. Kailey, S. Chand& Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2012.
5 Mechanical Vibrations - G. K. Grover, Nem Chand & Brothers, 2009.
6 Mechanical Vibrations- S. Graham Kelly, Schaum‘s Outlines, Tata Mc graw Hill, 2007
7 Mechanical Vibrations - Thammaiah Gowda, Jagadeesha T. and D. V. Girish –, McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
8 Vibrations of Mechnical systems – C Nataraj, Cenage Learning India, Pvt. Ltd. 2012
9 Mechanical Vibrations – Rao V Dukhipathi, Narosa Publishing House, 2010
MD-40

 Questions Q1& Q3 from Unit I & Unit III
 Questions Q2, Q4 and Q5from Unit II, Unit IV
and Unit V respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 - - 2
CO2 - 2 3
CO3 2 - -
CO4 - 3 3
CO5 2 - 3
MD-41

Course title ADVANCED FINITE ELEMENT METHODS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Remember the basic concept of Elasticity, FEA and associated math like linear algebra,
integration by quadrature, local coordinates, etc related to stress analysis and FEA
2. Apply partial differential equations and ordinary differential equations, PVW, calculus of
variations, reduction from strong form to weak form using the principle of virtual work,
error estimation and convergence
3. Analyze 1 D problems like bar element, truss element and shear deformable beams using
FEA and to be able to understand the algorithm and MATLAB for bar element
4. Analyse 2D and 3D problems using FEA concepts.
5. Create a model using FEA software for typical Industrial Design Application
UNIT – I
Revisions of basics of elasticity like continuum methods, governing equations for stress analysis
and FEA thought at the undergraduate level. 04 hrs.
UNIT – II
Partial differential equations, principal of virtual work, variational calculus, strong form
(Galerkin), weak form (Rayleigh Ritz), error estimation and convergence. 09 hrs.
UNIT – III
FEA analysis of one dimensional element subjected to uniaxial loads (Bar element both direct
and variational), trusses,C1 shape functions and shear deformable beams, quadrature, strong and
weak forms and constructing the stiffness matrix, force vector, global matrices and the vector
assembly. Matlab has to be used for Bar elements in addition to solving by hand for simple bar
problems 15 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Two and three dimensional solids, isoparametric formulation, shape function, numerical
integration, calculation of stress and strain, boundary conditions and constraints, determination
of displacements and stress,genaralized plane elements. 10 hrs.
UNIT – V
Transient problems: Structural dynamics and Initial Value Problems: Time integration,
consistent mass matrix, damping matrix, Eigen value problems, modal superposition. 10 hrs.
MD-42
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES

1. Explain the basic concepts of FEA knowledge and familiar with the simple problems of
mechanics.
2. Discuss PDE and ODE’s and use the calculus of variations to set up the strong and weak
forms using Energy methods
3. Analyse 1D problems for several one dimensional structural members and be able to use
MATLAB
4. Solve 2D and 3 D problems using FE analysis.
5. Design and Develop a FEA model using Commercial FE software for a Industrial
applications.
References:
1. J. N. Reddy, An Introduction to the Finite Element Method, McGraw-Hill Education
(2005). ISBN 0-07-124473-5
2. Klaus-Jurgen Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi ISBN-
9780-9790049-0-2
3. Robert D Cooke, Finite element modeling for stress analysis,John Wiley and Sons, ISBN
0-471-10774-3
4. Singaresu S Rao, The Finite Element Method in Engineering, Elsevier Science, ISBN
978-93-80931-55-5
5. Bachau and Craig, Structural Analysis, Springer Dordrecht Heidelberg London New
York ISBN 978-90-481-2596-6
6. Chandrapatla and Belegundu, An Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, PHI
Learning, Pvt Limited New Delhi ISBN-978-81-203-2106-9

marks
 Questions Q1& Q2 from Unit I & Unit II
 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5from Unit III, Unit IV
marks.
MD-43
Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO’S) to Program Outcomes (PO’s)
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MD-44

Course title THEORY OF FRACTURE OF MACHINES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Modes of Fracture Failure, Damage Tolerance.
2. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Surface Energy, Energy Release Rate concepts
to study the crack propagation.
3. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM),
Stress Intensity Factor.
4. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the concept of Crack Tip Opening Displacement
and Determination of Critical CTOD and Closure mechanisms.
5. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Environment-Assisted Fracture, Fatigue,
Failure Crack Growth and Failure of the Components..
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Kinds of Failure, Historical Aspects, Brittle and Ductile Fracture, Modes of Fracture Failure,
Damage Tolerance.
Introduction, Griffith's Dilemma, Surface Energy, Energy Release Rate, Energy Release Rate of
DCB Specimen, Deformation at Crack-tip, Stable and Unstable Crack Growth, R-curve for
Brittle Cracks, Thin Plate vs Thick Plate, Critical Energy Release Rate. 08 hrs.
UNIT – II
Introduction, Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM), Stress Intensity Factor, Westergaard's
Approach, SIF of More Complex Cases, Application of the Principle of Superposition, Crack in
a Plate of Finite Dimensions, The Relation between G1 and K1, Critical Stress Intensity Factor.
14 hrs.
UNIT – III
Approximate Shape and Size of the Plastic Zone, Effective Crack Length, Effect of Plate
Thickness, Closure, Problem.Relevance and Scope, Definition of the J-Integral, Path
Independence, Stress-Strain Relation, Further Discussion on J-Integral, Experimental and
Numerical Evaluation of J-Integral, Engineer Approach-A Short Cut. Introduction, Relationship
between CTOD,KI and GI for Small Scale Yielding Equivalence between CTODand J.
14 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Introduction, KIc-Test Technique, Test Methods to Determine J Ic, Test Methods to Determine GIc
and GIIc, Determination of Critical CTOD, Closure.
Introduction, Fatigue Failure, Environment-Assisted Fracture, Environment-Assisted Fatigue
Failure. 06 hrs.
MD-45
UNIT – V
Finite Element Method, Direct Methods and Indirect Methods to Determine Fracture Parameters.
Introduction, Fracture Surface, Mixed Mode Crack Propagation Criteria and Crack Growth.
06 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Apply the concept of Modes of Fracture Failure, Damage Tolerance due to operating
conditions and this knowledge lead to design the components for extended life.
2. Apply the Surface Energy, Energy Release Rate concepts for safe design of components.
3. Apply the knowledge of the Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM), Stress Intensity
Factor, to the design the components for extending its life.
4. Analyse using the concept of Crack Tip Opening Displacement and Critical CTOD for
advancing the Closure mechanisms.
5. Evaluation of the effects of Environment-Assisted Fracture, Fatigue Failure on the
components for its prevention.
References:
1. Elements of Fracture Mechanics: Prashanth Kumar, Wheeler Publishing, edition - 2015
2. Fracture Mechanics: T L Anderson,CRC Press, 4th edition – 2017.
3. Fracture Mechanics: Michael Janssen, Jan Zuidema, and Russell Wanhill, CRC Press,
edition - 2017.
4. Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics: David Broek,Springer,edition - 1982.
5. Fracture Mechanics: Surjya Kumar Maiti,Cambridge University Press,edition - 2015.
6. Fracture Mechanics: John Knott and Paul Withey, 2ndedition - 2008.
 Questions Q4& Q5 from Unit IV and Unit V
internal choice.
marks marks
 Questions Q1, Q2 and Q3 from Unit I, Unit II&
Unit III respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
MD-46

Category Program Elective Semester : II
Course title TRIBOLOGY AND BEARING DESIGN
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic theories of friction, wear and lubrication to predict the frictional
behaviour commonly encountered sliding interfaces.
2. Understand the principles of bearing selection and bearing arrangement in machines.
3. Apply the principles of high contact stresses (Herz stresses), fatigue-failure and
Elastohydrodynamic (EHL) lubrication in rolling bearings and gears.
4. Evaluate the static and dynamic load bearing capacity, probability of survival, bearing
mountings.
5. Analyse the porous and gel lubricated bearings and governing differential equation
UNIT – I
Introduction to Tribology: Introduction, Friction, theories of friction, friction control, Wear,
Wear characterisation, Regimes of lubrication, Classification of contacts, lubrication theories,
Effect of pressure and temperature on viscosity. Newton's Law of viscous forces, Flow through
stationary parallel plates. Hagen's poiseuille's theory, viscometers. Numerical problems, concept
of lightly loaded bearings, Petroff's equation, Numerical problems. 08 hrs.
UNIT – II
Hydrodynamic Lubrications: Pressure development mechanism. Converging and diverging

films and pressure induced flow. Reynolds's 2D equation with assumptions and its limitations.
Introduction to idealized slide bearing with fixed shoe and Pivoted shoes. Expression for load
carrying capacity. Location of centre of pressure, effect of end leakage on performance,
Numerical problems. 10 hrs.
UNIT – III
Journal Bearings: Introduction to idealized full journal bearings. Load carrying capacity of
idealized full journal bearings, Somerfield number and its significance, short and partial
bearings, Comparison between lightly loaded and heavily loaded bearings, effects of end leakage
on performance, Numerical problems. 10 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Hydrostatic Bearings: Hydrostatic thrust bearings, hydrostatic circular pad, annular pad,
rectangular pad bearings, types of flow restrictors, expression for discharge, load carrying
capacity and condition for minimum power loss, numerical problems, and hydrostatic journal
bearings.
MD-47
EHL Contacts: Introduction to Elasto - hydrodynamic lubricated bearings. Introduction to

‗EHL‘ constant. Grubin type solution. 10 hrs.
UNIT – V
Antifriction bearings: Advantages, selection, nominal life, static and dynamic load bearing
capacity, probability of survival, equivalent load, cubic mean load, bearing mountings.
Porous Bearings: Introduction to porous and gas lubricated bearings. Governing differential
equation for gas lubricated bearings, Equations for porous bearings and working principal,
Fretting phenomenon and its stages.
Magnetic Bearings: Introduction to magnetic bearings, Active magnetic bearings. Different
equations used in magnetic bearings and working principal. Advantages and disadvantages of
magnetic bearings.10 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Demonstrate fundamentals of tribology, lubricants and methods of lubrication.
2. Analyze bearings for load carrying capacity, frictional force and power loss.
3. Illustrate the different modes of lubrication system for various applications.
4. Design the bearing system for various type of viscosity of the lubricant with respect to
temperature and pressure in the bearing.
5. Design a governing differential equation for gas and porous bearings
References:
1. Mujamdar B C ―Introduction to Tribology of Bearing‖, Wheeler Publishing, New Delhi,

ISBN 0-471-65659-3
2. Radzimovsky, ―Lubrication of Bearings – Theoretical principles and design‖‖ Oxford
press company, 2000, ISBN5-341-43736-
3. F. M. Stansfield, Hydrostatic bearings for machine tools and similar applications,
Machinery Publishing, 1970, ISBN 10-484-34631-2
4. Harnoy, A. ―Bearing Design in Machinery, Engineering Tribology and Lubrication‖,
published by Marcel Dekker Inc. 2003, ISBNO- 8247-0703-6
MD-48

CIE – 50 Total:50

 Questions Q1 & Q5 from Unit I and Unit V
III& Unit IV respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 3
CO5 2 3 3
MD-49

Course title ROBOTICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the Robot Anatomy, Drive and control Systems.
2. Apply transformation for Kinematics of manipulator and interpolators for Trajectory planning.
3. Apply Dynamic Equations of Motion for a general Six Axis Manipulator
4. Understand Robot programming Languages and create program for industrial applications
5. Evaluate various sensors for robot sensing and vision applications
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT I
Introduction: Automation and Robotics, Historical Development, Definitions, Basic Structureof
Robots, Robot Anatomy, Complete Classification of Robots, Fundamentals about Robot
Technology, Factors related to use Robot Performance, Basic Robot Configurations and their
Relative Merits and Demerits, the Wrist & Gripper Subassemblies. Concepts about Basic Control
System, ,Control Loops of Robotic Systems, Different Types of Controllers-Proportional,
Integral, Differential, PID controllers. 06Hrs
UNIT II
Kinematics of Robot Manipulator: Introduction, General Mathematical Preliminaries
onVectors& Matrices, Direct Kinematics problem, Geometry Based Direct kinematics problem,
Co-ordinate and vector transformation using matrices, Rotation matrix, Inverse Transformations,
Problems, Composite Rotation matrix, Homogenous Transformations, Robotic Manipulator Joint
Co-Ordinate System, Euler Angle & Euler Transformations, Roll-Pitch-Yaw(RPY)
Transformation. D H Representation & Displacement Matrices for Standard Configurations,
Jacobian Transformation in Robotic Manipulation.
Trajectory Planning: – Introduction, Trajectory Interpolators, Basic Structure of
TrajectoryInterpolators, Cubic Joint Trajectories. General Design Consideration on Trajectories:-
4-3-4 & 3-5-3 Trajectories. 12 Hrs
UNIT III
Dynamics of Robotic Manipulators: Introduction,. Preliminary Definitions,
GeneralizedRobotic Coordinates, Jacobian for a Two link Manipulator, Euler Equations,
TheLagrangian Equations of motion. Application of Lagrange–Euler (LE) Dynamic Modeling of
Robotic Manipulators: - Velocity of Joints, Kinetic Energy of Arm, Potential Energy of Robotic
Arm, The Lagrange, Two Link Robotic Dynamics with Distributed Mass. 08 Hrs
UNIT IV
Robot Teaching: Introduction, Various Teaching Methods, Task Programming, Survey ofRobot
Level Programming Languages, A Robot Program as a Path in Space, Motion Interpolation,
WAIT, SIGNAL & DELAY Commands, Branching, Robot Language Structure, various Textual
Robot Languages Such as VAL II, RAIL and their Features, Typical Programming Examples
such as Palletizing, Loading a Machine Etc. 08 Hrs
MD-50
UNIT V
Robot Sensing & Vision: Various Sensors and their Classification, Use of Sensors and
SensorBased System in Robotics, Machine Vision System, Description, Sensing, Digitizing,
Image Processing and Analysis and Application of Machine Vision System, Robotic Assembly
Sensors and Intelligent Sensors.
Industrial Applications: Objectives, Automation in Manufacturing, Robot Application
inIndustry, Task Programming,, Robot Intelligence and Task Planning, Modern Robots, Future
Application and Challenges and Case Studies. 09 Hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOME
1. Describe the basic principles of Robotic technology, configurations, control and drives of
Robots.
2. Determine the manipulator location and trajectory of manipulator movement.
3. Determine the dynamic model of Robotic Manipulators.
4. Explain the basic principles of programming and develop the typical programs for Pick &
place, loading & unloading and palletizing applications
5. Evaluate the appropriate Sensor and Machine vision system for a given application.
References:
1.Robotics, control vision and intelligence-Fu, Lee and Gonzalez. McGraw Hill International,
2nd edition, 2007.
2.Introduction to Robotics- John J. Craig, Addison Wesley Publishing, 3rd edition, 2010.
3.Robotics for Engineers -YoramKoren, McGraw Hill International, 1st edition, 1985.
4.Industrial Robotics-Groover, Weiss, Nagel, McGraw Hill International, 2nd edition, 2012.
5.Robotic Engineering - An Integrated approach, Klafter, Chmielewski and Negin, PHI, 1st
edition, 2009
 Questions Q1& Q4 from Unit I and Unit IV
internal choice.
marks marks
III& Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
Note: SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 2
MD-51

Course title EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Significance of Stress-Strain Relation and
Theories of Failure and Measurements Using Strain Gauges.
2. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Nature of Lights, Polariscopes, Methods of
Compensation, Calibration Methods.
3. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Role of Stress-Optic Law, the Shear-Difference
Method to Separate the Principal Stresses. .
4. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Birefringent Coating, Hurter-Driffield Curves,
Holographic Set-Up.
5. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Moire Technique, Brittle Coatings to Find the
Stresses and Strains.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Stress-Strain Relations and Theories of Failure, Types and Working of Strain Gauges, Electrical
Resistance Strain Gauges- Types, Gauge Materials, Gauge Construction and Mounting of Strain
Gauges, Performance of Strain Gauges, Strain Gauge Circuits, Strain Gauge Rosettes,
Instrumentation and Problems. 14 hrs.
UNIT – II
Nature of Lights, Polarisation, Passage of light through media, Polariscopes and its components,
Stress-Optic relations, Isochromatics and Isoclinics, Analysis Through Trigonometrics
Resolutions.Dark & Light field, Methods of Compensation, Calibration Methods. 08 hrs.
UNIT – III
Introduction, Stress-Optic Law, Secondary Principal Stress, the Stress-Freezing Method, the
Shear-Difference Method, Material Fringe Constant at Critical Temperature, Photoelastic
Models, Post Casting Treatments, Scaling Model – Prototype Relations.
Scattering, Formation of Pattern, Stress-Optic Relations: Non-rotational Case, Scattered Light
Polariscope, Experimental Techniques. 12 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Introduction, Theory of Birefringent Coating, Reflection Polaricsope, Sensitivity of
Birefringment Coating, Separation of Principal Stresses.
Introduction, Equations for Plane Waves and Spherical Waves, Intensity, Coherence, Spherical
Radiator as an Object (Recording Process), Hurter-Driffield Curves, Reconstruction Process,
General Case, Magnification, Some General Observations, Holographic Set-Up, Holographic
Interferometry and Displacement Measurement. 06 hrs.
MD-52
UNIT – V
Moire Phenomenon, Moire Fringe Analysis, Moire Techniques for Inplane and Out-Of-Plane
Problems, Special Problems with Moire Technique.
Relation Between The State of Stress in Coating on the Model, Laws of Failure of Brittle
Coatings, Isostatics And Isoentatics, Materials, Crack-Detection Techniques, Model – Surface
Preparation and Application of Coating and Calibration. 08 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Apply the knowledge of Strain gauges, to measure the stresses generated by machinery,
Aircraft component, linkages etc.,
2. Analyze the stress states in localized areas or at specific points of a component.
3. Apply the stress-optic law which provides two equations for the three plane stress components
and the shear difference method may be used to obtain the third relation.
4. Apply the knowledge of the Birefringent Coatings to study the stresses in the two and three-
dimensional opaque bodies. Using holography static and dynamic displacements of objects
with optically rough surfaces are measured. These measurements can be applied to stresses,
strains.
5. Evaluate the Stresses and Strains for safe design using Moire Grating bonded to the
components and Brittle Coatings methods.
References:
1. Experimental Stress Analysis-L S Srinath, M R Raghavan, K Lingaiah and et.al, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
2. Experimental Stress Analysis - J. W. Dally and W. P. Riley, McGraw-Hill Book Co.
3. Elements of Experimental Stress Analysis- A. W. Hendry, Pergamon Press.
4. An Introduction to Experimental Stress and Strain Analysis- Dureli.
marks
 Questions Q2 & Q4 from Unit II & Unit IV
 Questions, Q1, Q3 and Q5from Unit I, Unit III
marks.
MD-53
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
MD-54

Course title MULTI BODY DYNAMICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the different kinematic mechanisms and their motions for at least two
degrees of freedom types of constraints.
2. Apply system of equations for position, velocity and acceleration.
3. Evaluate the dynamics of planar systems for various mechanical systems and create
equations of motions for dynamic systems.
4. Analyse different locations of a free body in space using Euler’s angles and Euler’s
parameters.
5. Create different kinematic pairs and carry out computation of forces from Lagrange’s
multi-pliers.
UNIT – I
Introduction:
The method of constraints for planar kinematic analysis. Revolute, prismatic, gear and cam pairs
are considered together with other 2 degrees-of-freedom types of constraints. 06 hrs.
UNIT – II
Basic principles for analysis of multi-body systems:
The automatic assembly of the systems of equations for position, velocity and acceleration
analysis. Iterative solution of systems of non linear equations. Geometry of masses. The principle
of virtual work and Lagrange‘s equations. 08 hrs.
UNIT – III
Dynamics of Planar Systems:
Dynamics of planar systems. Systematic computation and assembly of mass matrix.
Computation of planar generalized forces for external forces and for actuator-spring-damper
element. Simple applications of inverse and forward dynamic analysis. Numerical integration of
first-order initialvalue problems. The method of Baumgarte for the solution of mixed
differential-algebraic equations of motion. The use of coordinates partitioning, QR and SVD
decomposition for the orthogonalization of constraints. 12 hrs.
UNIT – IV
Kinematics of rigid bodies in space:
Reference frames for the location of a body in space. Euler angles and Euler parameters. The
formula of Rodrigues. Screw motion in space. Velocity, acceleration and angular velocity.
Relationship between the angular velocity vector and the time derivatives of Euler parameters.
14 hrs.
MD-55
UNIT – V
Kinematic analysis of spatial systems:
Basic kinematic constraints. Joint definition frames. The constraints required for the description
in space of common kinematic pairs (revolute, prismatic, cylindrical, spherical). Equations of
motion of constrained spatial systems.
Computation of Forces:
Computation of spatial generalized forces for external forces and for actuator-spring-damper
element. Computation of forces from Lagrange‘s multi-pliers. 10 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Understand the basic principles of multi body dynamics and derive the equations of
motion for interconnected bodies in multi body systems with 3D motion.
2. Solve the system of equations using principles of virtual work and Lagrange‘s
equations of motion for interconnected bodies.
3. Relate the constrained differential equations by writing the programs to analyze multi
body systems including the kineto-static analysis.
4. Analyze the reference frames for location of a body in space by angular velocity vector
and the time derivatives of Euler parameters.
5. Create modelling and simulation of multi body systems.
References:
1. Wittenburg. J, Dynamics of Systems of Rigid Bodies, B.G. Teubner, Stuttgart, 1977.
2. Kane, T.R, Levinson, D.A., Dynamics: Theory and Applications, McGraw-Hill Book
Co., 1985.
3. Nikaravesh, P.E., Computer Aided Analysis of Mechanical Systems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1988.
4. Roberson, R.E., Schwertassek, R., Dynamics of Multibody Systems, Springer-
Verlag,Berlin, 1988.
5. Haug, E.J., Computer-Aided Kinematics and Dynamics of Mechanical Systems-Basic
Methods, Allyn and Bacon, 1989.
6. Huston, R.L., Multibody Dynamics, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1990.
MD-56

IV& Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 3
CO5 2 3 2
MD-57
Course Code 18MD2E2B M.Tech ( Machine Design)

Course title SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the strength and weaknesses of a given class of smart materials
2. Apply the smart material for industrial application
3. Analyse the strengths and weaknesses of a smart material
4. Evaluate smart materials and its integration
5. Create sensors and actuators for smart structures
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Smart Structures: Types of Smart Structures, Potential Feasibility of Smart Structures, Key
Elements of Smart Structures, Applications of Smart Structures. Piezoelectric materials,
Properties, piezoelectric Constitutive Relations, Depoling and Coercive Field, field strain
relation. Hysteresis, Creep and Strain rate effects, Inchworm Linear Motor. Beam Modeling:
Beam modeling with induced strain Rate effects, Inchworm Linear Motor Beam Modeling with
induced strain Actuation, single Actuators, dual Actuators, Pure Extension, Pure Bending
harmonic excitation, Bernoulli-Euler beam Model, problems 12hrs.
UNIT – II
Shape memory Alloy: Experimental Phenomenology, Shape Memory Effect, Phase
Transformation, Tanaka‘s Constitutive Model, testing of SMA Wires, Vibration Control through
SMA, Multiplexing. Applications of SMA and Problems. ER and MR Fluids: Mechanisms and
properties, Fluid Composition and behavior, The Bingham Plastic and Related Models, Pre-Yield
Response. Post-Yield flow applications in Clutches, Dampers and Others. 12hrs.
UNIT – III
Vibration Absorbers: Series and Parallel Damped Vibrations (Overview), Active Vibration
Absorbers, Fiber Optics, Physical Phenomena, Characteristics, Sensors, Fiber Optics in Crack
Detection, applications. Control of Structures: Modeling, Control Strategies and Limitations,
Active Structures in Practice. 06hrs.
UNIT – IV
Introduction to Self healing materials, Dielectric elastomer, Electroactive materials,
Thermoelectric materials, Photomechanical materials, Chromogenic material and
Magnetochromic materials 06hrs.
UNIT – V
MEMS - Mechanical Properties of MEMS Materials, Scaling of Mechanical Systems,
Fundamentals of Control Theory, The Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS, Miniaturization,
Microelectronics Integration, Devices: Sensors and Actuators, Conductivity of Semiconductors,
Crystal Planes and Orientation, Stress and Strain Relations, Flexural Beam Bending Analysis
Under Simple Loading Conditions, Polymers in MEMS, Optical MEMS, Applications. Devices:
Sensors and Actuators, Conductivity of Semiconductors, Crystal Planes and Orientation, (Stress
MD-58
and Strain Relations, Flexural Beam Bending Analysis under Simple Loading Conditions),
Polymers in MEMS, Optical MEMS Applications. 12 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES

1. Describe on smart materials, its classification
2. Determine effectiveness of smart materials
3. Verify experimental results for smart materials
4. Validate the compatibility of smart materials and structures
5. Design simple models using smart materials
References:
1. M. V. Gandhi and B. S. Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman and Hall,
London, New York, 1992 (ISBN: 0412370107).
2. B. Culshaw, Smart Structures and Materials, Artech House, Boston, 1996 (ISBN:
0890066817).
3. A. V. Srinivasan, Smart Structures: Analysis and Design, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge;
4. K. Uchino, Piezoelectric Actuators and ultrasonic Motors , Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Boston, 1997 (ISBN: 0792398114).
5. G. Engdahl, Handbook of Giant Magnetostrictive Materials, Academic Press, San Diego,
Calif, London, 2000 (ISBN: 012238640X)
CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 Marks Quiz = 05 marks Total:50
SEE – 100 Answer FIVE full questions
marks  Questions Q3 & Q4 from Unit III & Unit IV respectively
shall be answered and shall have internalchoice. 20* 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
 Questions Q1, Q2 & Q5 from Unit I , Unit II & Unit V marks
respectively shall be answered respectively shall be 20*3= 60 Marks
answered and shall not have internalchoice.
Note: SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be
Mapping of Course Outcomes (COS) to Program Outcomes (POs) and

Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs)
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 2
MD-59

Course title MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. To understand over view of Mechatronics Systems
2. To understand the working of various components of Mechatronics system for various
Applications
3. To understand the different types of amplifying devices and data acquisition systems
4. To understand the Dynamics of a Mechatronics System and to Analyse the Interfacing of
Microcontroller, Sensors and Actuators
5. To understand the Micro Fabrication Processes and fault finding
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Definition and Introduction to Mechatronics Systems, Overview of Mechatronics products and
their functioning, measurement systems, Control Systems, simple Controllers, Integrated Design
Issues in Mechatronics, Mechatronics Design Process, Key Elements of Mechatronics system.
Mathematical models, mechanical system building blocks, electrical system building blocks,
thermal system building blocks, pneumatic systems build blocks. Electro-mechanical systems,
hydro-mechanical systems. 08hours.
UNIT – II
IntroductionSensors, Sensors for Motion and Position Measurement, Proximity sensors,
Electrical strain and stress measurement, Force measurement, Vibration—Acceleration Sensors,
Time of flight sensors, Binary force sensors, Temperature measurement, Sensors for Flow
Measurement, Pressure measurement, Problems, Introduction toActuators, Electromagnetic
Principles, Solenoids and Relays, Electric Motors, DC Motors, Permanent Magnet DC Motor,
Dynamic Equations, Electronic Control of a Permanent Magnet DC Motor, The servo motor,
Stepper Motors, Selecting a Motor, Hydraulics, Hydraulic Valves, Hydraulic Actuators,
Pneumatics. 12 hours.
UNIT – III
Introduction to Signal Conditioning,Amplifiers, ideal operational amplifier model, inverting
amplifier, non-inverting amplifier, unity-gain buffer summing amplifier, difference amplifier,
instrumentation amplifier, integrator amplifier, differentiator amplifier, comparator, sample and
hold amplifier, active filters, Problems, Data acquisition, Introduction, Sampling and aliasing,
Quantization theory, Digital-to-analog conversion hardware, Analog-to-digital conversion
hardware, Problems, Protection, Filtering, Wheatstone Bridge, Digital signals, Multiplexers,
Data Acquisition systems. 07 hours.
MD-60
UNIT – IV
Interfacing microcontrollers with actuators, Interfacing with general-purpose three-state
transistors, Interfacing relays,, Interfacing solenoids Interfacing stepper motors, Interfacing
permanent magnet motors, Interfacing sensors, Interfacing with a DAC, Interfacing power
supplies, Interfacing with RS 232 and RS 485, Compatibility at an interface, Problems.
Modelling in the frequency domain, Modelling in the time domain, Converting a transfer
function to state space, Converting a state-space representation to a transfer function, Block
diagrams, Problems.
Introduction System response, Dynamic characteristics of a control system Zero-order systems
First-order systems Second-order systems General second-order transfer function Systems
modeling and interdisciplinary analogies Stability The Routh-Hurwitz stability criterion Steady-
state errors, Problems. 14 hours.
UNIT – V
Introduction to Micro-fabrication, Photolithography, Ion implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation
Chemical vapour deposition, Physical vapour deposition (Sputtering), Deposition by expitaxy,
Etching. Bulk micro-manufacturing, Surface micro-machining, LIGA process. Fault Finding,
Design for manufacturing, Practical Case Studies. 07 hours.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES

1. To develop the Mechatronics Systems in various applications.
2. To use the various components of Mechantronic systems and their Circuits.
3. To analyse the amplifying devices and data acquisition systems.
4. To Interface the Microcontroller, Sensors, Actuators and the System Models and to
recognize the Dynamics of a Mechatronics System
5. To apply the Micro Fabrication Processes in practical case studies and identify the faults
in the Mechatronic Sytems.
References:
1. Introduction to Mechatronics & Measurement Systems- Michel B. Histand and David.
Alciatore, McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. Mechatronics - W. Bolton, 2nd edition, Addison Wesley Longman, 1999.
3. Understanding Electro-Mechanical Engineering an Introduction to Mechatronics -Lawrence
J. Kamm, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1st edition, 1996.
4. Mechatronics System Design - Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, Cengage Learning,
2nd edition, 2011.
5. Mechatronics - Mahalik, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003.
6. Mechatronics - HMT, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1998.
MD-61

 Questions Q1 & Q3 from Unit Im & Unit III
internal choice.
marks marks
 Questions, Q2, Q4 and Q5from Unit II, Unit IV
and Unit V respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 2 3 2
MD-62
Course Code 18MD2L01 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Laboratory Semester : II
Course title DESIGN LAB-II
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 2
1. Understand computational skills to solve various engineering problems.
2. Apply MATLAB and Finite Element Analysis to solve the problems
3. Analyse experimental stress analysis methods.
4. Evaluate the experimental and computational methods
5. Create methodology of solving the problems using computational and experimental
methods
Part A
Solving the following using MATLAB program/ FE Analysis
1. Spring-Mass-Damper system.
2. Simple and Double pendulum.
3. Frequency response of systems having more than one degree of freedom.
4. Valve-Spring Model.
5. Evaluation of influence of crack closure on crack propagation threshold.
6. Analysis of 2D stresses.
7. Evaluation of A, B and D matrices for laminated composites.
8. Case Studies.
Part B
Experimental and Finite Element Analysis
1. Stress analysis of circular disc under diametrical compression stress analysis of
rectangular plate with circular cut out under uni-axial and shear load.
2. Stress analysis of rectangular plate with rectangular cut out under uni-axial and shear
load.
3. Stress analysis of circular disc with circular cut out under diametrical compression.
4. Stress analysis of rectangular plate with a semi circular notch.
5. Vibration experiments using FFT analyser.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Illustrate experimental stress analysis method
2. Determine the response of specimens using Experimental Stress Analysis.
3. Compare of Finite Element Analysis using commercial softwares with experimental
methods.
4. Validate experimental stress results with finite element analysis
5. Develop experimental methodology using Photo elasticity experiments\FEA for different
cross-section and loading condition
MD-63
Continuous Internal Marks Semester End Evaluation (SEE) Marks
Evaluation (Laboratory– 50 (Laboratory – 100 marks)
marks)
the laboratory every week
Test at the end of the semester 20 Experiment-1 (Part-A) = 35 marks 70
Experiment-2 (Part-B) = 35 marks
Total 100
Total (CIE) 50 Total(SEE) 50*
Note:* = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be
Mapping of course outcomes (COs) to Program Outcomes (POs )
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 2 2
MD-64
Course Code 18MD2S01 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Seminar Semester: II
Course title SEMINAR - II
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

The objectives of the SEMINAR-II is to prepare the students to learn to:
same effectively.
presentation. Interact with peers to acquire the qualities of thoughtfulness,
friendliness, adaptability, responsiveness, and politeness in-group discussion.
Overcome stage fear during oral presentation.
GUIDE LINES

offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the faculty/Guide
assigned.
3. Select one pertinent research paper/topic for the seminar presentation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

3. Make an effective presentation with seamless flow of content within the time
allocated. Overcome inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the spirit
of team work.
MD-65


shall comprise of Chairperson of the Department, Faculty/Guide and one more faculty member
nominated by Chairperson of the Department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per the rubrics
given below:
Rubrics for Evaluation: Weightage

Review of literature and technical content : 35%
Report of seminar : 25%
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MD-66
Course Code 18ME2M01 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Mandatory Audit Semester: II
Course title PEDAGOGY STUDIES
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1
CIE Marks: 50 Total Max. Marks: 50
1. Understand and apply the best practices in Pedagogy studies.
2. Analyse the different pedagogy approaches for effective teaching learning process.
3. Apply the modern tools used in pedagogy.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT –I
 Introduction and Methodology:
 Aims and rationale, Policy background, Conceptual framework and terminology.
 Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education.
 Conceptual framework, Research question.
 Overview of methodology and searching. 05hrs
UNIT –II
 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and
informal classrooms in developing countries.
 Curriculum, teacher education, usage of modern tools. 04hrs
UNIT –III
 Evidence on the effectiveness of pedagogical practices.
 Methodology for the in depth stage: quality assessment of included studies.
 How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and
guidance materials best support effective pedagogy?
 Theory of change.
 Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical practices.
 Pedagogic theory and pedagogical approaches.
 Teacher‘s attitudes and beliefs and pedagogic strategies. 05hrs
UNIT –IV
 Professional development; alignment with classroom practices and follow-up support.
 Peer support
 Support from the head teacher and the community.
 Curriculum and assessment.
 Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes. 05hrs
MD-67
UNIT –V
 Research gaps and future directions
 Research design
 Contexts
 Pedagogy
 Teacher education
 Curriculum and assessment
 Dissemination and research impact. 05hrs
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Discuss and compare the different practices of Pedagogy studies for effective teaching
and learning.
2. Emphasise on different Pedagogy approaches for enhanced teaching learning process.
3. Implement the capabilities of modern tools used in Pedagogy studies.

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare,
31 (2): 245-261.
2. Agrawal M (2004) Curriculum reform in school: The importance of evaluation, Journal
of Curriculum Studies, 36(3): 361-379.
3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana – does it count? Multi-site teacher
education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.
4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Proyor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and
learning of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count?
International Journal Educational Development, 33 (3): 272-282.
5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary
education. Oxford and Boston; Blackwell.
6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, ‗learning to read‘ campaign.
7. www.pratham.org/images/resource%20working%20paper%202.pdf.

marks Test II (Unit IV & V) = 15 marks Unit-VI(AAT) = 15 marks marks
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 1
CO2 1
CO3 1 1 1
MD-68

Category Program Elective Semester : III
Course title THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the classical structural mechanics approximations of Membrane, Plate and
Shell theories.
2. Apply energy formulations to demonstrate the consistent derivation of approximate
boundary conditions and edge effects.
3. Apply the necessary tools to descried static, dynamic and non-linear motions.
4. Evaluate the buckling vibration and stress parameters in thin shells using numerical
approximation techniques.
5. Analyse the geometric properties of shell revolution shells vibration of cylindrical shells
UNIT – I
General Introduction: Review of equation of elasticity –kinematics, compatibility equations,

stress measures-equations of motions constitutive relations-transformation of stresses, strains and
stiffness-energy principles and variation methods in elasticity-virtual work-external and internal
virtual work variation operator-functional-Euler Lagrange equations-energy principles-
Hamilton‘s principle-principle of minimum total potential- applications.
08 hrs.
UNIT – II
Classical Theory of plates: Plates as structural elements-stress and moment resultants-

assumptions made in the classical theory-displacement field and strains- equations of equilibrium
in Cartesian coordinates and in polar coordinates-boundary conditions –bending of rectangular
plates with various boundary conditions and loading-symmetrical and asymmetrical bending of
circular plates-limitations of classical theory-finite element analysis.
12 hrs.
UNIT – III
Buckling Analysis of rectangular plates: Buckling of simply supported plates under

compressive forces-governing equations-the Navier solution-biaxial compression of a plate-
uniaxial compression of a plate-buckling of plates simply supported on two opposite edges-
LLevy‘s solution-buckling of plates with various boundary conditions-general formulation-finite
element analysis. 12hrs.
UNIT – IV
Vibration of plates: Governing equations for natural flexural vibrations of rectangular plates-
natural vibrations of plates simply supported on all edges-vibration of plates with two parallel
sides simply supported Levy‘s solution-vibration of plates with different boundary conditions-
Rayleigh-Ritz method Natural Vibration of plates with general boundary conditions-transient
analysis of rectangular plates-finite element analysis 08 hrs.
MD-69
UNIT – V
Analysis of Thin Elastic shells of Revolution: Classification of shell surfaces-geometric
properties of shell of revolution-general strain displacement relations for shells of revolution-
stress resultants-equations of motions of motion of thin shells, analytical solution for thin
cylindrical shells-membrane theory-flexure under axisymmetric loads, shells with double
curvature-geometric considerations-equations of equilibrium-bending of spherical shells-
vibration of cylindrical shells-finite element analysis. 08 hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES

1. Explain structural mechanics approximations of membrane, plates and shells.
2. Describe simple modifications to the membrane plate and shell theories.
3. Describe the static, dynamic, and non-linear motion of membrane, plate and shell
structures.
4. Analyze numerical problems in shells of revolution.
5. Validate the geometric properties and vibrations using finite element analysis.
References:
1. Reddy,J.N., "Theory and Analysis of Elastic Plates & Shells", C.R.C. Press, NY, USA,
2nd Edition, ISBN 9780849384158
2. Szilard, R., Theory and Analysis of Plates, Prentice Hall Inc., 1999,/SBN 0-12-9353336-
2
3. Timoshenko, S. and Krieger S.W. Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw Hill Book
Company, New York 1990, ISBN 0-13-913426-3
4. Wilhelm Fltigge, Stresses in shells, Springer —Verlag, ISBN 978-3-662-01028-0

CIE – 50 Total:50

marks.
MD-70
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 3
CO5 2 3 3
MD-71

Course title THEORY OF PLASTICITY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Crystalline Structure in Metals,
Mechanism of Plastic Deformation, Factors Affecting Plastic Deformation.
2. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Empirical Equations, Theories of Plastic
flow: Experimental Verification.
3. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Yield Criteria, True Stress-Strain Curve,
Stress Distribution.
4. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the Bending of Beams, Torsion of Bars, Thick
Walled Pressure Vessels, Residual stresses.
5. Understand and acquire the knowledge of the stresses and strains developed in the Rings,
Discs, Cylinders and Flat Rings, Expansion of a Circular Hole subjected to various
loading conditions.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction, Crystalline Structure in Metals, Mechanism of Plastic Deformation, Factors
Affecting Plastic Deformation, Strain Hardening, Recovery, Re-crystallization and Grain
Growth, Flow Figures or Luder‘s Lines.
Introduction, Types of Materials, Empirical Equations, Theories of Plastic flow: Experimental
Verification, Concept of Plastic Potential, The Maximum Work Hypothesis, Mechanical work
for Deforming a Plastic Substance. 06 hrs
UNIT – II
Introduction, Yield or Plasticity Conditions: Discussion, Experimental Evidence, Geometrical
Evidences, The Haigh-Westergaard Stress Space.
Introduction, Stress–Strain Curve: Ideal, Elastic Incompressible Materials, Volume Constancy
Equation, True Stress-Strain Curve, Work Done in Stretching, Stress Distributionat the Neck of:
Cylindrical Bar, Flat plate, Instability in various geometry under different Loads, Bucking and
Plane Strain Compression, Problems. 08 hrs
UNIT – III
Introduction, Shear Stress Distribution, Residual Stress in Plastic Bending, Plastic Bending
Considering Work Hardening, Deflection in Plastic Bending, Plane Strain Bending of Beam,
Problems.
Introduction, Plastic Torsion of Circular Bar and Non Circular Shafts, Residual Stress, Sand
Heap Analogy, Shape factors in Torsion, Problems. 14hrs
UNIT – IV
Introduction, Thick Walled Cylindrical and Spherical Pressure Vessels, Problems.
Introduction, Rotating: Ring, Disc, Cylinder and Flat Rings, Expansion of a Circular Hole in a
infinite Sheet, Problems. 14hrs
MD-72
UNIT – V
Introduction, Basic Equations, Convention for Slip-Line, Hencky‘s Equations, Properties and
Analysis of Slip-Line Fields, Hodographs. 06 hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Apply mechanism of the movement of dislocations of atoms in crystal planes to slip past one
another to analyze the Plastic Deformation.
2. Apply the Empirical Equations of Plastic flow to determine the strain path and final state of
stresses.
3. Evaluate the onset of plastic yielding in the ductile materials by applying the yield criteria.
4. Evaluate the magnitude of undesired residual stresses present in the components due to
various loading conditions and to suggest the proper method to relive the stress.
5. Analyze the plastic yielding in rotating axisymmetric components for safe design to prevent
the components entering the plastic limit.
References:
1. Theory of Plasticity: Sadhu Singh, Khanna Publishers, edition - 2015.
2. Theory of Plasticity: J Charabarthy, Tata McGraw-Hill publishers, 3rd edition - 2011.
3. Plasticity Theory: Jacob Lubliner, MacMillen,edition - 1990.
4. The Mathematical Theory of Plasticity : R Gill,Oxford University Press, edition - 1998.
5. Fundamentals of the Theory of Plasticity : L M Kachanov,Dover Publication ,edition -
2004.
 Questions Q2, Q3 and Q4 from Unit II, Unit III&
Unit IV respectively shall be answered and shall 20*3= 60 Marks
marks.
Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO’S) to Program Outcomes (PO’s)
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
MD-73

Course title OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the elements of optimal problem formulation.
2. Apply Direct and gradient based optimization method to solve single and multivariable
Problems.
3.Analyse Un-constrained and constrained nonlinear function for minimization or maximization.
4.Understand Non-traditional optimization methods such as Genetic Algorithms.
5.Apply Traditional and Non-Traditional Optimization Algorithms to solve Engineering
problems.
Course Contents
Unit-I
Introduction, Optimal Problem Formulation, Optimal Design of Various Engineering Problems,
Direct & Gradient Based Methods of Single Variable Optimization. 06Hrs
Unit-II
Multivariable Optimization Techniques, Unidirectional Search Methods, Direct Search Methods
(Evolutionary Optimization Method, Simplex Search Method, Hooke-Jeeves Pattern Search
Method, Powell‘s Conjugate Direction Method), Gradient Based Methods (Cauchy‘s Steepest
Descent Method, Newton‘s Method, Marquardt‘s Method, Conjugate Gradient Method, Variable
–Metric Method). 10Hrs
Unit-III
Constrained Optimization Algorithms Transformation Methods (Penalty Function Method,
Method of Multipliers), Direct Search (Variable Elimination Method, Complex Search Method,
Random Search Method), Linearized Search (Frank-Wolfe Method, Cutting Plane Method),
Feasible Direction Methods, Reduced Gradient Methods, Gradient Projection Methods. 10Hrs
Unit-IV
Introduction to Genetic Algorithms, Working Principles, Coding, Fitness Function, GA
operators, Difference and Similarities Between GAs and Traditional Method, GAs for Non-
Linear Single and Multivariable Unconstrained and constrained Optimization, Real Coded-GAs,
Multi-Objective GAs. 08 Hrs
Unit-V
Linear Programming, Non Traditional Optimization Algorithms, Simulated Annealing,
Specialized Algorithms for Integer and Geometric Programming, Global Optimization using
Traditional and Non-Traditional Optimization Algorithms, Software related to Optimization.
08Hrs
UNIT – VI
MD-74
Course Outcomes
1. Describe modeling techniques to formulate a real life problem into a mathematical model.
2. Implement Direct and gradient based optimization method to solve single and multivariable
Problems.
3. Distinguish Un-constrained and Constrained nonlinear function for minimization or
maximization.
4. Illustrate Non-traditional optimization methods such as Genetic Algorithms.
5. Operate software related to optimization and implement computer programs to solve practical
problems using different optimization algorithms.
Reference Books:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, ―Optimization for Engineering Design‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. R.C. Johnson, ―Optimum Design of Mechanical Elements‖, Willey, New York, 1980.
3. J. S. Arora, ―Introduction to Optimum Design‖, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.
4. S. S. Stricker, ―Optimising performance of energy systems‖ Battelle Press, New York, 1985.
5. L.C.W. Dixon, ―Non-Linear Optimisation - Theory and Algorithms‖, Birkhauser, Boston,
1980. 6. R.J. Duffin, E.L. Peterson and C.Zener ―Geometric Programming-Theory and
Applications‖, Willey, New York, 1967.
7. G.B. Dantzig ―Linear Programming and Extensions Princeton University Press‖, Princeton, N.
J., 1963.
8. R. Bellman ―Dynamic Programming-Princeton‖ University Press, Princeton, N.J. 1957.
Quiz = 05 marks
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks Unit VI [AAT]= 15 marks marks
Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks
 Questions Q1& Q5 from Unit I and Unit V
internal choice.
marks marks
Note: SEEshall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 2
MD-75

Category Seminar Semester: III
Course title SEMINAR – III
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

The objectives of the SEMINAR-III is to prepare the students to learn to:
1 Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and analyse
the same effectively.
2 Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected
3 Acquire communication and time management skills for effective and impactful
GUIDE LINES
1 Seminar preparation and presentation is an individual student activity.

2 Topic may be of general/ specific interest to program of engineering or electives not
assigned.
3 Select one pertinent research paper/topic for the seminar presentation.
4 Prepare and submit a detailed technical report of the seminar topic.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1 Carry out the literature survey of topic of seminar.

2 Prepare a technical report on the selected area/topic.
3 Make an effective presentation with seamless flow of content within the time
of team work.

MD-76
nominated by Chairperson of the Department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per the rubrics
given below:

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MD-77
Course Code 18MD3I01 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Internship/ Mini Project Semester: III
Course title INTERNSHIP / MINI PROJECT
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 10 --- 5
INTERNSHIP

Objectives of the internship
1. Provide an opportunity to see how classroom and textbook learning applies to the real
world, and to expose the students to the relevant work experience.
2. Pay close attention to all the steps that go onto completing a job, thereby, help students
to become workforce ready before entering the job market as a graduate. Provide an
opportunity to select the topic of dissertation work by evaluating the requirement of
organisation.
3. Prepare and present a technical report of internship.
GUIDELINES
1. Student has to approach the concerned heads of various Industries/organization, which
are related to the field of specialization of the M. Tech program.
2. If any student gets internship, he/she has to submit the internship offer letter duly signed
by the concerned authority of the company to the Chairperson of the Department.
3. The internship on full time basis will be immediately after the examination of II semester
and during vacation of III semester for a minimum period of 8 weeks without affecting
the regular class work.
4. The progress has to be reported periodically Internship Guide assigned by the
Chairperson as per the format acceptable to the respective industry /organizations and to
the Institution.
5. At the end of the internship the student has to prepare and submit a detailed report and
submit.
6. Students are advised to use ICT tools such as Skype to report their progress and
submission of periodic progress reports to the faculty in charge or guide.
7. Duly signed report from guide and external supervisor from the organization where
internship is offered has to be submitted to the Chairperson of the Department for
evaluation.
The broad format of the internship final report shall contain Cover Page, Certificate from
College, Certificate from Industry / Organization of internship, Acknowledgement,
Synopsis, Table of Contents, chapters of Profile of the Organization - Organizational
structure, Products, Services, Business Partners, Financials, Manpower, Societal Concerns,
Professional Practices, Activities of the Department where internship is done, Tasks
Performed and summary of the tasks performed. specific technical and soft skills that
student has acquired during internship, References & Annexure.
MD-78
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The student will be able to:

1. Apply the gained experience along with the theoretical knowledge to solve the real
world problems what engineers ready do.
2. Get equipped with experience required before entering the job market. Explore the
possibility of formulating the dissertation problem.
3. Prepare a technical report and make a presentation of details of internship.
1.Marks awarded by guide (Internal examiner) = 50 marks

50*
CIE 2.Marks awarded by the department internship/mini project monitoring committee
Marks
= 50 marks
Presentation of internship work in the presence of Guide (Internal examiner) and 50**
SEE
external examiner = 100 marks Marks
Note: *= CIE be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
**= SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
Rubrics for CIE:

Sl. Particulars Weightage Total marks
no of CIE
1 Topic of internship 10%
2 Objectives of internship 10%
3 Specific skills acquired 20%
50*
4 Documentation 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
MD-79
Rubrics for SEE:

no of SEE
50**
4 Document 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
Note: ** = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for
50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 3
MINI PROJECT
1. Understand the method of applying engineering knowledge/use application software to solve

specific problems after carrying out relevant literature survey.
2. Apply engineering and management principles while executing the project.
3. Demonstrate the skills for good technical report writing and presentation.
MD-80
COURSE CONTENT/GUIDELINES
Student shall take up small problems in the field of domain of program as mini project. It can be
related to a solution to an engineering problem, verification and analysis of experimental data
available, conducting experiments on various engineering subjects, material characterisation,
familiarising a software tool for solution to selected engineering problem, etc.
The mini project must be carried out preferably using the resources available in the
department/college and it can be of interdisciplinary also.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The students shall be able to:

1. Conduct experiments / use the capabilities of relevant application software/ simulation tools
individually to generate data/ solve problems.
2. Assess the available engineering resources available in the institution.
3. Prepare and present a technical document of mini project.

50*
Marks
= 50 marks
Presentation of mini project work in the presence of Guide (Internal examiner) and 50**
SEE
**= SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
1 Selection of the topic & formulation of objectives 10%
2 Modelling and simulation/algorithm 25%
development/experiment setup
3 Conducting experiments/implementation/testing 25% 50*
4 Demonstration & Presentation 15%
5 Report writing 25%
Total 100%
MD-81
Rubrics for SEE:
The SEE shall be done by two examiners out of which one examiner is the guide of mini
project. The following weightage would be given for the examination. Evaluation shall be done
in batches, not exceeding 6 students.

no of CIE
1 Brief write-up about the project 05%
2 Presentation/demonstration of the project 20%
3 Methodology and Experimental Results & 25%
Discussion 50**
4 Report 25%
5 Viva Voce 20%
Total 100%
Note: ** = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for
50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 2 3
CO3 3
MD-82
Course
18MD3D01 M.Tech ( Machine Design )
Code
Category Dissertation Work Semester: III
Course title DISSERTATION WORK PHASE -I
No. of Hours/Week
Scheme and
L T P S Credits Total hours = 80
Credits
0 0 10 0 5
Total Max.
CIE Marks: 100 SEE Marks:100 Duration of SEE: 01 hours
Marks: 200

1. Choose a problem applying relevant knowledge and skills acquired during the course.
Formulate the specifications of the project work, identify the set of feasible solutions,
prepare, and execute project plan considering professional, cultural and societal factors.
Identify the problem-solving methodology using literature survey and present the same.
2. Develop experimental planning and select appropriate techniques and tools to conduct
experiments to Evaluate and critically examine the outcomes followed by concluding the
results and identifying relevant applications. Preparation of synopsis, preliminary report for
approval of topic selected along with literature survey, objectives and methodology.
3. Develop oral and written communication skills to effectively convey the technical content.
GUIDELINES
The Dissertation work will start in III semester and should be a problem with research
potential and should involve scientific research, design, generation/collection and analysis of
data, determining solution and must preferably bring out the individual contribution.
The Dissertation work will have to be done by only one student and the topic of
dissertation must be decided by the guide and the student. The dissertation work shall be
carried out, on-campus or in an industry or in an organisation with prior approval from the
Chairperson of the Department. The student has to be in regular contact with the guide atleast
once in a week.
The report of Dissertation work phase I shall contain cover page, certificate from
College/Industry/Organisation, Acknowledgement, List of Figures and Tables Contents,
Nomenclature, Chapters of Introduction including motivation to choose topic, Literature
survey, Conclusion of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of Dissertation, Methodology
to be followed, Experimental requirements, References and Annexure.
The preliminary results (if available) of the problem of Dissertation work may also be
discussed in the report.
MD-83
COURSE OUTCOME:
The students will be able to:
1. Self learn various topics relevant to Dissertation work. Carry out the literature survey
from National/International reference journals, articles and books contact resource
persons for selected topics of Dissertation.
2. Write and prepare a technical report.
3. Present and defend the contents of Dissertation work phase I in front of technically
qualified audience effectively.
1.Marks awarded by guide (Internal examiner) = 50 marks 50*
CIE
2.Marks awarded by the department dissertation monitoring committee = 50 marks Marks
Presentation of Dissertation work Phase-I in the presence of Guide (Internal 50**

SEE
examiner) and external examiner = 100marks Marks
marks.
Rubrics for CIE: Weightage
1. Introduction and Justification of topic = 10%
2. Literature survey and Conclusion = 30%
3. Objectives and Scope of Dissertation work = 30%
4. Methodology to be adopted = 20%
5. Presentation of contents of Dissertation work Phase-I = 10%
Rubrics for SEE: Weightage

2. Literature survey and its Conclusion = 30%
4. Methodology, Experimental /Software = 20%
5. Presentation of Dissertation Phase-I = 10%
Mapping of Course Outcomes (COs) to Program Outcomes (POs)
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 2 3
1. Low, 2.Medium, 3. High
MD-84

Category Seminar Semester: IV
Course title SEMINAR – IV
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1
The objectives of the SEMINAR-IV are to prepare the students to learn to:
1 Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and analyse the
same effectively.
2 Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected
GUIDE LINES

assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

of team work.
MD-85


nominated by Chairperson of the department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per the rubrics
given below:

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MD-86
Course Code 18MD4D01 M.Tech ( Machine Design )

Category Dissertation Work Semester: IV
Course title DISSERTATION WORK PHASE -II
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 30 --- 15
SEE Marks: Total Max. Marks:
CIE Marks: 100 Duration of SEE: 01 Hour
100 200

1. Apply/Use different experimental techniques, equipments, software/ Computational/
Analytical /Modelling and Simulation tools required for conducting tests and generate
other relevant data. Students will also be able to design and develop an experimental
prototype setup/test rig/frame work/test bench.
2. Analyse the results of the experiments conducted/models developed.
3. Create a detailed technical document as per format based on the outcome of dissertation
work phase I and II.
GUIDELINES
Dissertation work phase II is the continuation of project work started in III semester. The
report of final Dissertation work that includes the details of Dissertation work phase I and
phase II should be presented in a standard format. The candidate shall prepare a detailed
report of final dissertation work in bound form that includes Cover Paper, Certificate from
College/Industry/Organisation, Acknowledgement, Abstract, Table of contents, List of
Figures and Table, Nomenclature, Chapter of Introduction, Literature survey, Conclusion of
literature survey, Objectives and Scope of dissertation work, Methodology, Experimentation,
Results, Discussion, Conclusion, Scope for future work, References, Annexure and full text
of the publication (submitted or published).
COURSE OUTCOMES:

1. Conduct experiments/ implement the capabilities of different Software /Computational /
Analytical/Modelling and simulation tools individually and generate data for validation
of hypothesis.
2. Investigate and assess the results obtained within the scope of experiments conducted
followed by Conclusions.
3. Prepare a detailed technical document, present and defend the contents of Dissertation
work before technically qualified audience effectively.
MD-87
1. Marks awarded by guide = 50 marks

100 50*
CIE 2. Marks awarded by the department dissertation monitoring committee
marks marks
(Guide + Two faculty members )= 50 marks
1. Dissertation evaluation by guide (Internal examiner) = 100 marks
2. Dissertation evaluation by external examiner =100 marks
300 50**
SEE 3. Viva-Voce examination by guide and external examiner who evaluated the
marks marks
dissertation = 100 marks
Note: * = CIE be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
** = SEE shall be conducted for 300 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
6. Presentation of background of dissertation work = 10%
7. Literature survey, Problem formulation and Objectives = 30%
8. Presentation of methodology and experimentation = 30%
9. Results and Discussion = 20%
10. Questions and Answers = 10%

1. Originality = 5%
2. Literature survey = 15%
3. Problem formulation, Objectives and Scope of Work = 10%
4. Methodology, Experimentation/Theoretical modeling = 10%
5. Results, Discussion and Conclusion = 20%
7. Submission/Publication of technical paper in Journals/Conference = 20%
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3
MD-88
Course Code 18MEMOOC M.Tech (Machine Design)

Category Semester: IV
Course title MOOC COURSE
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- --- --- 3
CIE Marks: --- SEE Marks: --- Total Max. Marks: --- Duration of SEE: ---

1. Apply the importance of online courses.
2. Apply the latest technique of learning online.
3. Understand the importance of MOOC in lifelong learning.
COURSE CONTENTS
The courses shall be from the related topics not taught in M. Tech program or other recent trends
in mechanical engineering.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Implement the process of learning in online mode.
2. Demonstrate the steps involved in learning in online mode.
3. Inculcate the habit of lifelong learning required in professional carrier.
CIE – 50 Total:50
Submission of Certificate/s for three Credits of MOOC
marks Marks

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
MD-89
Department of Mechanical Engineering
K R Circle, Bengaluru-560 001.
M.Tech in Mechanical Engineering

Major: Manufacturing Science and Engineering
MS-1
VISION
―To strive for excellence in education for the realization of a vibrant and
inclusive society through knowledge creation and dissemination‖
MISSION

publications
 Inculcate right values among students while encouraging
competitiveness to promote leadership qualities
MS-2
Bangalore University

University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering (UVCE) was started as a School of
Mechanical Engineering by Bharat Ratna Sir. M. Visvesvaraya in the year 1913 to meet the
needs of the State for skilled workers with S V Setty as its Superintendent. Later, it was
converted to a full-fledged Engineering College in the year 1917 under the name Government
Engineering College and was affiliated to the University of Mysore. It is the fifth Engineering
College to be established in the country.
Constituent Colleges of Bangalore University. This is one of the oldest Institutions in the
country imparting technical education leading to B.E., M.E, B.Arch., M.Sc. (Engineering),
M.Arch. and Ph.D. degrees in various disciplines of Engineering and Architecture. The
Institution currently offers 7 Undergraduate (B.E. / B.Arch.) Full-time, three Undergraduate
(B.E.) Part-time and 24 Postgraduate (M.E. / M.Arch.) Programmes.
VISION
The vision of UVCE is to strive for excellence in advancing engineering education through
path breaking innovations across the frontiers of human knowledge to realize a vibrant,
inclusive and humane society.
MISSION
The mission of UVCE is to prepare human resource and global leaders to achieve the above
vision through discovery, invention and develop friendly technologies to promote scientific
temper for a healthy society. UVCE shapes engineers to respond competently and confidently
to the economic, social and organizational challenges arising from globally advancing
technical needs.
MS-3
Bangalore University Bengaluru
Department of Mechanical Engineering, UVCE, Bengaluru
MAJOR: MANUFACTURING SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Strive for Centre of Excellence in advancing Mechanical Engineering education to produce
highly qualified human resources to meet local and global requirement.

industries, R and D laboratories of national importance, alumini, employers and other internal &
environmental consciousness and providing opportunity to the faculty and technical staff for
continuous academic improvement and to equip them with then latest trends in Mechanical
Engineering and thereby inculcate the habit of continuous learning in faculty, staff and students.

The post graduates of M.Tech in manufacturing science and engineering will be provided the
knowledge and skill to:
MEPEO1: Have successful career through the application of latest developments in

Manufacturing Science and Engineering.
MEPEO2: Communicate effectively and ability to work individually and in team with a zeal for
venturing into entrepreneurship and involve in life-long learning.
MEPEO3: Pursue high level research, higher studies and choose professional career.
Program Outcomes (PO):
Post Graduates with M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering) degree will be able
to:
MSPO1: Independently carry out research/investigation and developmental work

to solve practical problems of the domain of program.
MSPO2: Prepare and present a substantial technical report/document.
MSPO3: Demonstrate a higher degree of mastery in the various fields of Manufacturing
Science and Engineering.
MS-4
MAJOR: MANUFACTURING SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Semester I
Teaching
No. Type /Course Course Name (No. of hrs per week) Total CIE *SEE Credits
Dept
Code L T P S hrs / week Marks Marks
1. 18MS1C01 Mathematical Methods in Engineering 3 2 0 0 Maths 5 50 50 4
2. 18MS1C02 Modern Methods of Manufacturing 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18MS1C03 Advanced Material Joining Processes 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
4. 18MS1E1A Micro and Nano Machining Processes
18MS1E1B Composite Materials and Processing 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
4
18MS1E1C Industrial Robotics
5. 18MS1E2A Non Destructive Testing
Geometric Dimensioning and
18MS1E2B 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
Tolerencing 4
18MS1E2C Enterprise Resource Planning
Advanced Manufacturing Processes
6. 18MS1L01 0 0 4 0 Mech 4 50 50 2
Laboratory
Research Methodology and Intellectual
7. 18ME1M01 2 0 0 0 Mech 2 50 50 2
Property Rights
8. 18MS1S01 Seminar - I 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
9. Technical Paper Writing
18ME1M02 2 0 0 0 English 2 50 1
(Audit Course - I)
Total 23 02 06 --- 31 450 350 26
MS-5
Semester II
No. Type /Course Course Name (No. of hrs per week) Teaching Credits
Total CIE *SEE
Code Dept
L T P S hrs / week Marks Marks
1. 18MS2C01 Industrial Automation 3 0 2 0 Mech 5 L=50 L=50 4
50 50
P=50#
2. 18MS2C02 Finite Element Methods 3 0 2 0 Mech 5 L=50 L=50 4
50 50
P=50#
3. 18MS2C03 Advances in Metal Forming 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
4. 18MS2E1A Product Design and Development
18MS2E1B Advances in Metal Casting Techniques 4
4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
18MS2E1C Mechatronics
18MS2E1D Powder Metallurgy
5. 18MS2E2A Industrial Internet of Things
18MS2E2B Digital Manufacturing 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MS2E2C Surface Treatment and Finishing
6. 18MS2L01 MATLAB and Simulation of 0 0 4 0 4 50 50 2
Mech
Manufacturing Processes Laboratory
7. 18MS2S01 Seminar - II 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
8. 18ME2M01 Pedagogy Studies (Audit Course - II) 2 0 0 0 Mech 0 50 1
Total 20 --- 10 --- 30 400 300 24
Semester III
Code Dept hrs / week Marks Marks
L T P S
1. 18MS3E1A Introduction to Machine Learning
18MS3E1B Lean Manufacturing 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
4
18MS3E1C Product life cycle Management
2. Open Elective 4 0 0 0 4 50 50 4
3. 18MS3S01 Seminar - III 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
4. 18MS3I01 Internship / Mini Project --- --- 10 --- Mech 10 50 50 5
5. 18MS3D01 Dissertation Work Phase -I 0 0 10 0 Mech 10 50 50 5
Total 08 --- 22 --- 30 250 200 19
MS-6
Semester IV
Teaching
Dept
1. 18MS4S01 Seminar - IV 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
2. 18MS4D01 Dissertation Work Phase -II --- --- 30 --- Mech 30 50 50 15
Total --- --- 32 --- 32 100 50 16
1. 18MSMOOC MOOC Course --- --- --- --- 03
Grand Total of Credits --- --- --- --- 88
Open Electives offered by the Department of Mechanical Engineering:
1) 18ME3P1A – Composite and Smart Materials

2) 18ME3P1B – Industrial Safety
COURSE TYPE
MS: MANUFACTURING SCIENCE AND ENGG C: PROGRAM CORE E: PROGRAM ELECTIVE
P: OPEN ELECTIVE M: MANDATORY AUDIT L: LABORATORY
S: SEMINAR I: INTERNSHIP/ MINI PROJECT D: DISSERTATION WORK
L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial, P – Lab work, S – Self Study:

Numbers under teaching scheme indicates contact clock hours.
NOTE:
1) In any course (Program Core or Program Elective),if self study of 4 hrs per week for students is allocated, then the teaching scheme of
such courses will be 3-0-0-4 and the total credits will be 4.
2) * = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks
3) # = The CIE test of the lab component of integrated course shall be conducted by two examiners for 50 marks and shall be reduced to 25
marks.
MS-7
Semester III
Teaching
Dept
Code hrs / week Marks Marks
L T P S
18CV3P1B Water Laws, Rights & Administration
1.
18CV3P1C Waste to Energy 4 0 0 0 Civil 4 50 50 4
Remote Sensing and Geographic
18CV3P1D
Information System
2. 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18EE3P1B Robotics and Automation 4 0 0 0 EEE 4 50 50 4
MS-8
Course Code 18MS1C01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
No. of Hours/Week
3 2 0 0 4
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Total Max. Marks: 100 Duration of SEE: 3 Hrs

1. Analyse the concepts and importantance of Probability theory and various dristributions.
3. Apply the knowledge of ordinary and partial differential equations of solving engineering
problems.
4. Apply the basic concepts of partial differential equations and complex algebra for engineering
problems.
UNIT I
Probability Distributions: Baye's rule, Discrete random variables and their probability distributions; The
binomial probability distribution, The Poisson probability distribution, The normal probability distribution
for continuous random variables. Sampling distributions like x2,t, F. 6 hours
UNIT II
Probability and Statistics: Statistics and sampling distributions, central limit theorem, the sampling
distribution of the sample mean and of the sample proportion. Testing hypothesis about population
parameters. A Statistical test of hypothesis, large sample test of a population mean. 6 hours
UNIT III
Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations: Initial value problems : Difference equations,
Single step methods: Classical Runge Kutta 2nd and 4th order methods- Stability analysis. Predictor
Corrector methods : Modified Euler's method, Milne's Predictor-Corrector method. 12 hours
UNIT IV
Numerical solution of Partial differential equations: Finite difference solution of one dimensional
heat equation, one dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace equation. Stability analysis of
finite difference methods for heat and wave equations- Von-Neumann method. 12 hours
UNIT V
Calculus of Variations: Functionals, Variation of a functional, necessary condition for extremisation of a
functional. Euler-Lagrange equation and Euler-Poisson equation- special cases. 12 hours
Constrained extremisation problems-isoperimetric problems.
UNIT VI
Recent advances and research being done in thetopics mentioned in the above units.
MS-9
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Determine the appropriateness of applying probability distributions under various engineering
applications.
2. Differentiate hypothesis testing procedures based on type of outcome variable and number of samples.
3. Select appropriate numerical methods to apply to various types of problems in engineering in
consideration of the mathematical operations involved and accuracy requirements.
4. Derive and analyze standard finite difference methods for the one dimensional wave and heat
equations and are able to understand the concepts of stability of numerical methods.
5. Solve engineering problems using the methods and techniques of the calculus of variations and prepare
for the study of modern optimal control theory.

1. Mendenhall, Beaver J and Beaver M: Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Twelfth
edition. 2012.
2. Jain, Iyengar and Jain: Numerical methods for scientific and engineering computation, Fifth edition,
New age international publishers, 2014
3. E. Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 10th Ed., 2015
5. Ronald E, Walpole, Sharon L. Myers, Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists (8th Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 07 (for Units I & II).
6. J. B. Doshi, Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers, Narosa, New Delhi, 10 (for Units
III & IV).
7. Douglas C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments (7th Edition), Wiley Student Edition,
09.
9. William W. Hines, Douglas C. Montgomery, David M. Goldsman, Probability and Statistical for
Engineering, (4th Edition), Willey Student edition, 06.

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 2
MS-10
Course title MODERN METHODS OF MANUFACTURING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand and apply the different Additive Manufacturing Processes.
2. Apply and evaluate the various aspects of Additive Manufacturing.
3. Evaluate the capabilities of Non-Traditional Machining Processes.
4. Analyse the different Hybrid Non-Traditional Machining Processes.
5. Analyse the latest indirect applications of computers in Manufacturing and emphasis on
importance of the topics in recent trends.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT -I
Additive Manufacturing (AM)
Introduction, Basic concepts, AM process chain, classification. Principles of working, Process description,
Capabilities and limitations of Photopolymer based, Extrusion based and lamination based AM. ARE
Processes with examples: Stereo lithography, Solid Ground Curing (SGC), Selective laser Sintering (SLS),
Polyjet printing, Fused Deposition modelling (FDM), Laminated object Manufacturing (LOM), Laser
Engineered Net Shaping (LENS).
10hrs
UNIT -II
Rapid Tooling, Design for AM and Case Studies
Rapid Tooling -Introduction, Direct and Indirect Tooling, Production of injection moulding inserts, EDM
electrodes, Investment casting parts, Silicone Rubber tooling, Composite tooling, Calcium silicate based
castable tooling.
Design for Manufacturing and Assembly, AM unique capabilities, Core DFAM concepts and objectives,
AM Process optimisation.
Case studies of AM in Aerospace, Defence, Automobile, Biomedical and General engineering industries.
10hrs
UNIT -III
Non Traditional Machining Processes
Mechanism of material removal, Process description, Case studies, applications and Research possibilities
in Electric Discharge Machining, Wire cut Electric Discharge machining, Abrasive flow machining,
Abrasive water jet machining, Laser Beam machining and Electron Beam Machining processes.
10hrs
UNIT -IV
Hybrid Non Traditional Machining Processes
Introduction, Principle of material removal, Process description, capabilities and applications of
1. Hybrid Electro Chemical Processes - Electrochemical Grinding, Honing and Superfinishing.
Ultrasonic assisted Electrochemical machining (ECM) and Leaser assisted ECM.
2. Hybrid Thermal Processes – Electro Erosion Dissolution Machining, Electro Discharge Grinding,
Abrasive Electro Discharge Machining, EDM with Ultrasonic assistance and Electro chemical
Discharge Grinding. 10hrs
\
MS-11
UNIT -V
Introduction, Basic philosophy, working and capabilities of Artificial Intelligence and Expert system in
Manufacturing, Industrial IOT (Industry 4.0), Micro Electronic Manufacturing.
08hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe and compare the capabilities of different Additive Manufacturing Processes.
2. Select an appropriate process and parameters for producing parts used in Biomedical, Aerospace,
and Defence Industries.
3. Compare and select a Non-Traditional Machining Process for a particular application in
Engineering.
4. Select a suitable Hybrid Non-Traditional Machining Process for a given situation.
5. Discuss the concepts of Artificial Intelligence and Expert System in Manufacturing, Industrial IOT,
etc. and examine the recent trends and research being done in the topics of course.

1. Dr. Ian Gibson, Dr. Brent Stucker, Dr. David W. Rosen, Additive Manufacturing
Technologies-Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, Publisher: Springer;
2010 edition
2. Chee Kai Chua- Kah Fai Leong- Chu Sing Lim, ―Rapid prototyping- principles and applications‖
WSPC; 3 edition.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay, Susmita Bose, ―Additive Manufacturing‖, CRC Press 2015.
4. N. Hopkinson, R.J.M. Hague and P.M. Dickens, ―Rapid Manufacturing, An Industrial Revolution
for the Digital Age‖ John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2006 edition.
5. E. Paul Degarmo, J. J. Black and Ronald A Kosher, ―Material and Processes in Manufacturing‖,
11th Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2011. ISBN-10 0470924675 ISBN-13 978-0470924679.
6. Hassan El Hofy, ―Advanced Machining Processes‖ McGraw Hill, 2005.
7. V. K. Jain, ―Advanced Machining Processes‖, Allied Publishes Pvt Ltd, New Delhi.
8. Raj Kamal, ―Internet of Things‖ McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd.
9. Kalpak Jain
10. Relevant Articles and Publications on the topics of course available in internet.

marks Unit-VI(AAT)=15 marks marks

 Questions Q2, Q4 and Q5 from Unit II, Unit IV
& Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
MS-12
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 3
MS-13
Course title ADVANCED MATERIAL JOINING PROCESSES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the types of energy sources for welding and characteristics of weld arc.
2. Understand the heat flow in welding.
3. Analyse the fluxes used for welding.
4. Evaluate the discontinuity and residual stress associated with different welding types.
5. Evaluate weldability of different materials and highlight the recent trends and research in welding.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Energy sources for welding: Electrical sources, chemical sources, focussed sources, mechanical sources,
solid state sources. Arc characteristics: arc ignition, plasma, temperature, radiation, electrical features,
magnetic fields on arc, arc blow, metal transfer, melting rate.
07hrs
UNIT – II
Heat flow in welding: Heat input, heat transfer, heat conduction, convective heat transfer. Welding
metallurgy: Weld metal, heat affected zone, base metal.
05hrs
UNIT – III
Nature and behaviour of fluxes used for welding. Basic properties, characteristics selection and influence
of shielding gases. Welding electrodes for different arc welding processes, arc welding power sources,
filler metals and fluxes for soldering and brazing, electrodes for resistance welding, tool for friction stir
welding, explosive materials for explosive welding, adhesives for adhesive bonding.
12hrs
UNIT – IV
Discontinuities associated with fusion welding, resistance welding, solid state welding, brazing and
soldering with proper causes and remedies. Residual stress and distortion: Nature, causes, effects,
measurements and control. Destructive and Non-destructive tests for welded joints. Corrosion in
weldments. 12hrs
UNIT – V
Weldability of following materials: Carbon and low alloy steels, high alloy steels, stainless steels, cast iron
aluminium, magnesium, copper, nickel and its alloys. Plastics and Composites. Brief discussions on
Cladding, Surfacing and Dissimilar Metal Joining.
12hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-14
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe the basic concepts and their importance in welding.
2. Discuss the effect of heat flow in welding.
3. Review the different types and characteristics of welding.
4. Assess defects in the welded material.
5. Assess the reason behind weldability of different materials and emphasise on recent trends and
research in welding.

1. Welding hand book 9th edition 1 to 5 volumes by AWS, Miami, FL 33126.
2. ASME hand book on welding brazing and soldering, 7th edition, 6th volume.
3. Modern Arc Welding technology, Ador Welding Limited, Oxford and IBH publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
New Delhi.

marks Unit-VI(AAT)=15 marks marks

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 2 2
MS-15
Course Code 18MS1E1A M.Tech (Manufacturing and Science Engineering)
Category Program Elective Semester: I
Course title MICRO AND NANO MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the principle and process description of Micro and Nano Manufacturing Processes.
2. Apply and analyse mask based Micro Fabrication Processes.
3. Understand and evaluate the Tool Based Micro and Nano Fabrication Processes.
4. Analyse the different Thermo Electric Micro Machining Processes.
5. Apply different Chemical and Electrochemical Micro Machining Processes and review the latest
trends in the topics of the course.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION TO MICRO MACHINING AND NANO MACHINING PROCESSES: Definition for
Micro machining and Nano machining, necessity, advantages, limitations, classifications and applications.
Problems in Micro and nano machining processes and solutions.
08hrs
UNIT – II
MASK BASED MICRO-FABRICATION: Conventional micro-fabrication technologies: Lithography,
Chemical Etching: Isotropic and Anisotropic, Plasma Etching, Reactive Ion Etching (RIE), Oxidation,
Chemical Vapour Deposition, Surface Micromachining, LIGA.
10hrs
UNIT – III
TOOL BASED MICRO AND NANO-FABRICATION: Traditional Micromachining Processes: Diamond
Turning, Micro milling, Micro grinding. Advanced Micromachining Processes: Abrasive Jet
Micromachining, Ultrasonic Micromachining. Nano machining processes: Abrasive Flow Nanofinishing,
Magnetic Abrasive Nanofinishing.
10hrs
UNIT – IV
THERMOELECTRIC ADVANCED MICROMACHINING PROCESSES: Principle of operation, process
parameters and applications - Electric Discharge Diamond Grinding, Wire Electric Discharge
Micromachining, Laser Beam Micromachining, Electron Beam Micromachining, Ion Beam Machining.
10hrs
UNIT – V
ELECTROCHEMICAL AND CHEMICAL MICROMACHINING PROCESSES: Principle of operation,
process parameters and applications - Electrochemical and Chemical Micromachining Processes:
Electrochemical Micromachining, Electrochemical Micro Grinding, Electro stream Micro drilling, Shaped
Tube Electrolytic Micromachining, Chemical Micromachining (ChMM).Technologies for micro
machining and nano machining characterization.
10hrs
MS-16
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Explain the concepts of micro and nano manufacturing processes.
2. Compare the different capabilities of mask based micro fabrication processes.
3. Differentiate and select among different tool based micro and nano fabrication processes.
4. Compare and examine the capabilities of thermoelectric micro machining processes.
5. Review the different chemical and electro chemical micro machining processes and highlight some
of the latest advances and research trends in micro and nano manufacturing processes.

1. V. K. Jain, ―Advanced Machining Processes‖ Allied Publishers Private Limited, New Delhi.
2. V. K. Jain, ―Introduction to Micromachining‖, 2nd Edn, Narosa Publishers, New Delhi 2009.
3. Joseph McGeough, editor "Micromachining of Engineering Materials" Marcel Dekker, Inc., New
York, 2002.
4. M. Elwenspoek and H. Jansen, ―Silicon Micromachining‖, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, UK, 1998.
5. Mark J. Jackson, ―Microfabrication and Nanomanufacturing‖ BY CRC Press, 2006.
6. Marc J Madou, ―Fundamentals of Microfabrication‖- The science of miniaturization, BY CR Press,
LLC, 2002.
7. Zheng chui, ―Micro –Nano fabrication Technologies and Applications‖, Springer higher education
press, ISBN-13: 978-1842658918.

CIE – 50 Quiz / AAT =5 marks Total:50
marks Unit-VI(AAT)=15 Marks marks

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
MS-17
Course Code 18MS1E1B M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course title COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND PROCESSING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the importance of composites in engineering applications.
2. Apply the properties of composites.
3. Analyse the different manufacturing processes of composites.
4. Evaluate the capabilities of different composites materials.
5. Understand the latest trends in composites materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT- I
Definition, classification and characteristics of composite materials - fibrous composites, laminated
composites, particulate composites. Application of composites in different fields.
06hrs
UNIT- II
Metal Matrix Composites: Reinforcement materials, types, characteristics and selection base metals.
Need for production MMC‘s and its properties.
Fabrication Process for MMC’s: Powder metallurgy technique, liquid metallurgy technique and
secondary processing, special fabrication technique.
11hrs
UNIT- III
Ceramic Matrix Composites: Reinforcement materials, types, characteristics and selection base metals.
Need for production CMC‘s and its properties.
Fabrication Process for CMC’s: Hot pressing –reaction bonding process, infiltration techniques, direct
oxidation-interfaces
11hrs
UNIT- IV
Polymer Matrix Composites: Reinforcement materials, types, characteristics and selection base metals.
Need for production PMC‘s and its properties.
Fabrication Process for PMC’s: Hand lay Up, spray technique, filament winding, Pultrusion, Resin
transfer moulding (RTM), bag moulding, injection moulding, sandwich mould composites.
11hrs
UNIT- V
Characterization Techniques; Introduction and working principle of X-RD techniques/SEM/TEM.
09hrs
UNIT- VI
MS-18
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Describe the importance and significance of composites materials in typical engineering
applications.
2. Interpret the properties of composites materials for specific applications.
3. Compare different composites materials.
4. Select a suitable composite material for particular applications.
5. Highlight the latest trends in composites materials.

1. K.K.Chawla, ―Composites science and engineering‖, Springer verlag 1998.
2. AUtar K.Kaw, ―Mechanics of composite materials‖, Crc press New York.
3. Robert M Jones, ―Mechanics of composite materials‖, McGRaw Hill publications.
4. Meing Schwaitz, ―Composite material Hand book‖, Macgraw hill publications.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 2 3
MS-19
Course Code 18MS1E1C M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course title INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic terminologies and concepts associated with Industrial robots and
Automation.
2. Analyse basic gripper systems and sensors in Industrial robots.
3. Evaluate the various types of drive systems and control technologies in Robotics and Automation.
4. Analyse the problems related to basic kinematics and dynamics of an Industrial robot.
5. Create a conceptual model of an industrial robotics system incorporating the application of
Artificial Intelligence and other latest trends in Robotics.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Basic Concepts Such as Definition, Three Laws, DOF, Misunderstood Devices etc.,
Elements of Robotic System I.E. Robot Anatomy, Classification, Associated Parameters I.E. Resolution,
Repeatability, Accuracy, Dexterity, Compliance, RCC Devices, etc., Automation, Concepts, Need,
Automation in Production System, Principles And Strategies Of Automation, Basic Elements Of An
Automated System, Advanced Automation System, Advanced Automation Functions, Level Of
Automations, Introduction to Automation Properties. 08hrs
UNIT – II
ROBOT GRIPPERS: Types of Grippers, Design Aspects of Grippers, Force Analysis for Various Basic
Gripper Systems,
Sensors for Robots: Characteristics Of Sensing Devices, Selection For Sensors, Classification And
Application Of Sensors, Types Of Sensors, Need For Sensors And Vision System In Working And
Control Of A Robot, Robot Programming. 08hrs
UNIT – III
DRIVES AND CONTROL SYSTEM: Types Of Drives, Actuation And Its Selection While Designing A
Robot Systems, Types Of Transmission System, Control System – Types, Of Controllers, Introduction
Loop Control System Technologies In Automation, Industrial Control System, Process Industries, Varies
Discrete Manufacturing Industries, Continual Verses Discrete Control. Computer Processes and Its
Forms, Control System Concepts Such As Sensors, Actuators and Others.
08hrs
UNIT – IV
KINEMATICS: Transformation Matrices And Their Arithmetic, Link And Joint Description, Denavit-
Hartenberg Parameters, Frame Assignment To Links, Direct Kinematics, Kinematics Redundancy,
Kinematic Calibration, Inverse Kinematics, Solvability, Algebraic And Geometric Methods, Velocities
And Static Forces In Manipulators- Jacobians, Singularities, Static Forces Jacobian In Force Domain.
Dynamics- Introduction to Dynamics, Trajectory Generation.
12hrs
MS-20
UNIT – V
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IN INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS: Introduction, Need for System
Modelling, Building Mathematical Model of a Manufacturing Plant,
Modern Tools: Artificial Neutral Networks in Manufacturing Automation, AI in Manufacturing, Fuzzy
Decision, Robotics and Application of Robotics for Automation.
Artificial Intelligence: Introduction To Artificial Intelligence, AI Technologies, Need And Application

Of AI, Other Topics In Robotics: Socio-Economics Aspects Of Robotics, Economical Aspects For
Robotic Design, Safety For Robot And Associated Mass. 12hrs
UNIT – VI
Recent Advances And Research Being Done In The Topics Mentioned In The Above Units.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Explain the basic concepts of Industrial robots and Automation.
2. Solve the problems related to gripper design, compare the gripper capabilities and applications of
sensors in industrial robots.
3. Select the suitable drive system while designing an industrial robot and compare the different types
of industrial control systems.
4. Solve the problems of direct and inverse kinematics analysis of industrial robot and robot
dynamics.
5. Develop a model considering various aspects of Robotics including the application of AI.
Highlight the latest trends in Industrial robots.

1. John J. Craig,‖Introduction to Robotics (Mechanics and Control)‖, Addison- Wesley, 2nd Edition, 04
2. Mikell P. Groover Et. Al., ―Industrial Robotics, Technology Programming and Applications‖, Mcgrew-
Hill
International 1986.
3. Shimon Y. Nof, Handbook of Industrial Robotics. John Wiley Co, 01.
4. M.P. Groover, ―Automation, Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing‖ Pearson
Education
5. W.P. David, John Wiley and Sons.
6. Richard D. Klafter, Thomas A. Chemielewski, Michel Negin. ―Robotics Engineering‖ An Integrated
Approach, Prentice Hall India 02
7. R.C. Drof, John Wiley and Sons ―Hand Book of Design, Manufacturing & Automation‖

marks Unit-VI0.(AAT) =15 Marks marks

MS-21
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 2 3
MS-22
Course Code 18MS1E2A M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course title NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Apply the knowledge relating to fundamentals of Non destructive testing methodologies.
2. Understand the concepts of Ultrasonic Testing.
3. Apply the concepts of Radiographic testing methodologies for inspection.
4. Analyse the practices behind Eddy current testing.
5. Evaluate the Residual stresses and its origin.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to Non Destructive testing: Non destructive testing, Classification, Selection of non
destructive methods, Visual Inspection- tools, applications and limitations. Liquid Penetrant Inspection -
principles, types and properties of penetrants and developers. Advantages and limitations of various
methods of LPI, Magnetic particle inspection- principles, applications, advantages and limitations.
10hrs
UNIT – II
Ultra sonic testing (UT) - Nature of sound waves, wave propagation - modes of sound wave generation -
Various methods of ultrasonic wave generation, types of UT Principles, Applications, advantages,
limitations, A, B and C scan - Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD). Indian standards for Non destructive
testing. 10hrs
UNIT – III
Radiography testing (RT) – Principles, applications, advantages and limitations of RT. Types and
characteristics of X ray and gamma radiation sources, Principles and applications of Fluoroscopy/Real-
time radioscopy - advantages and limitations - recent advances. 08hrs
UNIT – IV
Eddy current testing - Principles, types, applications, advantages and limitations of eddy current testing.
Thermography - Principles, types, applications, advantages and limitations. 10hrs
UNIT – V
Optical & Acoustical Holography- Principles, types, applications, advantages and limitations. Case
studies: weld, cast and formed components.
Residual Stresses- Overview of Residual stresses and their measurement methods and its importance,
Character and Origin of Residual Stresses, Effects of Residual Stresses, Residual Stress Gradients, Origin
and types of residual stresses, merits and demerits of residual stresses. 10hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-23
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Students shall apply the concepts learnt, to the Practical Problems involving Non destructive
testing.
2. Students shall incorporate the principles of ultrasonic testing.
3. Students shall apply the principles of Radiography techniques in Non destructive testing.
4. Students shall analyze the principle behind eddy current testing.
5. Students shall evaluate the residual stresses developed in the engineering components.

1. Baldev raj, ―Practical Non – Destructive Testing‖, Narosa Publishing House(1997).
2. B.Hull and V.John, ―Non-Destructive Testing‖, Macmillan (1988)
3. Krautkramer, Josef and Hebert Krautkramer, ―Ultrasonic Testing of Materials‖, 3rd edition, New
York, Springer-Verlag (1983)
4. Non Destructive Evolution and Quality Control - volume 17 of metals hand book 9 edition Asia
internal 1989.
5. Gary S. Schajer, ―Practical Residual Stress Measurement Methods‖, University of British
Columbia, Vancouver, Canada.
6. Residual Stresses: edited by A. Niku-Lari.
7. Residual Stresses in Design, Process, and Materials Selection: Proceedings of ASM‘s Conference
on Residual Stress in Design, Process, and Materials Selection.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 1 1
CO2 2 2 3
CO3 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 2 2 1
MS-24
Course title GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING AND TOLERENCING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand the basic concepts, importance and terms in GD&T.
2. Analyse the feature control frame in GD&T.
3. Evaluate virtual condition and resultant condition boundaries in GD&T.
4. Understand apply the different controls of GD&T.
5. Analyse tolerance stack - up analysis and emphasise the significance of Geometric Dimensioning
and Tolerencing.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Dimensioning, Fundamental Drawing Rules, What Is GD&T?
Explain When To Use GD&T, Advantages Of GD&T, Demonstrate The Proper Way To Specify
Dimensions And Tolerances, Limits & Fits.
Introduction Gauges, Surface Plate, Measuring Instrument, Advance Measuring Instrument. Dimensional
Inspection Plan Format, Plan Development, Choosing Gauge, Functional Gage Design, Tolerance on
Work, Push Pin Gauges. Paper Gauging, Composite Positional Controls, Paper Gauging with datum
feature size.
8hrs
UNIT – II
THE FEATURE CONTROL FRAME
The feature control frame, how to read feature control frame, Geometric characteristic symbols Size
Control Form, External feature, internal feature, Taylor Principle. Components of feature control
frame. The Maximum Material Condition symbol and its Ramifications Relationship between
Individual Features.
06hrs
UNIT – III
VIRTUAL CONDITION AND RESULTANT CONDITION BOUNDARIES: Virtual Condition
(MMC, LMC and RFS Concept), Wall Thickness Calculations, and general rules of GD&T. Use of
MMC, LMC, and RFS, Virtual condition (VC) and Resultant condition (RC).
Datum: Definition, Application of Datum, Datum Feature Selection, Datum Feature Identification,
Inclined Datum Features, Cylindrical Datum Features, Establishing datum, Multiple Datum Features, A
Partial Surface as a Datum Feature, Datum Targets. 06hrs
UNIT – IV
CONTROLS: Flatness, Straightness, Circularity, Cylindricity, Orientation, Parallelism,
Perpendicularity, Angularity, Concentricity, Position, Floating Fasteners, Fixed Fasteners, Projected
Tolerance Zones, Multiple Patterns of Features, Composite Positional Tolerance, Two Single-Segment
Feature Control Frames, Line Element Controls, Specifying Profile, A Radius Refinement with Profile,
Combing Profile Tolerances with Other Geometric Controls, Co-planarity, Profile of a Conical Feature,
Composite Profile. Circular and Total runout. 10hrs
MS-25
UNIT – V
TOLERANCE STACK-UP ANALYSIS: Explanation, comparison and calculation of worst-case and
statistical techniques. Statistical Tolerance Analysis, Address assimilability, fit, maintaining clearance,
ensuring contact, maintaining wall thickness & machining stock, alignment. Compare dimensioning &
tolerance & design strategies, Methods to correct geometry problems found through analysis. Understand,
calculate, and model the cumulative variation. 08 hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Illustrate using simple diagrams, the various terms used in GD&T and importance of them.
2. Compare and relate various features of control frame.
3. Assess the importance of various concepts related to virtual condition and resultant conditions
boundaries.
4. Sketch the different controls and highlight the importance in GD&T.
5. Develop a model using the concepts of tolerance stack analysis of a few engineering components.
Highlight the industry requirements of GD&T.

1. James D Meadows, ―Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing-Applications, Analysis &
Measurement‖ [per ASME Y14.5-2009] 1st edition.
2. James D Meadows, ―TOLERANCE STACK UP ANALYSIS‖ 2nd Edition.
3. P.S. Gill, ―Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing‖ Hardcover – 2013.
4. Gene R. Cogorno, ―Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing for Mechanical Design‖, McGraw
Hill.
5. ASME 14.5 HandBook.


PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 1 3 3
MS-26
Course title ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts of enterprise resource planning.
2. Evaluate the influence of sales, research and inventory control in typical ERP
3. Evaluate manufacture aggregate planning issues in ERP.
4. Evaluate an enterprise based on its financial status.
5. Create conceptual model of typical enterprise considering its sources.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I
Manufacturing Industry- Management Characteristics and Information Requirements.
Industry classification, production, market, processes, characteristics, manufacturing planning cycle,
information planning and control technique, ERP concept and evaluation history: MRP – I, MRP – II,
ERP, Client service technology, RDBMS 10hrs
UNIT-II
Sales, Purchase and Inventory Control Concepts Classification/coding of material and finished goods,
sales enquiry, quotation, order, invoicing, delivery, finished goods, valuation, purchase requisition,
enquiry, supplier quotation, purchase order, material receipts, material issues, method of issue valuation,
(FIFO/LIFO/Weighted average cost/Std Cost), returns from operations, returns to supplier, stock
adjustment, physical stock variation, ABC analysis. Lot and location control, replenishment order control
(safety stocks, reorder point, economic order quantity). 10hrs
UNIT-III
Manufacturing Aggregate planning – master production scheduling – capacity requirement planning,
billing of material, materials requirement planning, loading and scheduling.
08hrs
UNIT-IV
Financial and Cost Accounting: Basic accounting principles, day book – cash book, journal, purchase and
sales. Ledger-general, supplier, customer, advance etc., trial balance, profit and loss/income and
expenditure account and balance sheet. Fixed assets and depreciation. 10hrs
UNIT-V
Budgeting – revenue, capital, cash, cost element-direct material, direct labour, direct expenses and
overheads. Marginal costing product costing, process costing and break-even analysis, standard costing,
activity-based costing, , operating ratios, variance analysis for cost control.
10hrs
MS-27
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Discuss the importance and various aspects of Enterprise resource planning.
2. Appraise the influence of sales, research and inventory control on the performance of EPR.
3. Asses the influence of manufacturing aggregate planning.
4. Determine the key parameters influencing the performance of enterprise.
5. Develop an EPR conceptual model and discus the latest trends.
1. B.S. Raman ―Financial Accountancy-Vol-I‖. United Publisher,2018.
2. Prasanna Chandra, ―Fundamentals of Financial Management‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 1994.
3. Buffa E.S, ―Modern Production / Operations Management‖ John Wiley & sons, 1994.
4. Vollmann T.F., etal, ―Manufacturing planning and Control‖, Galgotia Publishers 1998.
5. Dilworth J.B, ―Operations Management‖, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1992.
6. Gopalakrishnan, ―Materials Management‖, Prentice Hall of India, 1994.
7. I M Panday, ―Management Accounting‖, Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
MS-28
18MS1L01
M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course Code
Category Laboratory Semester: I
Course title ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES LABORATORY
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 2

1. Analyse the process variables of Electric Discharge Machining and Wire Cut Electric
Discharge Machining process.
2. Analyse the variation of cutting forces in Turning, Drilling and Milling operation.
3. Understand the steps to generate NC Part program automatically.
4. Apply the concepts of manual part programming to produce engineering components using
CNC lathe and CNC milling machine.
5. Create a physical model of a typical engineering component.
COURSE CONTENTS
PART –A
1. Experiments using Electric Discharge Machining to study the effect of input process parameters
on Surface Finish, Metal Removal Rate, etc.(Two experiments)
2. Experiments using Wire Cut Electric Discharge Machining to study the effect of input process
parameters on Surface Finish, Metal Removal Rate, etc.(Two experiments)
3. Measurement of cutting forces in Turning, Milling and Drilling and study of the variation of
cutting forces in response to variation in input process parameter.(Four experiments)
4. Generation of NC Part program using Master CAM or a suitable software package.(Two
experiments)
PART –B
1. Manual Part programming, tool path simulation and production of component using canned cycle
for Stock Removal, Grooving, Facing and external thread cutting using CNC lathe.(Three
experiments)
2. Manual Part programming, tool path simulation and production of component using canned cycle
for Drilling, Boring, Internal Grooving and Internal thread cutting using CNC lathe.(Three
experiments)
3. Generation of NC Part program using Profile milling Canned cycle for Drilling, Circular
interpolation and Rectangular interpolation using CNC Milling machine.(Four experiments)
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Assess the influence of input parameter on the performance in Electric Discharge Machining
and Wire Cut Electric Discharge Machining by conducting experiments.
2. Assess the influence of process parameters in metal cutting during turning, milling and drilling
operation.
3. Illustrate using MASTER CAM or a suitable software the process of generating NC part
program for turning and milling operation.
4. Operate CNC lathe and CNC milling machine to produce components.
5. Design and manufacture a typical engineering component.
.
MS-29
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks Semester End Evaluation(SEE) Marks

(Laboratory – 50 Marks) Laboratory (100 Marks)
Performance of the student in the 20 Write up
laboratory, every week 10
Test at the end of the semester 20 Experiment-1 (Part –A) = 35 marks 70
Experiment-2 (Part –B) = 35 marks
Viva voce 10 Viva voce 20
Total 100
Total (CIE) 50 Total (SEE) 50*
Note: * = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
Marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2 2
CO4 2 2
CO5 3 3 3
MS-30
Course Code 18ME1M01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course title
RIGHTS
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 2

2. Understand the basics of literature survey, ethics, effective technical writing and developments of
research proposal.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Meaning of research problem, sources of research problem, Criteria, Characteristics of a good research
problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and Objectives of research problems.
Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, Analysis, Interpretation,
necessary instrumentations. 05hrs
UNIT – II
Effective technical writing, How to write report, Paper, Developing a research proposal, Format of
research proposal, presentation and assessment by a review committee. 05hrs
UNIT – III
Geographical Indications, Industrial Design, Patents, Protection of New Varieties of Plants.
05hrs
UNIT – IV
Patentability: Patentable Subject Matter, Patentable and Non Patentable Inventions, Procedure for grants of
patents in India, Patent licensing and transfer of Technology, Patent information and databases.
International scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property, Patenting under Patent
Cooperation Treaty (PCT).
05hrs
UNIT-V
New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System, New Developments in IPR; Traditional
Knowledge Case studies of IPR including topics of respective branches of specialisation.
04hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-31
COURSE OUTCOMES:
proposal.
4. Discuss the various issues related to patentability and international scenario of patent rights.

1. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, ―research Methodology; an introduction for science and
engineering students‖
3. Ranjit Kumar 2nd edition,” Research Methodology; a step by step guide for Beginners”
8. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley,” Intellectual Property in New Technology
Age” 2006.


20* 2 = 40
Marks
IV & Unit V respectively shall be answered 20*3= 60 Marks
and shall have internal choice
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3 3
MS-32
Course Code 18MS1S01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 0 Total Max. Marks: 50

1. Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and analyse the same
effectively.
2. Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected area/topic
and prepare content rich presentation.
3. Acquire communication and time management skills for effective and impactful presentation.
Interact with peers to acquire the qualities of thoughtfulness, friendliness, adaptability,
responsiveness, and politeness in-group discussion. Overcome stage fear during oral presentation.
GUIDE LINES
2. Topic may be of general/ specific interest to program of engineering or electives not offered in the
semester and to be selected in consultation with the faculty/Guide assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
3. Make an effective presentation with seamless flow of content within the time allocated. Overcome
inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the spirit of team work.

MS-33
Evaluation would be carried out in TWO phases. The Seminar Evaluation Committee shall
comprise of Chairperson of the Department, Faculty/Guide and one more faculty member nominated by
Chairperson of the Department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per the rubrics given below:

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2 3
MS-34
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1

1. Understand the technique to improve technical report writing skills and level of readability.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Planning and preparation, word order, breaking up long sentences, structuring paragraphs and sentences,
being concise and removing redundancy, avoiding ambiguity and vagueness.
05hrs
UNIT – II
Clarifying who did what, highlighting your findings, hedging and criticizing, Paraphrasing and plagiarism,
sections of paper, Abstracts, Introduction.
05hrs
UNIT – III
Review of the literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The final check.
04hrs
UNIT – IV
Key skills needed when writing a title, Key skills needed when writing an Abstract, Key skills needed
when writing an Introduction, Skills needed when writing a review of the literature.
05hrs
UNIT – V
Key skills needed when writing the methods, Key skills needed when writing the Results, Skills needed
when writing a Discussion, Skills needed when writing the Conclusions.
05hrs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
5.
3. Highman N (1998) Handbook of writing for the mathematical sciences,SIAM, Highman’s book.
4. Adian Wallwork, English for writing research papers, Springer New York Dordrecht Heidelberg
London, 2011
MS-35

CIE – 50 Total:50
AAT = 20 marks
marks marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MS-36
Course title INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
No. of Hours/Week Total Hours:
Scheme and Credits L T P S Credits Theory = 36
3 0 2 0 4 Practical‘s = 24

1. Understand the basic terminologies and concepts associated with Automation.
2. Apply symbols, basic terminologies and components of Hydraulic system.
3. Apply symbols, basic terminologies and components of Pneumatics and Electro-Pneumatics
system.
4. Analyse and Evaluate concepts of Hydraulics, Pneumatics and Electro-Pneumatics to build the
control circuits for Industrial Application.
5. Create an Automated system using concepts of Programmable Logic Controllers and Robot
programming to interface with Electro-Hydraulics/Pneumatics.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Automation-Definition, Reasons, Arguments for and against Automation,
Automation Strategies, Basic elements of Automated System-Power to Accomplish the Automated
process, Program of Instructions, Control system, Advanced Automation Functions-Safety monitoring,
Maintenance & Repair diagnostics, Error Detection and Recovery, Level of Automation, Sensors,
Actuators and other Control System components. 06hrs
UNIT – II
Power Transmission Systems: Functional requirements of a power transmission and types, Fundamentals
of oil hydraulics and pneumatics, Comparison between various power transmission systems, Applications
of oil hydraulic and pneumatic power transmissions.
Oil Hydraulics: ISO symbols, energy losses in hydraulic systems. Properties and selection of hydraulic
fluids, Filtration, Hydraulic reservoirs and accumulators, Seals and packing‘s. Basic types and
constructions of Hydraulic pumps and motors. Pump and motor analysis. Performance curves and
parameters.
Hydraulic actuators, types and constructional details, lever systems, control elements – direction, pressure
and flow control valves. Proportional control valves and servo valves and maintenance of hydraulic
system. 08hrs
UNIT – III
Pneumatic & Electro-pneumatic: ISO symbols, Components of pneumatic systems; Compressed air
generation, preparation and distribution, Direction, flow, pressure control valves, shuttle valves, Time
delay valves and Counter.
Electro Pneumatics-Integration of Technologies, Solenoid valves, Control Devices-Switches, Push
button, Relays, Sensors. Time delay relays (Timers), Counter.
06hrs
MS-37
UNIT – IV
Hydraulic circuits: Design and analysis of typical Regenerative circuits, high low circuits,
Synchronization circuits, and accumulator sizing. Intensifier circuits Meter-in, Meter-out and Bleed-off
circuits; Fail Safe and Counter balancing circuits.
Pneumatic & Electro-pneumatic circuits: Design and construction of simple circuits for logic functions;
Exhaust and supply air throttling; Time delay valve; Counter. Multi-Actuators circuits for various
possibilities of switching of signals like cascade systems, shift register circuits etc; Multi – cylinder
sequence control; Emergency control and incorporation of auxiliary conditions. 08hrs
UNIT – V
Programmable Logic Controllers: Discrete Control using PLC & Personal Computers-Discrete Process
Control- Logic Control & Sequencing, Ladder Logic Diagrams, Components of PLC, operating cycle,
Capabilities and Programming PLC, Applications problems in Assembly, Feeding, Metalworking,
materials handling and plastics working.
Programming of Robot for Industrial Automation: Robotics Technology – Definition, Anatomy, Robot
Control Systems, Classification: Cartesian, cylindrical, spherical, jointed, and SCARA and Robot
Programming. 08hrs
UNIT – VI
Recent Advances and Research being done in the topics mentioned in the above units.
UNIT – VII (Practical’s)

Part A
Computer Simulation and experiments of Hydraulic, Electro-hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electro-pneumatic
circuits involving PLC such as: Regenerative circuit, Speed Control circuits: meter-in and meter-out,
Sequencing circuit, use of solenoid operated DCV, Rapid Traverse and Feed circuit, Reciprocating motion
of a double acting actuators using 5/3 DCV, Automatic to & fro motion of a linear actuator and Logical
circuits using shuttle valve.
Part B
Computer simulation and programming of robots for pick and place, stacking, palletizing, assembly,
inspection, etc. applications using suitable software and hardware.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe the constructional features of Automation.
2. Implement the features of Hydraulic system.
3. Implement the features of Pneumatics and Electro-Pneumatics system.
4. Experiment or Simulate and Validate the Control circuit of Hydraulics, Pneumatics and Electro-
Pneumatics control built for various industrial application
5. Investigate an Automated system developed by interfacing Programmable Logic Controllers and
Robot programming with Electro-Pneumatics /Hydraulics.

1. Mikell P Groover- Automation, Production systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, PHI
Publishers.
2. Anthony Esposito, ―Fluid Power with applications‖, Pearson Education.
3. Joji P.-Pneumatic Controls. Wiley India Pvt Ltd edition 2008.
4. Pippenger, J.J., and R.M. Koff, Fluid Power Control systems, New York: McGraw Hill.
5. Hasebrink J.P ., and Kobler R., ―Fundamentals of Pneumatics/Electropeumatics‖, FESTO Didactic
publication No. 7301, Esslingen Germany, 1979.
6. Ackermann et al., Programmable logic controllers –Advanced level, Festo Didactic KG, 1991
7. American Society of tool and manufacturing engineers, Michigan, Pneumatic controls for
industrial applications, 1965.
8. J.R. Hackworth and F.D. Hackworth, Jr., Programmable logic controllers-Programming methods
and applications, Pearson Education, Prentice hall.
MS-38
(i) Theory

CIE - 50 Quiz / AAT = 5 marks Total:50
marks Unit-VI(AAT) = 15 marks marks

 Questions Q2 & Q3 from Unit II and Unit III
20x2 = 40
SEE – 100 respectively shall be answered and shall not have Total:100*
Marks
 Questions Q1, Q4 and Q5 from Unit I, Unit IV
& Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20x3= 60 Marks
Note: * = SEE is to be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
(ii) Practical’s
Conduction of Experiments, Performance of students in Lab every week

and Lab record = 50# Total:
CIE
Lab Test: 50 marks
Part A = 20, Part B = 20 and Viva-Voce = 10 Marks ( 50 ## )
Note: # = CIE marks for Laboratory performance is to be evaluated for 50 marks and the marks obtained
shall
be reduced for 25 marks.
## = Lab Test is to be conducted for 50 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 25
marks. Lab
Test shall be conducted by two examiners out of which one examiner is the faculty taught the
course.
There is no SEE for the Practical‘s portion of integrated course.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 02
MS-39
Category Program Core Semester: II
Course title FINITE ELEMENT METHODS
No. of Hours/Week Total hours:
Scheme and Credits L T P S Credits Theory = 36
3 0 2 0 4 Practical‘s = 24

1. Understand the basic concept of Elasticity, FEA and associated math like linear algebra,
integration by quadrature, local coordinates, etc related to stress analysis and FEA.
2. Apply partial differential equations and ordinary differential equations, PVW, calculus of
variations, reduction from strong form to weak form using the principle of virtual work, error
estimation and convergence.
3. Analyse 1D problems like bar element, truss element and shear deformable beams using FEA and
to be able to understand the algorithm and MATLAB for bar element.
4. Analyse 2D and 3D problems using FEA concepts.
5. Create a model using FEA software for typical industrial application.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT– I
Revisions of basics of elasticity like continuum methods, governing equations for stress analysis and FEA
thought at the undergraduate level. 04hrs
UNIT– II
Partial differential equations, principal of virtual work, variational calculus, strong form (Galerkin), weak
form (Rayleigh Ritz), error estimation and convergence. 08hrs
UNIT– III
FEA analysis of one dimensional element subjected to uniaxial loads (Bar element both direct and
variational), trusses,C1 shape functions and shear deformable beams, quadrature, strong and weak forms
and constructing the stiffness matrix, force vector, global matrices and the vector assembly. Matlab has to
be used for Bar elements in addition to solving by hand for simple bar problems. 08hrs
UNIT– IV
Two and three dimensional solids, isoparametric formulation, shape function, numerical integration,
calculation of stress and strain, boundary conditions and constraints, determination of displacements and
stress, genaralized plane elements. 08hrs
UNIT– V
Transient problems: Structural dynamics and Initial Value Problems: Time integration, consistent mass
matrix, damping matrix, Eigen value problems, modal superposition. 08hrs
UNIT- VI
UNIT– VII (Practical’s)

Lab Exercises using a suitable modelling and analysis package of the topics studied in UNIT III, UNIT VI
and UNIT V. 24 hrs
MS-40
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Explain the basic concept of Elasticity, FEA and associated math like linear algebra, integration
by quadrature, local coordinates, etc related to stress analysis and FEA.
2. Implement partial differential equations and ordinary differential equations, PVW, calculus of
variations, reduction from strong form to weak form using the principle of virtual work, error
estimation and convergence.
3. Investigate 1D problems like bar element, truss element and shear deformable beams using FEA
and to be able to understand the algorithm and MATLAB for bar element.
4. Review 2D and 3D problems using FEA concepts.
5. Design and develop a model using FEA software for typical industrial application.

1. J. N. Reddy, ―An Introduction to the Finite Element Method‖, McGraw-Hill Education
(2005). ISBN 0-07-124473-5
2. Klaus-Jurgen Bathe, ―Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall of India‖, New Delhi ISBN-9780-
9790049-0-2
3. Robert D Cooke, ―Finite element modeling for stress analysis‖, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 0-471-
10774-3
4. Singaresu S Rao, ―The Finite Element Method in Engineering‖, Elsevier Science, ISBN 978-93-
80931-55-5
5. Bachau and Craig, ―Structural Analysis‖, Springer Dordrecht Heidelberg London New York ISBN
978-90-481-2596-6
6. Chandrapatla and Belegundu, ―An Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering‖, PHI Learning,
Pvt Limited New Delhi ISBN-978-81-203-2106-9.
(i) Theory

CIE - 50 Quiz / AAT = 5 marks Total:50

 Questions Q1 & Q2 from Unit I and Unit II
SEE – 100 respectively shall be answered and shall not have 20x2= 40 Marks Total:100*
& Unit V respectively shall be answered and 20x3= 60 Marks
Note: * = SEE is to be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
MS-41
(ii) Practical’s
Conduction of Experiments, Performance of students in Lab every week

and Lab record = 50# Total:
CIE
Lab Test: 50 marks
Part A = 20, Part B = 20 and Viva-Voce = 10 Marks ( 50 ## )
Note: # = CIE marks for Laboratory performance is to be evaluated for 50 marks and the marks obtained
shall
be reduced for 25 marks.
## = Lab Test is to be conducted for 50 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 25
marks. Lab
Test shall be conducted by two examiners out of which one examiner is the faculty taught the
course.
There is no SEE for the Practical‘s portion of integrated course.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 3
MS-42
Category Program Core Semester: II
Course title ADVANCES IN METAL FORMING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Apply the knowledge relating to fundamentals of metal forming and rolling of metals.
2. Understand the concepts of forging and extrusion.
3. Apply the concepts of drawing forces on the process of drawing operations.
4. Analyse the practices behind sheet metal forming operations.
5. Evaluate the Advanced metal forming processes.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Fundamentals of Metal Forming: Classification of forming processes, mechanisms of metal forming:
slab method, Upper and lower bound analysis, Deformation energy method and finite element method
Role of temperature and lubrication in metal working.
Rolling of metals: Rolling processes, forces and geometrical relationship in rolling, simplified analysis,
rolling load, rolling variables, theories of cold and hot rolling, problems and defects in rolling, torque and
power calculations, Problems. 10hrs
UNIT – II
Forging: Classification of forging processes, forging of plate, forging of circular discs, open die and
closed-die forging, forging defects, and powder metallurgy in forging. Problems on flow stress, true strain
and forging load.
Extrusion: Classification, Hot Extrusion, Analysis of Extrusion process, defects in extrusion, extrusion of
tubes, and production of seamless pipes. Problems on extrusion load. 10hrs
UNIT – III
Drawing: Drawing of tubes, rods, and wires: Wire drawing dies, tube drawing process, analysis of wire,
deep drawing and tube drawing. Problems on draw-force. 08hrs
UNIT – IV
Sheet Metal forming: Forming methods, Bending, stretch forming, spinning and Advanced techniques of
Sheet Metal Forming, stresses in different sheet metal operations, Forming limit criteria and diagram,
defects in formed parts. 10hrs
UNIT – V
Advanced Metal forming processes: HERF, Electro-magnetic forming, Hydroforming, analysis of
stresses in deep drawing, residual stresses in metal forming operations, recent developments in metal
forming, and computer applications in metal forming. 10hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-43
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Students shall apply the concepts learnt, to the Practical Problems involving metal forming and
rolling of metals.
2. Students shall apply the design principles in forging and extrusion processes.
3. Students shall apply the principles of wire drawing for product development.
4. Students shall analyze the various sheet metal forming operations.
5. Students shall evaluate the forces in advanced metal forming processes.

1. G.E. Dieter, ―Mechanical Metallurgy‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998. III Edition
2. Sunder Kumar, ―Principles of Metal Working‖.
3. G.W. Rowe, ―Principles of Metal Working processes‖.
4. ASM Metal Forming Hand book.
5. R Ganesh Narayan, et.al, ―Advances in metal forming and joining‖, AIMTDR 2014 –SPRINGER.
6. Amitabha Ghoush and Ashok Kumar Mallik, ―Manufacturing science‖.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 2
MS-44
Category Program Elective Semester: II
Course title PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

The course is intended to:
1. Understands the concept of product development methods.
2. Apply the product development methodology for product change, product performance and design
issues.
3. Analyze the geometric layout development, industrial design impact and process technology.
4. Evaluate the cost estimation of the manufacturing product with the existing and compares it with
new design.
5. Create a new product using the previous knowledge.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I
Introduction: Need for IPPD-Strategic importance of Product development integration of customer,
designer, material supplier and process planner Competitor and customer behaviour analysis
Understanding customer understanding involve customer in development and managing requirements
Organization process management and improvement Plan and establish product specifications.
08hrs
UNIT-II
Concept Generation and selection: Task structured approaches clarification search externally and
internally explore systematically reflect on the solutions and processes concept selection
methodology benefits. 08hrs
UNIT-III
Product architecture: Implications Product change variety component standardization product
performance manufacturability product development management establishing the architecture creation
clustering geometric layout development fundamental and incidental interactions related system level
design issues secondary systems -architecture of the chunks creating detailed interface specifications.
08hrs
UNIT-IV
Industrial design: Integrate process design Managing costs -Robust design Integrating CAE,
CAD,CAM tools Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically Need for
industrial design impact -design process investigation of customer needs conceptualization refinement
management of the industrial design process technology driven products user driven products assessing
the quality of industrial design. 12hrs
UNIT-V
Design for Manufacturing and Product development: Definition -Estimation of Manufacturing cost
reducing the component costs and assembly costs Minimize system complexity Prototype basics principles
of prototyping planning for prototypes Economic Analysis Understanding and representing tasks baseline
project planning accelerating the project execution. N.B.A. consumer product design project is
recommended. Ergonomics design in the Product management. Applications of ergonomics study in
engineering applications and consumer products.
12hrs
MS-45
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Identify the product development from the industrial point of view.
2. Compare and distinguish the product performance in the manufacturing sector.
3. Verify the Simulation tools for the change of the product variation and design can be made as and
when required.
4. Validate the Prototype design ideas will be known by making use of the tools available.
5. Develop the design ideas for the improvement or modification of the product development by
ergonomics principles.

1. Kari T. Ulrich and Steven D. Eppinger, ―Product Design and Development‖, McGraw Hill
International Edns. 1999.
2. Kemneeth Crow, ―Concurrent Engg / Integrated Product Development‖, DRM Associates, 26/3,
Via Olivera, Palos Verdes, CA 90274 (310) 377-569, Workshop BooK.
3. Stephen Rosenthal, ―Effective Product Design and Development‖, Business One Orwin,
Homewood, 1992, ISBN, 1-55623-603-4.
4. Stuart Pugh, ―Tool Design Integrated Methods for Successful Product Engineering‖ Addison
Wesley Publishing, Neyourk, NY, 1991, ISBN 0-202-41639-5.
5. ―The Design of Everyday Things‖, Don Norman, 2002,
6. The Laws of Simplicity (Simplicity: Design, Technology, Business, Life), John Maeda, 2014,
ISBN-13: 978-0262134729
7. Designing Design, Kenya Hara,2000,
8. William Lidwell, Kritina Holden and Jill Butler ―Universal Principles of Design‖.


PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2 3
CO2 2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
MS-46
18MS2E1B
M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course Code
Course title ADVANCES IN METAL CASTING TECHNIQUES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Total Max. Marks:100 Duration of SEE: 3 Hrs
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Apply the knowledge of foundry concepts of solidification phenomena and principles of gating
design.
2. Understand the design of castings and principles of quality control.
3. Apply the concepts of mechanization for foundry modernization.
4. Analyse the practices behind ferrous foundry involving Grey and Ductile cast Iron.
5. Evaluate the composition and properties of non ferrous metals in foundry practices.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Solidification of Casting: Concept of solidification of metals, Homogenous and heterogeneous
nucleation, Growth mechanism, Solidification of pure metals and alloys, Mechanism of columnar and
dendritic growth, Segregation, Solidification time and Chvorinov's rule, Concept of progressive and
directional solidifications, – Parameter affecting solidifications.
Principles of Gating and Risering: Purpose of the gating system, Components of the gating System and
its functions, Design of the gating System, Different types of gates, Gating ratio and its functions,
Definition and functions of the riser, Types of risers and their application, Design of the riser - its shape,
Size and location, Use of insulating material and exothermic compounds in risers. 10hrs
UNIT – II
Design of Casting: Factors to be considered in casting design, Design consideration in pattern making,
moulding techniques and core making and assembly. Cooling stresses and hot spots in casting and
modification in casting geometry to overcome them.
Casting Quality Control: Casting defects and factors responsible for them, Different inspection and
testing methods to evaluate the casting, Quality control activities in a foundry, Salvaging methods of
defective casting. 10hrs
UNIT – III
Foundry Mechanization and Modernization: Introduction to modernization, Mechanization of foundry
and its advantages, Mechanization of sand plant, moulding and core making mechanization in melting,
pouring and shakeout units, Material handling, equipments and conveyor systems. 08hrs
UNIT – IV
Ferrous Foundry Practice:
Gray Cast - Iron: Chemical Composition and structure of gray cast iron, Melting of gray cast iron in
Cupola and induction furnace, Inoculation of gray cast iron, Application of gray cast iron castings.
Ductile Cast Iron: Chemical composition and structure of ductile cast iron, Melting and spherodisation
treatment, Inoculation of 'ductile iron, Properties and application of ductile iron casting. 10hrs
MS-47
UNIT – V
Non Ferrous Foundry Practice:
Aluminium Foundry Practice: Composition, properties and application of common aluminum alloy
casting, Melting and casting of AI-alloys, Gating and risering of AI-alloy casting.
Copper Alloy Foundry Practice: General characteristics of common cast copper alloys, Melting and
casting of copper alloys, Gating and risering of cu-alloy castings. 10hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Students shall apply the concepts learnt, to the Practical Problems involving solidification in
foundry practices.
2. Students shall apply the design principles and quality control methodologies in real time
engineering involving castings.
3. Students shall apply the principles of mechanization in foundry practices.
4. Students shall analyze the chemical composition and structure of grey and ductile cast iron.
5. Students shall evaluate the non ferrous foundry practices involving aluminium and copper alloys.

1. Richard W Heine,Carl R Loper , Philip c Rosenthal, ―Principle of Metal Casting‖, Tata-McGraw-
HiII Publication Edition 1976.
2. O,P Khanna, ―A Test Book of Foundry Technology‖, DhanpatRai & Sons Publication.
3. Peter Beelely, ―Foundry Technology‖
4. P,L Jain, ―Principles of foundry technology‖, 5th Edition , Tata-McGraw-HiII Publication Edition
New Delhi.
5. P,N Rao, ―Manufacturing technology‖, Volume-I , Tata-McGraw-HiII Publication Edition New
Delhi.
6. Peter Belley, ―Foundry technology‖, Second edition, Publisher- Reed Elsevier India Pvt Ltd.


PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2 1
CO2 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 2 1 2
CO5 2 3 2
MS-48
Course title MECHATRONICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Total Max. Marks:100 Duration of SEE: 3 Hrs

1. Understand a mechatronics system for a specific application and analyze the system models
2. Apply the elements in signal conditioning and analyze their circuits
3. Evaluate the dynamics of a mechatronics system and to Analyse the interfacing of microcontroller,
sensors and actuators
4. Analyse elements of signal conditioning and evaluate their systems
5. Evaluate the micro fabrication processes and apply the mechatronic systems
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction:
Definition and Introduction to Mechatronic Systems, Overview of Mechatronic products and their
functioning, measurement systems, Control Systems, simple Controllers, Integrated Design Issues in
Mechatronics, Mechatronics Design Process, Key Elements of Mechatronics system.
System Models:
Mathematical models, mechanical system building blocks, electrical system building blocks, thermal
system building blocks, pneumatic systems build blocks. Electro-mechanical systems, hydro-mechanical
systems. 08hrs
UNIT – II
Sensors:
Introduction, Sensors for Motion and Position Measurement, Proximity sensors, Electrical strain and stress
measurement, Force measurement, Vibration—Acceleration Sensors, Time of flight sensors, Binary force
sensors, Temperature measurement, Sensors for Flow Measurement, Pressure measurement, Problems
Actuators:
Introduction, Electromagnetic Principles, Solenoids and Relays, Electric Motors, DC Motors, DC Motor
Electrical Equation, Permanent Magnet DC Motor, Dynamic Equations, Electronic Control of a Permanent
Magnet DC Motor, The servo motor, Stepper Motors, Stepper Motor Drive Circuits, Selecting a Motor,
Hydraulics, Hydraulic Valves, Hydraulic Actuators, Pneumatics. 10hrs
UNIT – III
Signal Conditioning:
Amplifiers, ideal operational amplifier model, inverting amplifier, non-inverting amplifier, unity-gain
buffer summing amplifier, difference amplifier, instrumentation amplifier, integrator amplifier,
differentiator amplifier, comparator, sample and hold amplifier, active filters, Problems, Data acquisition,
Introduction, Sampling and aliasing, Quantization theory, Digital-to-analog conversion hardware, Analog-
to-digital conversion hardware, Problems, Protection, Filtering, Wheatstone Bridge, Digital signals,
Multiplexers, Data Acquisition. 10hrs
MS-49
UNIT – IV
Interfacing:
Interfacing microcontrollers with actuators Introduction Interfacing with general-purpose three-state
transistors Interfacing relays Interfacing solenoids Interfacing stepper motors Interfacing permanent
magnet motors, Interfacing sensors Interfacing with a DAC Interfacing power supplies Interfacing with
RS 232 and RS 485 Compatibility at an interface, Problems.
Control theory-Modeling:
Introduction Modeling in the frequency domain Modeling in the time domain Converting a transfer
function to state space Converting a state-space representation to a transfer function Block diagrams,
Problems.
Control theory-Analysis:
Introduction System response Dynamic characteristics of a control system Zero-order systems First-order
systems Second-order systems General second-order transfer function Systems modeling and
interdisciplinary analogies Stability The Routh-Hurwitz stability criterion Steady-state errors, Problems.
10hrs
UNIT – V
Microfabrication, Micromanufacturing Processes:
Photolithography, Ion implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation Chemical vapor deposition, Physical vapor
deposition (Sputtering), Deposition by expitaxy, Etching. Bulk micromanufacturing, Surface
micromachining, LIGA process.
Advanced Applications in Mechatronics:
Fault Finding, Design, Arrangements and Practical Case Studies, Design for manufacturing, User-friendly
design. 10hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe mechatronics system for a specific application and analyze the system models.
2. Implement the signal conditioning and analyze their circuits.
3. Assess the dynamics of a mechatronics system and to analyse the interfacing of microcontroller,
sensors and actuators.
4. Compare elements of signal conditioning and evaluate their systems.
5. Assess the micro fabrication processes and learns the applications of the mechatronic systems.

1. Michel B. Histand and David. Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics & Measurement
Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. W. Bolton , “Mechatronics” 2nd edition, AddisonWesleyLongman, 1999.
3. Lawrence J. Kamm, “Understanding Electro-Mechanical Engineering an Introduction to
Mechatronics”, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1st edition, 1996.
4. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Cengage Learning, 2nd
edition, 2011.
5. Mahalik, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003.
6. HMT, “Mechatronics”- Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1998.
MS-50


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 3
MS-51
Course Code 18MS2E1D M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Course title POWDER METALLURGY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand particulate processing methods.

2. Understand advantages, disadvantages, applications of particulate processing.
3. Analyse the production methods of metal and ceramic powders.
4. Evaluate the methods of powder compaction.
5. Apply recent developments in particulate technology.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to particulate processing – advantages, limitations and applications of particulate processing.
04hrs
UNIT – II
Science of particulate processing – issues related to particle morphology – differences in mechanical
behaviour (with respect to cast and wrought materials) and related mathematical treatment - similarities
and differences between metal powder and ceramic powder processing. 12hrs
UNIT – III
Production and characterisation of metal and ceramic powders – compaction processes –powder properties
and powder compaction – Pressing, Hot Isostatic Processing and extrusion.
12hrs
UNIT – IV
Sintering – thermodynamic and process aspects – recent developments in mechanical alloying and reaction
milling. 08hrs
UNIT – V
Production of particulate composites - application of P/M based on case studies - manufacturing of typical
products – near net shape processing. 12hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-52
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Explain the various aspects of particulate processing.
2. Discuss the advantages, disadvantages, applications of particulate processing.
3. Compare the production methods of metal and ceramic powders.
4. Assess the methods of powder compaction.
5. Implement recent developments in particulate technology.

1. German R.M., ‗Powder Metallurgy Science‘, Metal Powder Industries Federation, New Jersey, 1994
2. Kuhn H. A. and Alan Lawley, ‗Powder Metallurgy Processing - New Techniques and Analysis‘,
Oxford IBH, Delhi, 1978
3. Martin Rhode, ‗Introduction to Particle Technology‘
4. Jonathan Seville, Chuan-Yu Wu, ‘Particle Technology and Engineering: An Engineer's Guide to
Particles, Powders, and Multiphase Systems‘


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 2 3
MS-53
Course title INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts of IoT.
2. Understand and apply the key technology of IoT to industries.
3. Understand the different components of IIoT Architecture.
4. Evaluate the different components of IIoT for Designing and IIoT system.
5. Create an IIoT model for typical engineering industry.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Data Communications and Computer Networks
Communications Model, Networks, Internet, TCP/IP Protocol Architecture, OSI Model, Traditional
Internet-Based Applications. 08hrs
UNIT – II
Internet of Things (IoT)
Defination and characterisitics of IoT, Physical Design of IoT, Logical Design of IoT, IoT Enabling
Technologies, IoT Levels and Deployment Templates., Applications of IoT: Home Automation, Smart
Cities, Smart Retail, Smart Logistics, Smart Agriculture, Health and Lifestyle, Machine-to-Machine
Model, SDN and NFV for IoT. 10hrs
UNIT – III
Internet of Things (IoT) and its Key Technologies
Wirless Sensor Networks (WSN): Definitions and Background, Node Architecture, Operating Systems.
Cloud Computing: Introduction, Principles of Parallel and Distributed Computing, Virtualization.
Middleware for Internet of Things: IoT Middleware, Middleware Architecture. 9hrs
UNIT – IV
IoT Devlopment using Python and IOT Devices and Protocols
Python data types and data structures, control flow, functions, modules, packages. Basic building blocks of
IoT Devices, Rasberry Pi, Programming Raspberry Pi using Python, Basics of IoT Protocols: HTTP,
UpnP, MQTT, CoAp and XMPP. 9hrs
UNIT – V
Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT)
Industrial Internet Committee Reference Architecture, Industrial Internet Architecture Framework (IIAF),
Industrial Internet Viewpoints, The Control Domain, Communication, Modeling, Asset Management,
Executor, The Operational Domain, Information Domain, Application Domain, Business Domain,
Implementation Viewpoint, Architectural Topology, Three-Tier Topology, Gateway-Mediated Edge,
Connectivity, System Characteristics, Key Functional Characteristics of Connectivity, Key Functions of
the Communication Layer, Data Management, Query, Storage, Persistence, and Retrieval.
Applications: Smart Factories, Manufacturing. 12hrs
MS-54
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe the basic concepts of IoT.
2. Implement the key technology of IoT to a typical industrial problem.
3. Understand working and importance of different components of IIoT architecture
4. Assess the various components of IIoT.
5. Design and develop IIoT model for a typical industry, highlight the recent trends in the use of IoT
in industries.

1. Willian Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, Pearson, 2017.
2. Waltenegus Dragie and Christian Poellabauer, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks:
Theory and Practice‖, Wiley, 2010.
3. Christian Vecchiola, Rajkumar Buyya and S. Thamarai Selvi, ―Mastering Cloud Computing”,
1st Edition, Mcgraw Higher Ed, 2017.
4. Mark Lutz, ―Learning Python‖, 5th Edition, O‘Reilly, 2013.
5. Alasdair Gilchrist, ―Industry 4.0 The Industrial Internet Of Things‖, Apress, 2016.
6. Naveen Balani, ―Enterprise IoT A Definite Handbook‖, CreateSpace Independent Publishing
Platform, 4 edition, 2016.
7. B. Nagesh Rao, ―Learning Python‖, Pub-Cyber Plus Infotech Pvt Ltd. Bangalore 2016-17
8. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WUYAjxnwjU4&list=PLaxu2gn-
9WXMf_ln5pMvxjf043jzof4i


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 2
MS-55
Course title DIGITAL MANUFACTURING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts and components of digital manufacturing system.
2. Apply and analysis various system of digital manufacturing.
3. Analyse and evaluate the application of manufacturing informatics and sensor technology in
digital manufacturing.
4. Analyse the issues of self-learning and management of technology and key technologies in digital
manufacturing.
5. Create a conceptual model of a digital manufacturing system.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction: Development of Manufacturing Science, Concepts, Research and Development status of
Digital Manufacturing, Connection and Research methods, Architecture, Organisation Model and
Functional Models of Digital Manufacturing System; System of Digital Manufacturing: Operation Mode
and Architecture, Modelling Theory and Methods. 09hrs
UNIT – II
System of Digital Manufacturing: Theory System of Digital Manufacturing.
Computing Manufacturing: Virtual Prototype, Reverse Engineering, Application of Reverse
Engineering, Information Model of Product Life Cycle, Information Model of Manufacturing Technology
Resource, Geometric Modelling Forms, Geometric Modelling In Manufacturing Computing,
Computational Geometry.
10hrs
UNIT – III
Manufacturing Informatics: Information Characteristics, Activities and Manufacturing Informatics,
Integrating Sharing and Manufacturing Information, Integration Model, Principle and Mechanism of
Sharing Manufacturing Resources.
Intelligent Manufacturing Systems: Application of Sensors In Processing Data Mining, Sensor
Application In Tool Condition Monitoring, Intelligent Multi Information Fusion, Data Mining Applied To
Digital Manufacturing, Knowledge Resourcing In Engineering Design Intelligent Knowledge Based
Manufacturing System.
10hrs
UNIT – IV
Self-Learning Of Manufacturing System: Adaption of Manufacturing System, Concepts and Features of
Intelligent Manufacturing, Multi-Agent Manufacturing System,
Management Technology: Concepts And Development Processes Of MOT, Model Of MOT,
Coordinative Management Of Collaborative R&D Network, And Technical Capacity Of People
Coordinate Factors, The Digital Marketing Based On Cultural Difference And Way Of Thinking.
10hrs
MS-56
UNIT – V
Key Technology Of Digital Marketing: Various Digital Technologies In Product Life Cycle, CAX
Technology Integration, Digital Equipment Technology, Digital Processing Technology, Remote Failure
Based On Network Digital Logic Technology.
10hrs
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Describe the functional model of typical digital manufacturing system.
2. Describe the various issues related to implementations of subsystems of digital manufacturing.
3. Assess and validate the integration of manufacturing informatics and sensor information in digital
manufacturing.
4. Relate the issues of self-learning and management of technology in digital manufacturing.
5. Assess the importance of key technologies, Develop a conceptual model incorporating to recent
trends and research being done in the topics of digital manufacturing.

1. Zude Zhou, Shane (Shengquam) Xie, Dejun Chen, ―Fundamentals Of Digital Manufacturing‖,
2012, Springer ISBN 978-0-85729-564-4
2. Lihni Wang , Andrew Yc Nee, ―Collaborative Desgn And Planning For Digital
Manufacturinging‖, Springer Series 2009, ISBN 998-1-84882-286-3
3. Asteriosagkathidis, ―Digital Manufacturing In Design And Architecture‖ Garner Books 2010,
ISBN 978906392322
4. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, ―Additive Manufacturing Technologies‖ Spriger 2nd
Edition ISBN 978-1-4939-2112-6


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3 3
MS-57
Course title SURFACE TREATMENT AND FINISHING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES: Students will learn to

1. Apply the knowledge relating to surface treatment.
2. Understand the concepts of material coating.
3. Apply the concepts of plastic coating of metals.
4. Analyse the practices behind Heat treatment of metals.
5. Evaluate the materials for advanced coating technologies.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Surface Treatment: Scope, methods of cleaning, Surface coating types, ceramic and organic methods of
coating, Economics of coating. Electro forming, Chemical vapour deposition, thermal spraying, Ion
implantation, diffusion coating, Diamond coating and cladding. 10hrs
UNIT – II
Coating Concepts: Fundamentals of Electro plating, galvanizing, Hot dip metal coating, thin coating,
chromium plating, Nickel plating. Vacuum coating, FVD & CVD metal spraying - Methods, surface
preparation, mechanical Properties of sprayed metals and plasma coating. 10hrs
UNIT – III
Plastic coating of metal - PVC coating - Spherodising process details, phosphate coating - mechanism of
formation. Testing of surface coating-methods. 08hrs
UNIT – IV
Heat Treatment: Importance of Heat treatment, methods-Annealing, Normalizing, Tempering, Case
hardening methods, flame hardening, sub - zero treatment. Heat treatment methods for gears, spindles,
cutting tools. 10 hrs
UNIT – V
Advanced coating technologies: Hard facing, electro deposition technique, nano-coatings- nano coating
materials, coating characterization.
10hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-58
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Students shall apply the concepts learnt, to the effective surface treatment of materials.
2. Students shall incorporate the principles involved in coating of materials for better performance
requirements.
3. Students shall apply the principles for effectively plastic coating the metals.
4. Students shall analyze the principle behind heat treatment of metals.
5. Students shall evaluate the rationale behind the advanced coating technologies.

1. James A Murphy, ―Surface preparations & finishes for Metals‖, Mc Graw Hill.
2. ―Principles of metal surface treatment and protection‖- Pergamon PressGabe, DavidRussell-
Description, Oxford; NewYork-2ded.,1978.
3. Hand book of metal treatment and testing-John wiley & sons.
4. B. Zakhrov, ―Heat Treatment of Metals‖, MIR Publications.
5. ASM Metals Hand Book & Vol. of Testing of materials.
6. A.V.K. Suryanarayan, ―Testing of Metallic Materials‖, Prentice Hall of India.
7. Workability Testing Techniques, G.E. Dieter, ASM 1984.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 2
CO2 1 2 2
CO3 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 1 3 2
MS-59
Course Code 18MS2L01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Category Laboratory Semester: II
MATLAB AND SIMULATION OF MANUFACTURING
Course title
PROCESSES LABORATORY
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 2

1. Understand the basic tools of the simulation tools and MATLAB software.
2. Apply the tools for creating the drawing, mould of casting and forging process.
3. Analyse the process parameters for Rolling, Drawing and Extrusion process.
4. Create a model and evaluate the mechanism, stresses developed in mechanisms for different
models.
COURSE CONTENTS
PART –A
1. Analyse the process of Casting of ferrous and non ferrous materials using computer simulation.
2. Analyse the process of Forging and Sheet metal work using computer simulation.
3. Analyse the process of Rolling, Drawing and Extrusion using computer simulation.
4. Analyse the process of Heat Treatment using computer simulation.
PART –B
1. An introduction to MATLAB.
2. A half cylinder rolling on a horizontal plane.
3. A three bar linkage problem.
4. Slider-Crank mechanism.
5. Two bar linkage assembly supported by a pivot joint and a horizontal plane.
6. Determination of invariance, principal stresses and strains and directions for rectangular and
circular cross section.
7. Case studies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Applies the knowledge and relates the different process using the simulation software.
2. Validate the solutions with practical data from the literature.
3. Analyse the results, comparing simulation data with practical data.
4. Investigate different industrial problems and solve using simulation tools.
MS-60

Performance of the student in the 20 Write up
laboratory, every week 10
Test at the end of the semester 20 Experiment-1 (Part –A) = 35 marks 70
Experiment-2 (Part –B) = 35 marks
Viva voce 10 Viva voce 20
Total 100
Note: * = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
Marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1 3
CO2 2 3
CO3 2 3
CO4 2 3 3
MS-61
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

effectively.
2. Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected area/topic and
prepare content rich presentation.
3. Acquire communication and time management skills for effective and impactful presentation. Interact
with peers to acquire the qualities of thoughtfulness, friendliness, adaptability, responsiveness, and
politeness in-group discussion. Overcome stage fear during oral presentation.
GUIDE LINES
COURSE OUTCOMES:



MS-62
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3
MS-63
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT –I
 Overview of methodology and searching.
05hrs
UNIT –II
 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and informal
classrooms in developing countries.
 Curriculum, teacher education, usage of modern tools.
04hrs
UNIT –III
 How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance
materials best support effective pedagogy?
 Teacher‘s attitudes and beliefs and pedagogic strategies.
05hrs
UNIT –IV
 Peer support
 Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes.
05hrs
MS-64
UNIT –V
 Research design
 Contexts
 Pedagogy
 Dissemination and research impact. 05hrs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Discuss and compare the different practices of Pedagogy studies for effective teaching and
learning.

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare, 31 (2):
245-261.
2. Agrawal M (2004) Curriculum reform in school: The importance of evaluation, Journal of
Curriculum Studies, 36(3): 361-379.
3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana – does it count? Multi-site teacher education
research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.
4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Proyor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning of basic
maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International Journal Educational
Development, 33 (3): 272-282.
5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary education.
Oxford and Boston; Blackwell.
6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, ‗learning to read‘ campaign.

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1
CO2 1
CO3 1 1 1
MS-65
Category Program Elective Semester: III
Course title INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts of Python and Machine learning.
2. Understand different types of supervised learning.
3. Understand the unsupervised Learning.
4. Apply Reinforcement learning to case studies.
5. Create a conceptual model comprising of various technologies involved in machine learning.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT– I
Python: Origin, programming basics, Data types and operators ,program files, Directories, changing Data
through names, Copying Data, Accecing a tuple through another tuple, packages and libraries. 09hrs
UNIT– II
Overview of Machine learning: broad categories of Machine learning- Supervised, semi-supervised and
reinforcement learning, Application areas of Machine learning, Examples and case studies. 09hrs
UNIT– III
Supervised Learning: Introduction, Classification and linear regression, K-Nearest Neighbor , linear
models, Decision trees, Naïve Bayes Classifiers, Kernelised Support Vector Machine(SVM) algorithm,
Neural Networks, comparison of Different algorithms and case studies. 10hrs
UNIT– IV
Unsupervised Learning: Introduction, Types and challenges, Preprocessing and scaling of data sets,
Dimensionality reduction, feature extraction, principle component analysis(PCA), k-means, agglomerative
and DBSCAN clustering algorithms, comparison of different cluster algorithms and case studies.
10hrs
UNIT– V
Reinforcement Learning: Introduction, the learning task, Q learning – function, convergence, updating
sequence, rewards and actions, relationship to dynamic programming and case studies.
10hrs
UNIT– VI
MS-66
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Illustrate the basic concepts of Python and Machine learning.
2. Discuss different types of supervised learning.
3. Explain the unsupervised Learning.
4. Implement Reinforcement learning to case studies.
5. Design and develop a conceptual model involving machine learning in manufacturing science and

1. Andreas C Muller and sarah Guidp, ―Introduction of machine learning with python‖, O‘Reilly and
shorff publishers.
2. Peter Flach, ―Machine learning: The art and science of algorithms‖, Cambridge University Press.
3. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Machine learning‖, PHI publications.
4. ―Introducing Python‖, Oriely Publications.
5. Tom M Mitchell, ―Machine learning‖, McGraw Hill Education Publication -2013.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
MS-67
Course title LEAN MANUFACTURING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts and benefits of lean manufacturing.
2. Apply the primary tools of lean manufacturing.
3. Apply and analyse secondary tools of lean manufacturing.
4. Evaluate the cellular manufacturing system.
5. Create a conceptual lean manufacturing system.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to Lean Manufacturing, Comparison of Mass Manufacturing and Lean Manufacturing, Lean
Principles, Types of Wastes – Seven basic categories, Types of activities – Value Added, Non Value
Added and Necessary but Non Value Added activities, Benefits of Lean Manufacturing, Examples.
09hrs
UNIT – II
Primary tools of Lean Manufacturing: 5S Work place organization, Total Productive Maintenance and
Pillars of TPM, Process Mapping and Value Stream Mapping (VSM) – Need for process maps,
advantages, types and its construction, steps in preparing VSM.
10hrs
UNIT – III
Secondary tools of Lean Manufacturing: Cause and effect diagram, Pareto chart, Poke Yoke, Principles of
Just-In-Timeand JIT system, Kanban rules and Implementation of Kanban, Automation with Jidoka
concept, Standardized fixture, Visual workplace, Pull systems and push systems.
10hrs
UNIT – IV
Cellular manufacturing: Types of Layout, Principles of Cell layout and Implementation. Set up time
reduction – Definition, philosophies and reduction approaches. Concept of work cell and Line balancing.
09hrs
UNIT – V
Understanding various lean implementation frameworks, Step for lean manufacturing implementation,
Various case studies of implementation of lean manufacturing at industries.
10hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-68
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Discuss the basic concepts and their role in achieving benefits of lean manufacturing.
2. Implement the primary tools of lean manufacturing to determine the key area of concern.
3. Compare the secondary tools of lean manufacturing and analyse them.
4. Assess the cellular manufacturing system in respect of reduction set up time.
5. Design and develop a lean manufacturing system incorporating latest developments in lean
manufacturing.
REFERENCES
1. Lonnie Wilson, ―How to Implement Lean Manufacturing‖, McGraw Hill, August 2009
2. N. Goplakrishnan, ―Simplifed Lean Manufacture‖, PHI, 2010
3. Pascal Dennis, ―Lean Production Simplified‖, Productivity Press, New York, 2007
4. Jeffrey Liker, ―The Toyota Way‖, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004
5. Ronald G. Askin& Jeffrey B. Goldberg, ―Design and analysis of lean production systems‖, John
Wiley & Sons, 2003
6. TaiichiOhno, ―Toyota Production System: Beyond Large-Scale Production‖, Taylor & Francis,
Inc., Portland, Oregon Productivity Press, 1988.
7. The Machine that Changed the World. The Story of Lean Production - James P
8. Womack, Daniel T Jones, and Daniel Roos - Harper Perennial edition published - 1991.
9. James Womack & Daniel T. Jones, ―Lean Thinking‖ - Simon & Schuster Adult, - ISBN:
0743249275, 2003.
Web Resource:
1. https://www.lean.org/


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3 3
MS-69
Course title PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts of PLM.
2. Apply and analyse PLM functionalities.
3. Analyse and Evaluate PLM processes and workflow.
4. Understand and apply PLM solution management steps for implementation.
5. Create a strategy to develop PLM system.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to Product Life Cycle Management (PLM): Product data management (PDM) –
systems, importance, functions, applications and necessities from PDM to PLM. Introduction to PLM,
PLM Lifecycle model, Threads of PLM, Need for PLM, Opportunities and benefits of PLM, Views,
Components, functions and Phases of PLM. 09hrs
UNIT – II
PLM Functionalities- PLM functions; part management, document management, CAD management,
change management, BOM management-EBOM, MBOM, As built BOM, service BOM.
09hrs
UNIT – III
PLM Concepts, Processes and Workflow: Characteristics of PLM, Environment driving
PLM,PLM Elements, Drivers of PLM, Conceptualization, Design, Development, Validation, Production,
PLM Process, Flowchart vs, Rule-based workflows, Implementation of PLM workflows, Support of
PLM, product description data, Data models, Life cycles of individual items, status of items.
10hrs
UNIT – IV
Developing a PLM strategy and conducting a PLM assessment: PLM Strategies, Impact of
strategy, Brief study on implementing a PLM strategy, PLM initiatives to support corporate objective,
PLM Workflow Tool Dream, Infrastructure assessment, assessment of current systems and applications.
10hrs
UNIT – V
PLM Solution Management For Implementation- Design, development and testing different phases of
PLM solution development and execution methodologies – water fall and agile, validation and testing.
10hrs
UNIT – VI
MS-70
COURSE OUTCOMES
1.Explain the basic concepts of PLM.
2. Implement and emphasis PLM functionalities.
3. Assess PLM processes and workflow.
4. Implement PLM solution management steps for implementation.
5.Design and develop a strategy to implement a typical PLM system.
1. Michael Grieves, ―Product Lifecycle Management‖,McGraw-Hil, Edition 2006.ISBN 0071452303.

2. Mariusz Cholewa, ―Product Lifecycle Management‖, Wroclaw University of Technology 2011, ISBN
97883-32098-15-6
3. “Product data management‖, Burden Rodgee Resources pub 2003.ISBN 0970035225.
4. Fabio Giudice, Guido La Rosa, ―Product Design for the environment-A life cycle.
Approach‖, Taylor & Francis 2006.
5. Saaksvuori Antti / ImmonenAnselmie, ―Product Life Cycle Management‖, Springer Pub 2005,
Dreamtech, 3-
540-25731-4
6. Michael Grieves, ―Product Lifecycle Management‖, Tata McGraw Hill Pub 2006


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3 3
MS-71
Course title SEMINAR - III
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

1. Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and analyse the same effectively.
2. Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected area/topic and
prepare content rich presentation.
3. Acquire communication and time management skills for effective and impactful presentation. Interact
with peers to acquire the qualities of thoughtfulness, friendliness, adaptability, responsiveness, and
politeness in-group discussion.
GUIDE LINES
COURSE OUTCOMES:


MS-72

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3
MS-73
Course Code 18MS3I01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 10 --- 5
Duration of SEE: 3 Hrs for a
batch of 6 students
INTERNSHIP
1. Provide an opportunity to see how classroom and textbook learning applies to the real world, and
to expose the students to the relevant work experience.
2. Pay close attention to all the steps that go onto completing a job, thereby, help students to become
workforce ready before entering the job market as a graduate. Provide an opportunity to select the
topic of dissertation work by evaluating the requirement of organisation.
GUIDELINES
1. Student has to approach the concerned heads of various Industries/organization, which are related
to the field of specialization of the M. Tech program.
2. If any student gets internship, he/she has to submit the internship offer letter duly signed by the
concerned authority of the company to the Chairperson of the Department.
3. The internship on full time basis will be immediately after the examination of II semester and
during vacation of III semester for a minimum period of 8 weeks without affecting the regular
class work.
4. The progress has to be reported periodically Internship Guide assigned by the Chairperson as per
the format acceptable to the respective industry /organizations and to the Institution.
5. At the end of the internship the student has to prepare and submit a detailed report and submit.
6. Students are advised to use ICT tools such as Skype to report their progress and submission of
periodic progress reports to the faculty in charge or guide.
7. Duly signed report from guide and external supervisor from the organization where internship is
offered has to be submitted to the Chairperson of the Department for evaluation.
The broad format of the internship final report shall contain Cover Page, Certificate from College,
Certificate from Industry / Organization of internship, Acknowledgement, Synopsis, Table of
Contents, chapters of Profile of the Organization - Organizational structure, Products, Services,
Business Partners, Financials, Manpower, Societal Concerns, Professional Practices, Activities of the
Department where internship is done, Tasks Performed and summary of the tasks performed.
specific technical and soft skills that student has acquired during internship, References &
Annexure.
MS-74
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Apply the gained experience along with the theoretical knowledge to solve the real world
problems what engineers ready do.
2. Get equipped with experience required before entering the job market. Explore the possibility of
formulating the dissertation problem.
50*
Marks
= 50 marks
SEE
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
50*
4 Documentation 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
Rubrics for SEE:

no of SEE
50**
4 Document 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
Note: ** = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 3
MS-75
MINI PROJECT
1. Understand the method of applying engineering knowledge/use application software to solve specific
problems after carrying out relevant literature survey.
Student shall take up small problems in the field of domain of program as mini project. It can be related to
a solution to an engineering problem, verification and analysis of experimental data available, conducting
experiments on various engineering subjects, material characterisation, familiarising a software tool for
solution to selected engineering problem, etc.
The mini project must be carried out preferably using the resources available in the department/college
and it can be of interdisciplinary also .
COURSE OUTCOMES:


50*
Marks
= 50 marks
SEE
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
Total 100%
MS-76
Rubrics for SEE:
The SEE shall be done by two examiners out of which one examiner is the guide of mini project. The
following weightage would be given for the examination. Evaluation shall be done in batches, not
exceeding 6 students.
no of CIE
Discussion 50**
4 Report 25%
5 Viva Voce 20%
Total 100%
Note: ** = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 2 3
CO3 3
MS-77
Course Code 18MS3D01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 10 0 5
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks:50 Total Max. Marks: 100 Duration of SEE: 1Hour
1. Choose a problem applying relevant knowledge and skills acquired during the course. Formulate the
specifications of the project work, identify the set of feasible solutions, prepare, and execute project
plan considering professional, cultural and societal factors. Identify the problem-solving methodology
using literature survey and present the same.
2. Develop experimental planning and select appropriate techniques and tools to conduct experiments to
Evaluate and critically examine the outcomes followed by concluding the results and identifying
relevant applications. Preparation of synopsis, preliminary report for approval of topic selected along
with literature survey, objectives and methodology.
GUIDELINES
The Dissertation work will start in III semester and should be a problem with research potential
and should involve scientific research, design, generation/collection and analysis of data, determining
solution and must preferably bring out the individual contribution.
The Dissertation work will have to be done by only one student and the topic of dissertation must
be decided by the guide and the student. The dissertation work shall be carried out, on-campus or in an
industry or in an organisation with prior approval from the Chairperson of the Department. The student
has to be in regular contact with the guide atleast once in a week.
Nomenclature, Chapters of Introduction including motivation to choose topic, Literature survey,
Conclusion of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of Dissertation, Methodology to be followed,
Experimental requirements, References and Annexure.
The preliminary results (if available) of the problem of Dissertation work may also be discussed in
the report.
COURSE OUTCOME:

1. Self learn various topics relevant to Dissertation work. Carry out the literature survey from
National/International reference journals, articles and books contact resource persons for selected
topics of Dissertation.
3. Present and defend the contents of Dissertation work phase I in front of technically qualified
audience effectively.
MS-78

CIE

SEE


Mapping of Course Outcomes (Cos) to Program Outcomes (POs)
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 2 3
MS-79
Course title SEMINAR - IV
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

The objectives of the SEMINAR-IV is to prepare the students to learn to:
effectively.
2. Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the selected area/topic
and prepare content rich presentation.
3. Acquire communication and time management skills for effective and impactful presentation.
Interact with peers to acquire the qualities of thoughtfulness, friendliness, adaptability,
responsiveness, and politeness in-group discussion.
GUIDE LINES
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Overcome inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the spirit of team work.


Chairperson of the department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per the rubrics given below:

MS-80
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3
MS-81
Course Code 18MS4D01 M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 30 --- 15
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Total Max. Marks: 100 Duration of SEE:
1. Apply/Use different experimental techniques, equipments, software/ Computational/ Analytical

/Modelling and Simulation tools required for conducting tests and generate other relevant data.
Students will also be able to design and develop an experimental prototype setup/test rig/frame
work/test bench.
3. Create a detailed technical document as per format based on the outcome of dissertation work
phase I and II.
GUIDELINES
Dissertation work phase II is the continuation of project work started in III semester. The report of
final Dissertation work that includes the details of Dissertation work phase I and phase II should be
presented in a standard format. The candidate shall prepare a detailed report of final dissertation work
in bound form that includes Cover Page, Certificate from College/Industry/Organisation,
Acknowledgement, Abstract, Table of contents, List of Figures and Table, Nomenclature, Chapter of
Introduction, Literature survey, Conclusion of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of dissertation
work, Methodology, Experimentation, Results, Discussion, Conclusion, Scope for future work,
References, Annexure and full text of the publication (submitted or published).
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Conduct experiments/ implement the capabilities of different Software /Computational /
Analytical/Modelling and simulation tools individually and generate data for validation of
hypothesis.
2. Investigate and assess the results obtained within the scope of experiments conducted followed by
Conclusions.
3. Prepare a detailed technical document, present and defend the contents of Dissertation work
before technically qualified audience effectively.

100 50*
marks marks
300 50**
marks marks
MS-82
Note: * = CIE be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
** = SEE shall be conducted for 300 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50 marks.
1. Presentation of background of dissertation work = 10%

2. Literature survey, Problem formulation and Objectives = 30%
3. Presentation of methodology and experimentation = 30%
4. Results and Discussion = 20%
1. Originality = 5%
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3
MS-83
Course Code 18MSMOOC M.Tech (Manufacturing Science and Engineering)
Category Semester : IV
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- --- --- 3

3. Understand the importance of MOOC in life long learning.
COURSE CONTENTS
The courses shall be from the related topics not taught in M. Tech program or other recent trends in
mechanical enigineering.
COURSE OUTCOMES
3. Inculcate the habit of life long learning required in professional carrier.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks Marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
MS-84

University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering
K R Circle, Bengaluru - 560001

Major: Thermal Science And Engineering
MT-1
VISION
“To strive for excellence in education for the realization of a vibrant and
inclusive society through knowledge creation and dissemination”
MISSION

publications
 Inculcate right values among students while encouraging competitiveness
to promote leadership qualities
MT-2
University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering (UVCE) was started as a School of Mechanical

Engineering by Bharat Ratna Sir. M. Visvesvaraya in the year 1913 to meet the needs of the State
for skilled workers with S V Setty as its Superintendent. Later, it was converted to a full-fledged
Engineering College in the year 1917 under the name Government Engineering College and was
affiliated to the University of Mysore. It is the fifth Engineering College to be established in the
country.
Constituent Colleges of Bangalore University. This is one of the oldest Institutions in the country
imparting technical education leading to B.E., M.E, B.Arch., M.Sc. (Engineering), M.Arch. and
Ph.D. degrees in various disciplines of Engineering and Architecture. The Institution currently
offers 7 Undergraduate (B.E. / B.Arch.) Full-time, three Undergraduate (B.E.) Part-time and 24
Postgraduate (M.E. / M.Arch.) Programmes.
VISION
The vision of UVCE is to strive for excellence in advancing engineering education through path
breaking innovations across the frontiers of human knowledge to realize a vibrant, inclusive and
humane society.
MISSION
The mission of UVCE is to prepare human resource and global leaders to achieve the above
vision through discovery, invention and develop friendly technologies to promote scientific
temper for a healthy society. UVCE shapes engineers to respond competently and confidently to
the economic, social and organizational challenges arising from globally advancing technical
needs.
MT-3
Name of programme: M. Tech in Mechanical Engineering
Major: Thermal Science and Engineering
Strive for Centre of Excellence in advancing Mechanical Engineering education to produce highly
qualified human resources to meet local and global requirement.

MEM2. Preparing and equipping human resources to become global leaders through innovation,
discovery, sustainable and environment friendly technology.
industries, R and D laboratories of national importance, alumni, employers and other internal &

environmental consciousness.
improvement and to equip them with then latest trends in Mechanical Engineering and thereby
inculcate the habit of continuous learning in faculty, staff and students.
The post graduates of M.Tech in Thermal Science and Engineering will be provided the knowledge
and skill to:
TSPEO1: Have successful career through the application of latest developments in Thermal Science
and Engineering.
TSPEO2: Communicate effectively and ability to work individually and in team with zeal for
venturing into entrepreneurship and involve in life long learning.
TSPEO3: Pursue high level research, higher studies and choose professional career.
MT-4
Program outcomes:
Post graduates with M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering) degree will be able to:
TSPO1: Independently carry out research/investigation and development work to solve practical
Problems of the domain of program.
TSPO2: Prepare and present a substantial technical report/document.
TSPO3: Demonstrate a higher degree of mastery in the various fields of Thermal Science and
Engineering.
MT-5
MAJOR: Thermal Science and Engineering
Semester I
Teaching
Dept
1. 18TS1C01 Mathematical Methods in Engineering 3 2 0 0 Maths 5 50 50 4
2. 18TS1C02 Advanced Fluid Mechanics 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18TS1C03 Thermodynamics and Combustion 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
Engineering
4. 18TS1E1A Finite Element Methods
18TS1E1B Energy Management and Auditing 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
4
18TS1E1C Direct Energy Conversion
5. 18TS1E2A Alternative fuels and pollution
18TS1E2B Exergy Analysis of Thermal System 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
4
18TS1E2C Fuel Cell Technology
Advanced Thermal Engineering
6. 18TS1L01 0 0 4 0 Mech 4 50 50 2
Laboratory
7. 18ME1M01 2 0 0 0 Mech 2 50 50 2
Property Rights
8. 18TS1S01 Seminar-I 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
9. Technical Paper Writing (Audit Course
18ME1M02 2 0 0 0 English 2 50 1
- I)
Total 23 02 06 --- 31 450 350 26
MT-6
Semester II
No. Type /Course Course Name (No. of hrs per week) Teaching Credits
Total CIE *SEE
Code Dept
L T P S hrs / week Marks Marks
1. 18TS2C01 Advanced Heat and Mass Transfer 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
2. 18TS2C02 Advanced Turbo Machinery 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18TS2C03 Computational Fluid Dynamics 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
4. 18TS2E1A Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
18TS2E1B Computer Simulation of S.I and C.I 4
Engines 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
18TS2E1C Thermal and Nuclear Power Plant
Engineering
5. 18TS2E2A Gas Dynamics and Propulsion
18TS2E2B Cryogenic Engineering 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18TS2E2C Nano Fluids
6. 18TS2L01 Computational Methods Laboratory 0 0 4 0 Mech 4 50 50 2
7. 18TS2S01 Seminar - II 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
8. 18ME2M01 Pedagogy Studies (Audit Course - II) 2 0 0 0 Mech 0 50 1
Total 22 --- 06 --- 28 400 300 24
MT-7
Semester III
L T P S
1. 18TS3E1A Advanced I.C Engines
18TS3E1B Convective Heat Transfer 4 0 0 0 Mech 50 50 4
4
18TS3E1C Jet Propulsion And Rocket Engineering
2. Open Elective 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18TS3S01 Seminar - III 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
4. 18TS3I01 Internship / Mini Project --- --- 10 --- Mech 10 50 50 5
5. 18TS3D01 Dissertation Work Phase -I 0 0 10 0 Mech 10 50 50 5
Total 08 --- 22 --- 30 250 200 19
Semester IV
Teaching
Dept
1. 18TS4S01 Seminar - IV 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
2. 18TS4D01 Dissertation Work Phase -II --- --- 30 --- Mech 30 50 50 15
Total --- --- 32 --- 32 100 50 16
1. 18MSMOOC MOOC Course --- --- --- --- 03
Grand Total of Credits --- --- --- --- 88
MT-8
1) 18ME3P1A – Composite and Smart Materials

COURSE TYPE
TS: THERMAL SCIENCE AND ENGG C: PROGRAM CORE E: PROGRAM ELECTIVE
P: OPEN ELECTIVE M: MANDATORY AUDIT L: LABORATORY
S: SEMINAR I: INTERNSHIP/ MINI PROJECT D: DISSERTATION WORK
L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial, P – Lab work, S – Self Study:

NOTE:
1) In any course (Program Core or Program Elective),if self study of 4 hrs per week for students is allocated, then the teaching scheme of such
courses will be 3-0-0-4 and the total credits will be 4.
3) # = The CIE test of the lab component of integrated course shall be conducted with the external examiner for 50 marks and shall be reduced to
25 marks.
MT-9
Semester III
L T P S
18CV3P1A National Building Codes
1. 18CV3P1B Water Lows, Rights & Administration
18CV3P1C Solid Waste Management 4 0 0 0 Civil 4 50 50 4
Remote Sensing and geographic
18CV3P1D
Information System
2. 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
4 0 0 0 EEE 4 50 50 4
3. 18EE3P1B Robotics and Automation
18EC3P1C Optimization Techniques
MT-10
Department of Mechanical Engineering, U. V. C. E., M. Tech. – Thermal Science and Engineering
SEMESTER-I
Course Code 18TS1C01 M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering)

No. of Hours/Week
3 2 0 0 4

1. Analyse the concepts and importance of Probability theory and various dristributions.
3. Apply the knowledge of ordinary and partial differential equations of solving
4. Apply the basic concepts of partial differential equations and complex algebra for
UNIT I
Probability Distributions: Baye's rule, Discrete random variables and their probability
distributions; The binomial probability distribution, The Poisson probability distribution, The
normal probability distribution for continuous random variables. Sampling distributions like
x2,t, F. 6 hours
UNIT II
Probability and Statistics: Statistics and sampling distributions, central limit theorem, the
sampling distribution of the sample mean and of the sample proportion. Testing hypothesis
about population parameters. A Statistical test of hypothesis, large sample test of a population
mean. 6 hours
UNIT III
Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations: Initial value problems : Difference
equations, Single step methods: Classical Runge Kutta 2nd and 4th order methods- Stability
analysis. Predictor Corrector methods : Modified Euler's method, Milne's Predictor-Corrector
method. 12 hours
UNIT IV
Numerical solution of Partial differential equations: Finite difference solution of one
dimensional heat equation, one dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace
equation. Stability analysis of finite difference methods for heat and wave equations- Von-
Neumann method. 12 hours
MT-11
UNIT V
Calculus of Variations: Functionals, Variation of a functional, necessary condition for

extremisation of a functional. Euler-Lagrange equation and Euler-Poisson equation- special
cases. 12 hours
Constrained extremisation problems-isoperimetric problems.
UNIT VI
Recent advances and research being done in thetopics mentioned in the above units.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Determine the appropriateness of applying probability distributions under various
2. Differentiate hypothesis testing procedures based on type of outcome variable and number
of samples.
3. Select appropriate numerical methods to apply to various types of problems in engineering
in consideration of the mathematical operations involved and accuracy requirements.
4. Derive and analyze standard finite difference methods for the one dimensional wave and
heat equations and are able to understand the concepts of stability of numerical methods.
5. Solve engineering problems using the methods and techniques of the calculus of variations
and prepare for the study of modern optimal control theory.

1. Mendenhall, Beaver J and Beaver M: Introduction to Probability and Statistics,
Twelfth
edition. 2012.
2. Jain, Iyengar and Jain: Numerical methods for scientific and engineering computation,
Fifth edition,
New age international publishers, 2014
3. E. Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 10th Ed.,
2015
5. Ronald E, Walpole, Sharon L. Myers, Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for
Engineers and
Scientists (8th Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 07 (for Units I & II).
6. J. B. Doshi, Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers, Narosa, New Delhi,
10 (for Units
III & IV).
Student Edition,
09.
Statistical for
Engineering, (4th Edition), Willey Student edition, 06.
MT-12


marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
MT-13
M.Tech (Thermal Science and

Course Code 18TS1C02
Engineering)
Course title ADVANCED FLUID MECHANICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Basic of Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
1. Understand and apply the potential flow equations to basic flows.

2. Apply the concepts differential equations of fluid mechanics including the ability to apply
and understand the impact of assumptions made in the analysis.
3. Analyze the boundary layer concepts with respect to fluid flow
4. Evaluate the compressible flow, momentum and flow regime.
5. Analysing thermo-fluid systems, Mach number and expansion of compressible shocks.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Inviscid Flow Of Incompressible Fluids: Lagrangian and Eulerain Descriptions of fluid
motion- Path lines, Stream lines, Streak lines, stream tubes – velocity of a fluid particle, types
of flows, Equations of three dimensional continuity equation- Stream and Velocity potential
functions.
Basic Laws of fluid Flow: Condition for irrationality, circulation & vorticity Accelerations in
Cartesian systems normal and tangential accelerations, Euler‟s, Bernoulli equations in 3D–
Continuity and Momentum Equations. (6 hrs).
UNIT – II
Viscous Flow: Derivation of Navier- Stoke‟s Equations for viscous compressible flow – Exact
solutions to certain simple cases: Plain Poisoulle flow - Coutte flow with and without pressure
gradient - Hagen Poisoulle flow - Blasius solution. (6 hrs).
UNIT – III
Boundary Layer Concepts : Prandtl‟s contribution to real fluid flows – Prandtl‟s boundary
layer theory - Boundary layer thickness for flow over a flat plate – Approximate solutions –
Creeping motion (Stokes) – Oseen‟s approximation - Von-Karman momentum integral
equation for laminar boundary layer –– Expressions for local and mean drag coefficients for
different velocity profiles. (12hrs)
MT-14
UNIT – IV
Introduction to Turbulent Flow: Fundamental concept of turbulence – Time Averaged
Equations – Boundary Layer Equations - Prandtl Mixing Length Model - Universal Velocity
Distribution Law: Van Driest Model –Approximate solutions for drag coefficients – More
Refined Turbulence Models – k-epsilon model - boundary layer separation and form drag –
Karman Vortex Trail, Boundary layer control, lift on circular cylinders. Internal Flow: Smooth
and rough boundaries – Equations for Velocity Distribution and frictional Resistance in
smooth rough Pipes – Roughness of Commercial Pipes – Moody‟s diagram. (12 hrs).
UNIT – V
Compressible Fluid Flow – I: Thermodynamic basics – Equations of continuity, Momentum
and Energy - Acoustic Velocity Derivation of Equation for Mach Number – Flow Regimes –
Mach Angle – Mach Cone – Stagnation State
Compressible Fluid Flow – II: Area Variation, Property Relationships in terms of Mach
number, Nozzles, Diffusers – Fanno and Releigh Lines, Property Relations – Isothermal Flow
in Long Ducts – Normal Compressible Shock, Oblique Shock: Expansion and Compressible
Shocks – Supersonic Wave Drag. (12 hrs)
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES: Students shall able to.

1. Compare the concept of fluid and the models of fluids
2. Identify the basic physical meaning of general equations
3. Verify the concept of stream function and potential function
4. Validate to derive the equation for viscous flow, including laminar flow and turbulent flow
5. Validate the problems in engineering, and to analyse the various thermofluid system in
engineering
References:
1. Yuan, S. W., Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, Printice Hall, India.
2. S. M. Yahya, Compressible Fluid Flow, IIT, New Delhi.
3. A.H. Shapiro, The Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible flow, Ronald
Press.
4. Nijaguna, Thermal Science/Engineering data Hand Book, KREC
5. Fluid Mechanics – Jog – Cambridge
6. Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications – Finnemore & Franzini McGrawHill
7. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery – Khan – Oxford
8. Fluid Mechanics/Cohen and Kundu/Elsevier/5th edition
9. Fluid Mechanics/Potter/Cengage Learning
10. Fluid Mechanics/William S Janna/CRC Press
11. Fluid Mechanics and Machines/CP Kodandaraman/New Age Publications
12. A Text book of Fluid Mechanics/RK Rajput/S. Chand
13. Boundary Layer Theory/ Schlichting H /Springer Publications
14. Dynamics & Theory and Dynamics of Compressible Fluid Flow/ Shapiro.
15. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery/ D. Rama Durgaiah/New Age Publications
16. Fluid Dynamics/ William F. Hughes & John A. Brighton/TMH
17. Fluid Mechanics and Machines/Modi and Seth/Standard Book House
MT-15
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15

marks Two Quizzes = 05 marks
CIE – 50 Total:50
Unit VI (AAT) = 15 marks
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks
marks

marks
Mapping of Course Outcomes (COS) to program outcomes(POs)
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2
MT-16

Engineering)
Course title THERMODYNAMICS AND COMBUSTION ENGINEERING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Basic Thermodynamics
COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES: The course is intended to

1. Understand of correlations, concepts of laws and entropy for the important properties.
2. Applies the knowledge of thermodynamics for phase equilibrium and gaseous mixture.
3. Understand the predict the availability and irreversibility associated with the
thermodynamic processes.
4. Analyse the properties of ideal and real gas mixtures, Behaviour of pure substances
5. Understand and evaluate the basic concepts of combustion, flame propagation and types
of flames.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Work and heat interaction, first law of thermodynamics, steady and unsteady flows with
energy transaction. Second law of thermodynamics, reversibility, corollaries of the second law
and Entropy, Available energy, availability analysis of open and closed systems. (6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Properties of pure substances, properties of gases and gas mixtures, combined first and second
laws of thermodynamics. Phase and reaction equilibrium, equilibrium constants, calculation of
equilibrium composition of multi component gaseous mixtures. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Equation of state and calculation of thermodynamics and transport properties of substances.
Reaction rates and first, second and higher order reaction, in gaseous, liquid and solid phases.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Combustion and flame velocities, laminar and turbulent flames, premixed and diffusion
flames, their properties and structures. (6 hrs)
UNIT – V
Theories of flame propagation, thermal, diffusion and comprehensive theories, problems of
flame stability, flashback and blow off. Combustion of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
Combustion of fuel droplets and sprays. Combustion system combustion in closed and open
systems, application to boiler, gas turbine combustors and rocket motors. (12 hrs)
UNIT – VI
MT-17
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Student shall able to explain law of thermodynamics to thermal systems.
2. Compare and distinguish about the availability and irreversibility associated with the
thermodynamic processes,
3. Relate the ideal and real gas mixtures, behaviour of pure substances.
4. Compare the concepts of combustion, flame propagation and types of flames with previous
literature.
5. Differentiate the Combustion system in closed and open systems, boiler, gas turbine
combustors and rocket motors.
References:
1. “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach” by Yunus A Cengel, Michael A. Boles,
4th Edition.
2. “Engineering Thermodynamics” by P.K.Nag.
3. “Engineering Thermodynamics” by Zemanksy and Waness.
4. “Engineering Thermodynamics” by Huang
5. Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics - G. Van Wylen and R.E. Sonntag, Wiley,
1986.
6. Energy. Combustion and Environment - N.A. Chigier, McGraw-Hill, 1981.
7. Introduction to combustion phenomena - A. Murthy Kanury, Gordon and Breach, 1975.
8. Fuels and combustion - S.P. Sharma and Chandra Mohan, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1984.
9. Engineering Thermodynamics - Onkar Singh. New age International Publications.
CIE – 50 Two Quizzes = 05 marks Total:50
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks Unit VI (AAT) = 15 marks marks

 Questions Q1 & Q4 from Unit I and Unit IV
 Questions Q2, Q3 and Q5 from Unit II, Unit III
marks
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 3
CO4 2 3
CO5 2 3
MT-18

Course Code 18TS1E1A
Engineering)
Course title FINITE ELEMENT METHODS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Heat transfer and fluid mechanics
COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES: The course is intended to learn

1. Understand the finite element method for solving boundary value problems
2. Important concepts of variation form, minimum potential energy principles, and method of
weighted residuals.
3. Apply the concepts of one dimensional problems such as truss, beam, and frame members,
two-dimensional problems such as plain stress and plain strain elasticity problems,
torsion problem.
4. Analyse the finite element analysis of static and dynamic problems and heat transfer
problems.
5. Evaluate the basic laws in mechanics and integration by parts to develop element
equations.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Some Basic discrete thermal systems: Steady state problems- Heat flow in a composite slab,
fluid flow network, Heat sinks, heat exchangers, unsteady state problems. The Finite Element
Methods: a: Introduction – one dimensional linear and quadratic elements, triangular elements,
quadrilateral elements, ISO- parametric elements. Formulation – Method of weighted
residual, formulation for heat conduction equation using Variation and Galeriken methods,
requirements of interpolation methods. (12 hrs)
UNIT – II
Steady State Heat Conduction in One Dimension: Plane walls, with linear and quadratic
elements with and without heat sources Radial flow in a cylinder with and without heat
generation‟: Conduction- Convection Systems – Heat Sinks. Steady State Heat Conduction in
Multi Dimensions: Two-Dimensional plane problems with triangular and rectangular
elements. Plane with variable thickness, 3-D problems, axisymmetric problems using
linear triangular elements. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Transient heat conduction; one dimensional transient state problems. Extension to multi-
dimensional problems. Phase change problems. Stability. Introduction to inverse problems.
(6 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Convection Heat Transfer: Problems associated with convection-diffusion flow cases. N-S
equations, methods of solutions. Characteristic based split method. Porous media. Radiation
Heat Transfer: Introduction. Enclosure problems (12hrs)
MT-19
UNIT – V
Heat Exchangers: Solution of Double pipe heat exchanger and Shell and tube heat exchangers.
Temperature effects in Solids: Thermal strain and stresses in axial bars, trusses, beams and
two dimensional plane problems. Formulation using Virtual work principle. Simple examples.
(6 hrs)
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES: Students shall be able to,

1. Identify mathematical models for the complex analysis problems and predict the nature of
solution
2. Compare element characteristic matrices and vectors.
3. Determine boundary conditions and their incorporation in to the FE equations
4. Analyse problems with simple geometries, with hand calculations involving the
fundamental concepts
5. Validate the analysis results for the improvement or modification of the system.
References:
1. Fundamentals of the finite element method for heat and fluid flow - R.W. Lewis, P.
Nithiarasu and K. N. Seetharamu, , John Wiley and Sons, 2004.
2. The finite element method in heat transfer analysis - R.W. Lewis, K Morgan, H.R. Thomas,
K.N. Seetharamu, John Wiley and Sons, 1996.
3. The finite element method in heat transfer and fluid dynamics -J.N. Reddy and Gartling
D.K., CRC publications, 2000.
4. The finite element method volume 3: fluid dynamics - O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor,
John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
5. The finite element and for solid and structural mechanics - O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L.
Taylor, Elsevier Publishers, 2005.
6. Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering - Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla, Ashok D.
Belegundu, Prentice-Hall Ltd., 2002.
7. Finite Element Analysis - S.S. Bavikatti, New Age International, 2005
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

 Questions Q3 & Q5 from Unit III and Unit V
 Questions Q1, Q2 and Q4 from Unit I, Unit II
& Unit IV respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
marks
MT-20
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 3
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-21

Course Code 18TS1E1B
Engineering)
Course title ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Nil

1. Understand the realities behind energy conversion and its importance with exergy change.
2. Understand the objectives of energy Management and responsibilities of Energy managers.
3. Apply knowledge for energy auditing.
4 Evaluate the elements of Monitoring and targeting system and do the data analysis.
5. Investigate the thermal energy management in various thermal Devices.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Energy conservation methods, evaluation and measurement techniques, Calculation of missing
quantities, Electrical energy audit and management. (6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Energy conservation methods, evaluation and measurement techniques, Calculation of missing
quantities, Electrical energy audit and management. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Industrial energy auditing. Life Cycle costing, value engineering in energy management.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Waste heat recovery, cogeneration, Energy efficiency analysis, Energy conservation through
maintenance, Energy conservation in various applications. (12 hrs)
UNIT – V
: Energy management devices. Energy conservation policy issues. (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI
MT-22
COURSE OUTCOMES: Students shall able to.

1. Identify the elaborate realities about energy conservation and Exergy analysis.
2. Describe the rudimentary prerequisite of energy management.
3. Determine the various approach of various energy audits &tasks of Energy managers.
4. Compare the concepts of energy monitoring and targeting.
5. Validate the energy conservation realities in various heat transfer devices.
References:
1. “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Pergomon Press, 1977, by Ready D.A.
2. “Analysis and Design of Energy System”, Prentice Hall, 1998, by Hodge B.K.
3. “Report on Energy Management”, 1994 by Dr. S. Jayaraj
4. “Instrument Engineers Hand Book”, Chilton Book Company, 1982, by Liptak B.G.
Two Quizzes = 05 marks
marks
 Questions Q1 & Q 4 from Unit I and Unit V
 Questions Q2, Q3 and Q4 from Unit II Unit III
marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 3
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-23

Course Code 18TS1E1C
Engineering)
Course title DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION
No. of Hours/Week
Total hours = 48
Scheme and Credits L T P S Credits
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the conventional energy conversion techniques, solar energy, calibration
and standards
2. Direct energy conversion systems
3. Apply the knowledge of energy storage systems and their desirable characteristics &
Fuel cells
4. Analyse PV systems design, construction and applications
5. Evaluates hydrogen Energy conversion and storage techniques used and compares
with previous research work
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Energy Balance of the earth: The Greenhouse effect – Physical Source of sunlight – Planck‟s
black-body radiation distribution from different black body temperatures – The earth and
Solar Constant – Spectral distribution of extra-terrestrial radiation – Basic earth-sun angles –
Solar time and equation of time – attenuation of solar radiation by the atmosphere – Direct and
diffuse radiation at the ground – Empirical equations for predicting the availability of solar
radiation – Computation of radiation on inclined surfaces - Angstrom‟s turbidity, Solar charts
– Measurement of diffuse, global and direct solar radiation – Calibration and standardization –
Duration of Sun hours – Solar radiation data – Peak Sun hours – Standard terms and
definitions.
(6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Photovoltaics (PV): History, review of semiconductor physics and Operating principle –
Silicon as PV material - Direct and indirect band-gap material – Flow of Silicon material –
Single crystal Silicon Solar cell – Structure – Important electrical parameters – Ideal and
approximate equivalent circuits Manufacturing processes (wafer and cell) of single crystal,
multi-crystalline and Edge Defined Film Fed Growth Silicon - Temperature and Irradiation
effects – Energy Losses – Absorption coefficient and reflectance - Review of other PV
technologies – Silicon film, Cadmium telluride (cdTe), Copper Indium Gallium Diselenide,
amorphous silicon – Comparison of „Thin film‟ and „Bulk crystal‟ technology –
manufacturing (module making) processes of amorphous silicon on glass, stainless steel and
plastic substrates – Typical materials used - Concentrator technology and the importance of
tracking – Comparison of efficiencies of various technologies – Recent trends in technology
and manufacturing. (12hrs)
MT-24
UNIT – III
PV modules and arrays: Design requirements of PV modules – Rating of PV modules –
Standard Test Conditions (STC), Normal Operating Cell Temperature (NOCT) and Standard
Operating Conditions (SOC) – Output curves ( „Current Voltage‟ or „I-V‟ and „Power-
Voltage‟ or „P-V‟) under various irradiance and temperature conditions – Mounting structure
for PV modules/arrays – Orientation and array layout – Effects of shading - Other balance of
systems (BOS) and protective devices: blocking and bypass diodes, movistors – Roof mounted
arrays – Building integrated PV (BIPV) – Typical faults and diagnosis – Hot Spot problem in
a PV module and safe operating area - Performance measurement of typical parameters of
cells/modules under natural and simulated light – Indoor sun simulators - Outdoor PV array
testers – ASTM and IEEE standards for Class A and Class B simulators – Pulsed, steady state
and single flash types – Determination of temperature coefficients, series and shunt
resistances, curve correction factor - Computation of efficiency and fill factor – Translation of
parameters actually measured to STC – Reliability Testing: Qualification tests, IEC Standards
61215 & 61646 – Reliability test – Field stress testing (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
PV Systems: Stand alone and grid connected – Load estimation – Daily load demand – Solar
radiation/irradiance table for a particular location - Sizing of the PV array, battery, inverter
and other BOS – Maximizing efficiency of sub-systems – Balance of systems – Single axis
and two axis tracking at optimum inclination of the PV array – Power conditioning and control
Maximum Power Point Trackers, Charge controllers/regulators, DC/DC Converters, DC/AC
inverters – Alarms, indicators and monitoring equipment – Energy Storage: Batteries, Deep
cycle lead acid type, Battery Design and construction, Other types of batteries, Battery
Selection criteria, Safety issues – Typical applications of PV – Hybrid systems: PV-Wind,
PVDiesel engine, PV-Mains - System Sizing examples: Domestic loads, Water pumping,
Lighting (using CFLs, White LEDs) - hybrid systems, village power packs – Installation
practices – Trouble shooting – Economic analysis: Life Cycle Cost analysis – Environment
impacts of PV – Green buildings – Potential for GHG emission reduction of installed PV
systems. (12 hrs)
UNIT – V
The Hydrogen economy: Advantages of hydrogen as an energy carrier – Components of the
hydrogen economy - Generation of hydrogen - Transport and storage of hydrogen: physical
and chemical - Fuel Cells – Classification of fuel cells based on (a) Type of electrolyte (b)
Type of the fuel and oxidant (c) operating temperature (d) application and (e) chemical nature
of electrolyte (6hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Identify the Energy Conversion and Direct Energy Conversion systems
2. Explain the kind of Fuel Cells, Fuel Cell Efficiency, Thermionic Exchanger, Practical
Efficiency of Thermionic
3. Explain Thermoelectric Phenomena, Power Thermoelectric Exchanger, Application in
Cooling
MT-25
4. Validate Photovoltaic Phenomena, General Theory of Cell and Connection, Magneto

hydrodynamics: Hal Effects of Photovoltaic and experimental results
5. Solves the problems of Hydrogen production, storage and transportation
References:
1. Solar Electricity /Edited by Tomas Markvart/John Wiley and Sons
2. Solar Cells – Operating Principles, Technology and System Applications /Martin A.
Green/Prentice Hall Inc.
3. Modelling Photovoltaic Systems using P Spice/Luis Castaner and Santiago Silvestre/John
Wiley and Sons.
4. Solar Energy – Fundamentals and Applications/H.P. Garg and J. Prakash/Tata McGraw-
Hill.
5. Generating Electricity from the Sun/Edited by Fred C. Treble/Pergamon Press.
6. Amorphous Silicon Solar Cells/K.Takahashi and M.Konagai/North Oxford Academic.
7. Photovoltaic Systems Engineering/Roger Messenger/CRC Press.
8. Fuel Cells/Livin Oniciu/Abacus Press 1976
marks
marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MT-26

Engineering)
Course title ALTERNATE FUEL AND POLLUTION
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the various alternative fuels like CNG, LNG, Vegetable oils, Biogas etc.,
2. Understands the knowledge of various conditioning methods and characterstics of hybrid
fuel cells.
3. Applies the knowledge about conversion technology for C.I and S.I engine to run with
alternate fuels.
4. Analyse the behaviour of behaviour of C.I and S.I engine with alternate fuels.
5. Evaluates about Natural gas, LPG, hydrogen and bio gas.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Need for alternate fuel : Availability and properties of alternate fuels, general use of alcohols,
LPG, hydrogen, ammonia, CNG and LNG, vegetable oils and biogas, merits and demerits of
various alternate fuels, introduction to alternate energy sources. Like EV, hybrid, fuel cell and
solar cars. (6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Alcohols: Properties as engine fuel, alcohols and gasoline blends, performance in SI engine,
methanol and gasoline blends, combustion characteristics in CI engines, emission
characteristics, DME, DEE properties performance analysis, performance in SI & CI Engines.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Natural Gas, LPG, Hydrogen and Biogas: Availability of CNG, properties, modification
required to use in engines, performance and emission characteristics of CNG using LPG in SI
& CI engines, performance and emission of LPG. Hydrogen; storage and handling,
performance and safety aspects. (12hrs)
UNIT – IV
Technical Background of Diesel/Bio-diesel fuels-Oil feed stocks-Transesterification-Bio-
diesel production from Vegetable oils and waste cooking oil-High blend levels of bio-diesel-
Testing , Bio diesel- Oxidation stability-Performance in Engines, Properties of bio-fuels and
their importance in the context of IC Engines. Vegetable Oils: Various vegetable oils for
engines, esterification, performance in engines, performance and emission characteristics, bio
diesel and its characteristics (12 hrs)
MT-27
UNIT – V
Electric, Hybrid, Fuel Cell and Solar Cars: Layout of an electric vehicle, advantage and
limitations, specifications, system components, electronic control system, high energy and
power density batteries, hybrid vehicle, fuel cell vehicles, solar powered vehicles. (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI
Study on recent advances in Alternate fuels and pollution applications.

1. Identify the need of alternate fuels and list out some prospective alternate fuels
2. Categorize, interpret and understand the essential properties of fuels for petrol and diesel
engines
3. Evaluates the storage and dispensing facilities requirements
4. Evaluates the implement limitations with regard to performance, emission and materials
compatibility
5. Assess the possible harmful emissions and the legislation standards with existing
standards.
References:
1. Alternate Fuels - Dr. S. S. Thipse - Jaico Publications
2. Richard.L.Bechfold, Alternative Fuels Guide BooK, SAE International Warrendale
1997.
3. Maheswar Dayal, Energy Today & tomorrow, -1 & B Horishr India-1982.
4. Nagpal, Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 1991.
5. Alcohols as motor fuels progress in technology, Series No. 19 - SAE Publication USE -
1980.
6. SAE paper nos. 840367, 841333, 841334, 841156, Transactions, SAE, USA
7. Alternative Fuels Guidebook - Bechtold R.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

marks
MT-28
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MT-29
M.Tech (Thermal Science

and Engineering)
Category Program elective Semester : I
Course title EXERGY ANALYSIS OF THERMAL SYSTEMS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Total Max. Marks:
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Duration of SEE: 3Hrs
100
Prerequisites (if any): Basic Thermodynamics

1. Understands the Fundamental concepts on exergy and related work energy
2. Understands the Concepts about the ideal gases, phase equilibrium and equilibrium
reactions
3. Apply Exergy analysis for mass , energy balance equations and methods in thermal power
plants
4. Analyse the Exergy applied in various applications
5. Evaluate the energy approach to solve the problems of thermal power plants.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Concept of Exergy: Concept of exergy Available work Exergy loss, Reversibility and
irreversibility - exergy for control region physical exergy and chemical exergy closed system
analysis Exergy evaluation of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels tables and charts. ( 6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Thermodynamic Equilibrium: Combustion - Combustion reactions - Enthalpy of formation -
Entropy of formation - Reference levels for tables Heat of reaction Adiabatic flame
temperature - General product Enthalpies Equilibrium - Chemical equilibrium of ideal gases
Effects of Non-reacting gases Equilibrium in multiple reactions - The Von Hoff Equation -
The chemical potential and phase equilibrium The Gibbs Phase Rule. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Exergy Analysis - Methodology: Control mass analysis control region analysis pictorial
representation of exergy balance exergy based property diagrams thermodynamic feasibility of
new thermal plants applications of exergy method Exergy analysis of renewable energy
systems. (6 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Exergy Applied to Processes: Expansion process - compression process heat transfer processes
mixing and separation processes chemical process and combustion Linde air liquefaction plant
CHP plant GT-ST combined cycle plant refrigeration plant heat pump systems fuel cell
systems (12hrs)
MT-30
UNIT – V
Thermo economic Applications of Exergy: Structural coefficients exergy losses optimization
of component geometry thermo economic optimization of thermal systems thermo economic
optimization of heat exchanger in a CHP plant exergy costing in multi-product plant.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES: Students shall be able to

1. Describe the concepts on exergy and related work energy.
2. Evaluate the Design and analysis of energy systems with irreversibility concept.
3. Evaluate parametric evaluation of energy systems using second law of thermodynamics.
4. Compare the exergetic destruction in various components of plant.
5. Validate the concepts with the Practical Problems and appplications.
References:
1. Tadeusz Jozef Kotas (1995), The Exergy Method of Thermal Plant Analysis, Krieger
Pub.
2. John E. Ahern (1980), The Exergy Method of Energy Systems Analysis, A Wiley-Inter
science Publication.
3. rahim Din祲, Marc A. Rosen (2007), Exergy: Energy, Environment, and Sustainable
Development, Elsevier.
4. Adrian Bejan (1997), Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics, Wiley.
5. Adrian Bejan (1996), Entropy Generation Minimization: The Method of
Thermodynamic Optimization of Finite-Size Systems and Finite-Time Processes, CRC
Press.
6. J.P.Holman (1968), Thermodynamics, Mc.Graw Hill Publishers
7. Jan Szargut, David R. Morris, Frank R. Steward (1988), Exergy Analysis of Thermal,
Chemical, and Metallurgical Processes, Hemisphere Publishers.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

marks
MT-31
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 3
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MT-32

Engineering)
Course title FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Apply thorough understanding of performance characteristics of fuel cell power plant and
its components
2. Analyse the performance and design characteristics and operating issues for various fuel
cells
3. Analyse the design philosophy and challenges to make this power plant economically
feasible
4. Evaluates the various types of PV cells , their advantages and disadvantages
5. Evaluates the fuel cell technology with other technologies.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Hydrogen as a future energy carrier, Properties, Chemical production of hydrogen, steam
reforming of methanol, natural gas, coal gas etc, shift conversion and thermal decomposition,
purification (removal of CO and CO2), desulphurisation, Electrolytic hydrogen production,
Electrolyser configurations. (6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Compressed gas storage, Cryogenic liquid storage, Solid state Storage, Adsorption in
compounds and metal hydrides, hydride heat pumps and compressors. (6 hrs)
UNIT – III
Fundamentals of electrochemical energy conversion, Basic operation principles and Overview.
Advantages and applications, Fuel cell thermodynamics; open circuit voltage; efficiency. Heat
released, reasons for losses in voltage, Electrode kinetics, porous electrodes, characteristics,
fabrication of electrodes, assembly of fuel cells, testing, Classification of fuel cells based on
nature of electrolyte, operating temperature etc. (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Alkaline Fuel cells (AFC), Phosphoric Acid Fuel cells (PAFC), Polymer Electrolyte
Membrane Fuel cells (PEMFC), Direct Methanol Fuel cells (DMFC), Molten Carbonate Fuel
cells(DMFC), Solid Oxide Fuel cells (SOFC), Regenerative Fuel Cells (RFC), Specific
characteristics, advantages and applications. (12 hrs)
MT-33
UNIT – V
Fuel cell plants and sub systems, efficiency of systems, performance; emissions, Heat balance,
Environmental benefits. Heat rate of various Fuel Cell plants, Direct Fuel cells, Natural gas
and coal based Fuel cell power plant concepts, Cogeneration and CHP, Fuel cell Hybrids, Fuel
cell systems for portable, automotive, stationary applications, Future challenges. (12 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Understand the various methods of hydrogen generation and storage
2. Implement the knowledge of thermodynamics, electrochemistry, heat transfer and fluid
mechanics principles to design and analysis of this engineering technology.
3. Understanding of performance behaviour, operational issues and challenges for all major
types of fuel cells.
4. Relates the impact of this technology in global and societal context.
5. Validates the fuel cell components and systems with existing technology.
References:
1. Fuel Cell Handbook-7th Edition, US Department of Energy, (2004).
2. M. M. Mench, (2008) Fuel Cell Engines, Wiley, (ISBN: 978-0-471-68958-4)
3. X. Li, (2005) Principles of Fuel Cells, Taylor & Francis.
4. Gregor Hoogers, (2003), Fuel Cell Technology Handbook (FCTH), CRC Press,
Current Edition. ISBN # 0-8493-0877-1
5. N. Sammes, (2006),Fuel Cell Technology - Reaching Towards Commercialization by
ISBN-10: 1852339748-Springer.
6. S. Srinivasan, (2006), Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals and Applications, Springer.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

marks
MT-34
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 3
MT-35

Course Code 18TS1L01
Engineering)
Category Program laboratory Semester : I
Course title ADVANCED THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 2
Prerequisites (if any): Basic of Fluid Mechanics, Heat transfer, Thermodynamics

1. Understanding the basic concept and utilisation of heat for accomplishing useful Work.
2. Understanding the basic concept and working of refrigerator and IC engines.
3. Apply the basic principle of air conditioning system and it’s COP.
4. Analyse the basic working of solar water heater, cooling tower.
COURSE CONTENT
PART-A
1. Performance analysis of four stroke S.I. Engine- Determination of indicated and brake
thermal efficiency, specific fuel consumption at different loads, Energy Balance.
2. Performance analysis of four stroke C.I. Engine- Determination of indicated and brake
thermal efficiency, specific fuel consumption at different loads, Energy Balance.
3. Performance analysis of an alternate fuel on computerized IC Engine test rig.
4. Performance test and analysis of exhaust gases of an I.C. Engine.
PART-B
1. Calculation of thermal conductivity of metal rods.
2. Experiment on Pin fin Apparatus (free and force convection heat transfer).
3. COP calculation on air conditioning test rig apparatus.
4. COP calculation on simple vapour compression refrigeration test rig.
5. Dryness fraction estimation of steam
6. Performance analysis of Heat exchanger- Determination of effectives, temperature
distribution for various type of flows
1. Analyse the flue gas emission for SI and CI engine.

2. Understand the types of engine available and its working.
3. Analyse the performance and working of different types of air conditioning system.
4. Understand the practical working of renewable energy sources
MT-36
Continuous Internal Marks Semester End Evaluation Marks
Evaluation (Laboratoruy-50 (SEE) (Laboratory – 100
marks) marks)
the Laboratory every week
Test at the end of the semester 20 Experiment- 1 (Part-A)= 35 70
marks
Experiment- 1 (Part-A)= 35
marks

Total 100
Note:* SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be
reduced for 50 marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
MT-37
Course Code 18ME1M01 M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering)

Course title
RIGHTS
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 2

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
problems.
UNIT – II
Effective technical writing, How to write report, Paper, Developing a research proposal,
Format of research proposal, presentation and assessment by a review committee. 05 hrs
UNIT – III
05hrs
UNIT – IV
for grants of patents in India, Patent licensing and transfer of Technology, Patent information
and databases. International scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property,
Patenting under Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT). 05hrs
MT-38
UNIT-V
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
2. Analyse the various issues related to effective literature survey and developing a
research proposal.
rights.
1. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “research Methodology; an introduction for
science and engineering students”
3. Ranjit Kumar 2nd edition,” Research Methodology; a step by step guide for
Beginners”

20* 2 = 40
Marks
marks.
MT-39
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MT-40
Course Code 18TS1S01 M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering)

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

same effectively.
GUIDE LINES
assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Overcome inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the spirit of team
work.

MT-41

shall comprise of Chairperson of the Department, Faculty/Guide and one more faculty
member nominated by Chairperson of the Department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per
the rubrics given below:

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MT-42

No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1

readability.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
sentences, being concise and removing redundancy, avoiding ambiguity and vagueness.
05hrs
UNIT – II
Clarifying who did what, highlighting your findings, hedging and criticizing, Paraphrasing and
plagiarism, sections of paper, Abstracts, Introduction.
05hrs
UNIT – III
04hrs
UNIT – IV
Key skills needed when writing a title, Key skills needed when writing an Abstract, Key skills
needed when writing an Introduction, Skills needed when writing a review of the literature.
05hrs
UNIT – V
Key skills needed when writing the methods, Key skills needed when writing the Results,
Skills needed when writing a Discussion, Skills needed when writing the Conclusions.
05hrs
MT-43
COURSE OUTCOMES:

1. Goldbort (2006) writing for science, Yale University Press ( Available on Google
books)
3. Highman N (1998) Handbook of writing for the mathematical sciences,SIAM,
Highman’s book.

CIE – 50 Total:50
AAT = 20 marks
marks marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MT-44
SEMESTER II
Engineering)
Course title ADVANCED HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the physical behaviour of various modes of heat transfer like conduction,
Turbulent convective Heat Transfer, Phase change Heat Transfer and radiation
2. Understand the application of various experimental heat transfer correlations in
engineering calculations.
3. Analyse the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers.
4. Analyse the concepts of Radiation Heat Transfer.
5. Applies the concepts of Turbulent boundary layer and its importance in convection
phenomenon.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction: Three-dimensional heat conduction in Cartesian, cylindrical, spherical
coordinate system. Extended surface heat transfer with variable cross section.
Transient heat conduction: Lumped system analysis-Heisler charts-semi-infinite solid-use of
shape factors in conduction-2D transient heat conduction-product solutions.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – II
Finite Difference Methods for Conduction: ID & 2D steady state and simple transient heat
conduction problems-implicit and explicit methods.
Forced Convection: Equations of fluid flow-concepts of continuity, momentum equations-
derivation of energy equation-methods to determine heat transfer coefficient: Analytical
methods-dimensional analysis and concept of exact solution. Approximate method-integral
analysis. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
EXTERNAL FLOWS: Flow over a flat plate: integral method for laminar heat transfer
coefficient for different velocity and temperature profiles. Application of empirical relations to
variation geometries for laminar and turbulent flows
INTERNAL FLOWS: Fully developed flow: integral analysis for laminar heat transfer
coefficient-types of flow-constant wall temperature and constant heat flux boundary
conditions-hydrodynamic & thermal entry lengths; use of empirical correlations. (06 hrs)
MT-45
UNIT – IV
FREE CONVECTION: Approximate analysis on laminar free convective heat transfer-
boussinesque approximation-different geometries-combined free and forced convection.
BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Boiling curve-correlations-Nusselts theory of film
condensation on a vertical plate-assumptions & correlations of film condensation for different
geometries
(12 hrs)
UNIT – V
RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER: Radiant heat exchange in grey, non-grey bodies, with
transmitting. Reflecting and absorbing media, specular surfaces, gas radiation-radiation from
flames.
MASS TRANSFER: Concepts of mass transfer-diffusion & convective mass transfer
analogies-significance of non-dimensional numbers. (06 hrs)
UNIT – VI
Study on recent advances in heat and mass transfer applications.

1. Distinguish the difference between various modes of Heat Transfer.
2. Compare the Finite Difference Method and Finite Volume Method.
3. Compares the various correlations involve in Compact Heat Exchanger and Fins.
4. Determine the various correlations used in Convective Heat Transfer.
5. Design Heat Exchanger from the available literature/books.
References:
1. J.P. Holman, Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. Frank Kreith, Heat Transfer, International Text Book Co.
3. Necati Ozisik M., Heat Transfer: A Basic approach, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York.
4. Heat Transfer/ P.K.Nag /TMH
5. Heat Transfer – Gregory Nellis & Sanford Klein – Cambridge University Press
6. Convective Heat & Mass Transfer – Ghiaasiaan – Cambridge
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks
 Questions Q3 & Q 5from Unit III and Unit V
SEE – 100 respectively shall be answered and shall not 20* 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
 Questions Q1, Q2 and Q4 from Unit I, Unit II & Unit IV
respectively shall be answered and shall have internal choice
20*3= 60 Marks
marks
MT-46
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-47

Engineering)
Course title ADVANCED TURBO MACHINERY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Basic of Fluid Mechanics

1. Understand the fundamental concepts of turbo machines
2. Apply concepts of fluid mechanics in turbo machines.
3. Understand the thermodynamic analysis of steam nozzles and turbines.
4. Understand the different types of compressors and evaluating their performances in the
form of velocity triangles.
5. Familiarize the basic concepts of gas dynamics and analyse the performance of axial flow
gas turbines
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Fundamentals Of Turbo Machines: Dimensional analysis and performance parameters,
dimensional analysis, principles of similarity, In compressible and compressible flow of
machines, Performance parameters of turbine, fans and blowers, performance of compression.
Compressibility and whirl. (6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Steam Turbines: Convergent and Convergent-Divergent nozzles, Energy Balance, Effect of
back pressure of analysis. Designs of nozzles. Steam Turbines: Impulse turbines,
Compounding, Work done and Velocity triangle, Efficiencies, Constant reactions, Blading,
Design of blade passages, Angle and height, Secondary flow. Leakage losses,
Thermodynamic analysis of steam turbines. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Gas Dynamics: Fundamental thermodynamic concepts, isentropic conditions, Mach numbers
and area, Velocity relations, Dynamic Pressure, Normal shock relation for perfect gas.
Supersonic flow, oblique shock waves. Normal shock recoveries, detached shocks, Aerofoil
theory. Centrifugal compressor: Types, Velocity triangles and efficiencies, Blade passage
design, Diffuser and pressure recovery. Slip factor, Stanitz and Stodolas formula's, Effect of
inlet Mach numbers, Pre whirl, Performance. (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS: Flow Analysis, Work and velocity triangles, Efficiencies,
Thermodynamic analysis. Stage pressure rise, Degree of reaction, Stage Loading, General
design, Effect of velocity, Incidence, Performance.
Cascade Analysis: Geometrical and terminology. Blade force, Efficiencies, Losses, Free end
force, Vortex Blades. (6 hrs)
UNIT – V
AXIAL FLOW GAS TURBINES: Work done. Velocity triangle and efficiencies,
Thermodynamic flow analysis, Degree of reaction, Zweifels relation, Design cascade analysis,
Soderberg, Hawthorne, Ainsley, Correlations, Secondary flow, Free vortex blade, Blade
MT-48
angles for variable degree of reaction. Actuator disc, Theory, Stress in blades, Blade
assembling, Material and cooling of blades, Performances, Matching of compressors and
turbines, off design performance. (12 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Design and analyse the performance of Turbo machines for engineering applications
2. Applies the energy transfer process in Turbo machines and governing equations of various
forms.
3. Understand and applies the structural and functional aspects of major components of
Turbo machines.
4. Design various Turbo machines for power plant and aircraft applications using
literature/books
5. Apply the design principles of the turbo machines ,Analyse the turbo machines to improve
and optimize their performance
References:
1 Principles of Turbo Machines/DG Shepherd / Macmillan
2 Fundamentals of Turbomachinery/William W Perg/John Wiley & Sons
3 Element of Gas Dynamics/Yahya/TMH
4 Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbine/NJ Zucrow/John Wiley & Sons/Newyork
5 Turbines, Pumps, Compressors/Yahya/TMH
6 Practice on Turbo Machines/ G.Gopal Krishnan & D. Prithviraj/ Sci Tech Publishers,
Chennai
7 Theory and practice of Steam Turbines/ WJ Kearton/ELBS Pitman/London
8 Gas Turbines Theory and Practice/Zucrow/John Wiley & Sons/Newyork
9 Element of Gas Dynamics/Liepeman and Roshkow/ Dover Publications
10 Elements of Gas Turbine Propulsion /Jack D. Mattingly
11 Turbines, Compressors and Fans/S M Yahya /MGH

CIE – 50 Total:50
marks
 Questions Q1 & Q 4 from Unit I and Unit IV
20* 2 = 40
respectively shall be answered and shall not
SEE – 100 Marks Total:100
have internal choice.
marks marks
III & Unit V respectively shall be answered 20*3= 60 Marks
marks
MT-49
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-50

Engineering)
Course title COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand about different governing equation and boundary condition
2. Understands the various discretisation techniques and solving solution methodologies.
3. Applies the Navier-stroke equation for different flow field.
4. Analyse the requirement of the different turbulence model for solving the Reynolds Average
Navier-stroke equation
5. Evaluate the different grid generation methods
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction to Numerical Methods - Finite Difference, Finite Element and Finite Volume
Methods – Classification of Partial Differential Equations – Solution of Linear Algebraic
Equations – Direct and Iterative Approaches. Finite difference methods: Taylor‟s series – FDE
formulation for 1D and 2D steady state heat transfer problems – Cartesian, cylindrical and
spherical co-ordinate systems – boundary conditions – Un steady state heat conduction –
Errors associated with FDE - Explicit Method – Stability criteria – Implicit Method – Crank
Nickolson method – 2-D FDE formulation – ADI – ADE. (12 hrs)
UNIT – II
Finite Volume Method: Formation of Basic rules for control volume approach using 1Dsteady
heat conduction equation – Interface Thermal Conductivity - Extension of General Nodal
Equation to 2D and 3D Steady heat conduction and unsteady heat conduction. (6 hrs)
UNIT – III
FVM to Convection and Diffusion: Concept of Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic Equations
applied to fluid flow – Governing Equations of Flow and Heat transfer – Steady 1D
Convection Diffusion – Discretization Schemes and their assessment – Treatment of Boundary
Conditions. (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Calculation of Flow Field: Vorticity & Stream Function Method - Staggered Grid as Remedy
for representation of Flow Field - Pressure and Velocity Corrections – Pressure Velocity
Coupling - SIMPLE & SIMPLER (revised algorithm) Algorithm. (12 hrs)
UNIT – V
Turbulent Flows: Direct Numerical Simulation, Large Eddy Simulation and RANS Models.
Compressible Flows: Introduction - Pressure, Velocity and Density (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI
MT-51

1. Identify the different governing equation like continuity, momentum and Energy
equation
2. Distinguish discretisation equation using finite difference method and finite
volume methods, Numerical error associated with first order and second order.
3. Analyse Reynolds average Navier stroke equation
4. Fix the closure problem associated with
5. Formulate Reynolds average Navier stroke equation using different turbulence model.
References:
1. S.V.Patankar, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, McGraw-Hill. T. J. Chung,
2. Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press.
3. H.K.Versteeg & W. Malalasekera,An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics,
Longman Scientific & Technical.
4. J. H. Ferziger and M.Peric, Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics,Springer.
5. John C. Tannehill, Dale A.Anderson and Richard H. Pletcher, Computational Fluid
Mechanics and Heat Transfer, Taylor &Francis.
6. John D.Anderson Jr, Computational Fluid Dynamics, McGraw Hill Book Company.
7. J.Blazek, Computational Fluid Dynamics:Principles and Applications,Elsevier.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

 Questions Q2 & Q 5 from Unit II and Unit V
 Questions Q1, Q3 and Q4 from Unit I, Unit
III & Unit IV respectively shall be answered 20*3= 60 Marks
marks
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-52

Engineering)
Course title REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Thermodynamics and basics of refrigeration

1. Understands about Refrigeration cycles and refrigeration principles
2. Understand the Various Components: its working and design of refrigeration system
3. Apply the system balancing and Controls involved in Refrigeration units
4. Analyse the unconventional refrigeration cycles with conventional refrigeration
system.
5. Evaluate the air conditioning system.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Vapour Compression Refrigeration: Performance of Complete vapour compression system.
Components of Vapor Compression System: The condensing unit – Evaporators – Expansion
valve – Refrigerants – Properties – ODP & GWP - Load balancing of vapour compression
Unit. Compound Compression: Flash inter-cooling – flash chamber – Multi-evaporator &
Multistage systems. (12hrs)
UNIT – II
Liquefaction system; Cascade System – Applications. Dry ice system. Vapor absorption
system – Simple and modified aqua – ammonia system – Representation on Enthalpy –
Concentration diagram. Lithium – Bromide system Three fluid system – HCOP.
(06 hrs)
UNIT – III
Applications – Air Craft Refrigeration -Simple, Bootstrap, Regenerative and Reduced ambient
systems – Problems based on different systems. Steam Jet refrigeration system:
Representation on T-s and h-s diagrams – limitations and applications. Unconventional
Refrigeration system – Thermo-electric – Vortex tube & Pulse tube – working principles.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
AIR –CONDITIONING: Psychometric properties and processes – Construction of
Psychometric chart. Requirements of Comfort Air –conditioning – Thermodynamics of human
body – Effective temperature and Comfort chart – Parameters influencing the Effective
Temperature. Summer, winter and year round air – conditioning systems.
Cooling load Estimation: Occupants, equipment, infiltration, duet heat gain fan load, Fresh air
load. (12 hrs)
MT-53
UNIT – V
AIR –CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: All Fresh air , Re-circulated air with and without bypass,
with reheat systems – Calculation of Bypass Factor, ADP,RSHF, ESHF and GSHF for
different systems. Components: Humidification and dehumidification equipment – Systems of
Air cleaning – Grills and diffusers – Fans and blowers – Measurement and control of
Temperature and Humidity. (06 hrs)
UNIT – VI
Study on recent advances in Finite Element Methods applications.
COURSE OUT COMES: students shall be able to.

1. Describe the various types of refrigeration systems and Psychrometric processes.
2. Discuss the classification of refrigerants and its properties
3. Compare about different controls relays and motors employee in refrigeration.
4. Analyse the Air-Conditioning equipment and their applications.
5. Validate the experimental result with theoretical results.
References:
1. Basic Refrigeration & Air Conditioning – P.N. Ananthanarayanan – McGraw Hill
2. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – Dr. S.S. Thipse - Jaico
3. Principles of Refrigeration/Dossat /Pearson
4. Refrigeration & Air Conditioning /Arora & Domkundwar/ Dhanpat Rai
5. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning /Manohar Prasad/
6. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning /Stoecker /Mc Graw Hill
7. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning /Jordan& Preister /Prentice Hall
8. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning/Dossat /Mc Graw Hill.

CIE – 50 Total:50
marks
 Questions Q2 & Q5 from Unit II and Unit V
20* 2 = 40
respectively shall be answered and shall not
SEE – 100 Marks Total:100
have internal choice.
marks marks
 Questions Q1, Q3 and Q4 from Unit I, Unit
marks
MT-54
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2 3
CO5 3
MT-55

Engineering)
Course title COMPUTER SIMULATION OF S.I AND C.I ENGINES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): SI and CI engine introduction

1. Understand the C/H/N/O system, flame temperature, the different types of reaction
occurring in an engine, while combustion.
2. Understand the simulation in an SI engine with fuel air as working medium.
3. Apply the pressure is being getting developed in an engines and validated computer
code with experimental data base.
4. Analyse the simulation of a 2-stroke engines and computation of parameters.
5. Analysis of CI engine with fuel air as working medium, heat transfer and cooling in C.I
engines.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Computer Simulation and Thermodynamics of Combustion: Introduction, Heat of
reaction, complete combustion in C/H/O/N Systems, Constant volume adiabatic combustion,
constant pressure adiabatic combustion. Calculation of adiabatic flame temperature. (12 hrs)
UNIT – II
SI Engine Simulation With Fuel-Air as Working Medium: Deviation between actual and air
standard cycles of operation- problems, SI engine simulation with adiabatic constant volume
combustion with fuel and air being considered, calculation of temperature drop due to fuel
vaporization, calculation of mean effective pressure, torque and thermal efficiency at full
throttle, part throttle and supercharged conditions. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Actual Cycle Simulation in SI Engines: Progressive combustion; gas exchange process, heat
transfer process, friction. Procedure of validating computer code with experimental data based
on performance parameters and pressure crank angle diagram. (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Simulation of 2-Stroke SI Engine: Simulation of the process, determination of the pressure-
crank angle variation, computation of performance parameters. (06 hrs)
UNIT – V
Diesel Engine Simulation: Main difference between SI and CI engine simulation, differences
between ideal and actual cycles, mathematical combustion model for diesel engine, heat
transfer and gas exchange processes. (06 hrs)
UNIT – VI
Study on recent advances in Computer simulations of S.I and C.I Engines applications.
MT-56
COURSE OUT COMES: students shall be able to apply:

1. Categorise and apply concept of thermodynamic reactions pertaining to combustion of
fuels.
2. Differentiate and design of theoretical working cycle of SI engine with mathematical
formulations
3. Understand Procedure of validating computer code with experimental data based on
performance parameters and pressure crank angle diagram
4. Evaluate the Procedure of Simulation of 2-Stroke SI Engine
5. Formulate Procedure of Diesel Engine Simulation: Main difference between SI and CI
engine simulation
References:
1. Ganesan, V. - Computer Simulation of Spark Ignition Engine Process, Universities Press
(I) Ltd, Hyderabad - 1996.
2. Ganesan. V., Computer Simulation of Compression Ignition Engine Process, Universities
Press (I) Ltd, Hyderabad - 2000.
3. Ashley Campbel , Thermodynamic Analysis of Combustion Engine - John Wiley and Sons,
New York - 1986.
4. Benson.R.S., Whitehouse. N.D., - Internal Combustion Engines- Pergamon Press, oxford -
1979.
5. Ramoss.A.L., Modelling of Internal Combusion Engines Processes- McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co., -1992
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 marks Two Quizzes = 05 marks

CIE – 50 Total:50
marks marks

 Questions Q4 & Q5 from Unit IV and Unit V
& Unit III respectively shall be answered and 20*3= 60 Marks
marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 3
MT-57

Engineering)
Course title THERMAL AND NUCLEAR POWER PLANT
No. of Hours/Week
Scheme and Credits L T P Credits Total hours = 48
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand about resources of energies available in India for Power Production by
Thermal and Nuclear Processes.
2. Understand and know the requirements for a Thermal Power Plant and Nuclear
Power Plant, from sources to consumption and economics of power plants.
3. Applies the processes and cycles followed in Thermal Power Plants and nuclear power
plants and components used in the power plants
4. Analyse the steam power plants, steam generators and gas turbine power plants, their
analyses on fuel and fluidized bed combustion, ash handling systems, Learn the
practices followed in Thermal Power Plant and Nuclear Power Plants, to better
environmental conditions and the safety measures.
5. Evaluate the Power Load calculation, distribution and optimum loading. Etc., Know
various methods for the Economies of Power Generation and power plant
instrumentation
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction: Sources of energy, Type of Power plants. Direct energy conversion system,
Energy sources in India, Recent developments in power generation, Combustion of coal,
Volumetric analysis, Gravimetric analysis. Fuel gas analysis. Steam power plant: Introduction.
General layout of steam power plant, Modern coal. Fired Steam, Steam power plant. Power
plant cycle, Fuel Handling, Combustion equipment, Ash handling, Dust collectors. Steam
Generators: Types, Accessories. Feed water heaters, Performance of boiling, Water treatment,
Cooling towers. Steam turbines. Compounding of turbines, Steam condensers, Jet and surface
condensers. (12 hrs)
UNIT – II
Gas Turbine Power Plant: Cogeneration. Combined cycle power plant, Analysis, Waste heat
recovery, IGCC power plant, Fluidized bed, Combustion, Advantages, and Disadvantages.
(12hrs)
UNIT – III
Nuclear Power Plant: Nuclear physics, Nuclear Reactor, Classification, Types of reactors, Site
selection. Method of enriching uranium. Application of nuclear power plant. Nuclear Power
Plant Safety: Bi-Product of nuclear power generation, Economics of nuclear power plant,
Nuclear power plant in India, Future of nuclear power. (12 hrs)
MT-58
UNIT – IV
Economics Of Power Generation: Factors affecting the economics, Loading factors,
Utilization factor, Performance and operating characteristics of power plant, Point economic
load sharing, Depreciation. Energy rate, Criteria for optimum loading. Specific economic
energy problem. (6 hrs)
UNIT – V
Power Plant Instrumentations: Classification, Pressure measuring instrument, Temperature
measurement and Flow Measurement, Analysis of combustion gases, Pollution types, Methods
of control. (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Identifies how fission is accomplished and the basics of how a nuclear reactor produces
energy
2. Discuss the thermal cycle and describe heat transfer and fluid flow
3. Identify the major components of a nuclear power plant including generators, turbines,
and cooling systems
4. Examine nuclear power plant safety systems and the concepts of redundancy and defence-
in-depth
5. Describe the requirements associated with a refuel outage and nuclear fuel reload.
References:
1. Power Plant Engineering / P.K.Nag / TMH
2. Power Plant Engineering / R.K.Rajput/ Lakshmi Publications.
3. Power Plant Engineering / P.C.Sharma/ Kotearia Publications.
4. Power Plant Technology / Wakil.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks
 Questions Q4 & Q 5 from Unit IV and Unit V
internal choice.
marks marks
marks
MT-59

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 3
MT-60

Engineering)
Course title GAS DYNAMICS AND PROPULSION
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understands the fundamentals of various flows and nozzles.
2. Applies the terminologies associated with Shocks formation.
3. Understands the basic principles of Jet engines
4. Understands the basic principles of Rocket propulsion.
5. Applies the knowledge with present type Propellants, combustion chamber, rockets and
propulsion.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Review of Fundamentals: Concepts from fluid mechanics and thermodynamics, conservation
equations, stagnation conditions, wave propagation, subsonic and supersonic flows. Isentropic
Flow nozzles and diffusers. Flow in constant area duct with friction and heat transfer.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – II
Shock waves: Normal and Oblique shocks. Prandtl-Meyer expansion moving shocks-shock
tubes method of characteristics. (6 hrs)
UNIT – III
Air Breathing Engines: Turbojet, turbofan and ram jet engines, thrust equation, performance
and fuel consumption. Engine air intakes-subsonic and supersonic. (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Rocket propulsion: General principles, thrust equation, Acceleration and burning time
multistage rockets. Chemical rockets-characteristics and analysis. (12 hrs)
UNIT – V
Propellants-liquid and solid. Combustion chamber, nuclear rockets and electric propulsion.
(6 hrs)
UNIT – VI
MT-61

1. Understand physical and mathematical aspects of various flows and nozzles.
2. Apply theoretical and mathematical principles to Shock waves.
3. List and identify Principles of Jet engines.
4. Explain and compare Principles of rocket propulsion.
5. Discuss the types and requirements of different propellants.
References:
1. “Elements of Gas Dynamics” by Liepmann and Roshko.
2. “Gas Dynamics” by E.Rathakrishnan.
3. “Mechanics and Thermodynamics of propulsion” by Hill and Peterson.
4. “Fundamentals of compressible flows” by Yahya.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

 Questions Q2 & Q5 from Unit II and Unit V
 Questions Q1, Q3 and Q4 from Unit I, Unit III
marks

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 3
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-62

Engineering)
Course title CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understands the concept of cryogenics and applications in various fields.
2. Analyse various cycles of cryogenics.
3. Applies the cryogenic refrigerators for different applications.
4. Understand and apply the handling and instrumentation of cryogenic fluids.
5. Evaluate the different cryogenic refrigeration system.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction To Cryogenic Systems: Mechanical Properties at low temperatures. Properties of
Cryogenic Fluids. Gas Liquefaction: Minimum work for liquefaction. Methods to protect low
temperature. Liquefaction systems for gages other than Neon. Hydrogen and Helium.
(12 hrs)
UNIT II
Liquefaction Systems for Neon, Hydrogen and Helium: Components of Liquefaction systems.
Heat exchangers. Compressors and expanders. Expansion valve, Losses in real machines
(12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Gas Separation And Purification Systems: Properties of mixtures, Principles of mixtures,
Principles of gas separation, Air separation systems. (6 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Cryogenic Refrigeration Systems: Working Medium, Solids, Liquids, Gases, Cryogenic fluid
storage & transfer, Cryogenic storage systems, Insulation, Fluid transfer mechanisms,
Cryostat, Cryo Cooler.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – V
Applications: Space technology, In-Flight air separation and collection of LOX, Gas industry,
Biology, Medicine, Electronics. (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI
MT-63

1. Understand the proper cryogenic fluid for particular application like
cryometallurgy, medical applications.
2. Understand proper liquefaction cycle.
3. Compare proper cryogenic refrigerator and cooler for particular application.
4. Evaluate the way to handle cryogenic fluid and right instrumentation to measure
the properties of cryogenic fluid.
5. Evaluate different type of Cryogenic conditions used in medical, electronics, gas
industries etc.,
References:
1. Cryogenic Systems/ R.F.Barren/ Oxford University Press
2. Cryogenic Research and Applications: Marshal Sitting/ Von Nostrand/ Inc. New
Jersey
3. Cryogenic Heat Transfer/ R.F.Baron
4. Cryogenic Engineering Edit / B.A. Hands/ Academic Press, 1986
5. Cryogenic Engineering/ R.B.Scottm Vin Nostrand/ Inc. New Jersey, 1959
6. Experimental Techniques in Low Temperature Physics- O.K. White, Oxford Press,
1968
7. Cryogenic Process Engineering/ K.D. Timmerhaus & TM Flynn/ Plenum Press,
1998
8. Hand Book of Cryogenic Engineering – J.G.Weisend –II, Taylor and Francis,
1998.
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

 Questions Q3 & Q 5 from Unit III and Unit V
marks

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 3
CO4 2
CO5 3
MT-64

Engineering)
Course title NANO FLUIDS
No. of Hours/Week
Scheme and
L T P S Credits Total hours = 48
Credits
4 0 0 0 4
Total Max. Marks:
CIE Marks: 50 SEE Marks: 50 Duration of SEE: 3Hrs
100

1. Understanding of superior thermo physical properties of Nano fluids
2. Understanding of synthesis of Nano fluids
3. Analyse the heat transfer using Nano fluids with conventional fluids
4. Understanding of convection and boiling heat transfer
5. Analyse the modern mini and micro channel heat exchangers with Nano fluids exhibiting
much higher thermal efficiency and saving energy.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction to Nanofluids, nanostructure materials, base fluids, dispersion, sonication and
stable suspension. Various types of Nanofluids-volumetric concentration. Thermophysical
properties: Density; principles of measurement and apparatus. Theoretical equations and new
empirical correlations to determine the density of different Nanofluids. Viscosity: principles of
measurement and apparatus. Andrade‟s and other theoretical equations and new empirical
correlations to determine the viscosity of different Nanofluids. Effect of volumetric
concentration and temperature. Effect of sub-zero temperature on Nanofluids viscosity.
(12 hrs)
UNIT – II
Thermal conductivity: principles of measurement and apparatus. Hamilton-Crosser and other
theoretical equations and new empirical correlations to determine the thermal conductivity of
different Nanofluids. Effect of volumetric concentration and temperature. Effect of Brownian
motion on enhancing the thermal conductivity. Specific heat: principles of measurement and
apparatus. Buongeorno‟s thermal equilibrium equation and other theoretical equations and
new empirical correlations to determine the specific heat of different Nano fluids. Effect of
volumetric concentration and temperature. (12hrs)
UNIT – III
Combined effects of thermo physical properties of Nano fluids on the thermal diffusivity, the
Prandtl number, the Reynolds number and the Nusselt number. Basic understanding of their
effects on frictional loss and Heat transfer. Convective heat transfer: Single-phase fluid
equations, laminar flow, entry length and fully developed friction factor and heat transfer
coefficient. Graetz number effect in the entry region. Correlations for friction factor and
Nusselt number for nanofluids. Turbulent flow: Single phase fluid fully developed flow
Dittus-Boelter and Glienilski equations. Blasius and other turbulent friction factor
correlations. Their comparison with Nanofluids data. New correlations for turbulent friction
factor and Nusselt number for nanofluids. (12 hrs)
MT-65
UNIT – IV
Principles of measurement and apparatus for the Nano fluid convective heat transfer
coefficient. Recent empirical relations for convection coefficient of various types of Nano
fluids. Effect of particle Peclet number. Effect of volumetric concentration. Application of
Nano fluids to various types of industrial heat exchangers. Heating capacity, mass flow, heat
exchanger surface area, LMTD and pumping power for Nano fluids versus conventional heat
transfer fluids. (6 hrs)
UNIT – V
Application to building heating and cooling Comparison of Nano fluids performance with
glycol solution in hydronic coils. Application to automobile radiators. Comparison of the
performance of Nano fluids under arctic and sub-arctic temperatures with glycol solutions.
Introduction to electronic cooling in micro channel with Nano fluids. (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Identify physical aspects of Nano fluids and different types of Nano Fluids.
2. Categorise the application of nanotechnology in the area of fluids and thermal
engineering.
3. Apply theoretical and mathematical principles to understand the difference
between conventional and Nano fluids.
4. Distinguish the convection and boiling heat transfer.
5. Design modern mini and micro channel heat exchangers with Nano fluids.
References:
1. Micro scale and Nano scale Heat Transfer by C. Sobhan and G. Peterson, First
edition, CRC Press
2. Fluid Mechanics by F. M. White, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill
3. Heat Transfer by A. Bejan 2nd Edition, John Wiley
4. Handbook of Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology Vol. I and II -
H.S.Nalwa, I edition, American Scientific Publishers
5. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhushan, 1st edition, Springer-
Verlag Publication
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks marks

 Questions Q4 & Q5 from Unit IV and Unit V
internal choice.
marks marks
marks
MT-66
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 3
MT-67

Course Code 18TS2L01
Engineering)
Category Program laboratory Semester : II
Course title Computational methods Laboratory
No. of Hours/Week
Total hours = 48
Scheme and Credits L T P S Credits
0 0 4 0 2

1. Understand the simulation of various thermal components using latest simulation
softwares.
2. Understands the working knowledge on MATLAB or C ++ and analysis tool such as
ANSYS
COURSE CONTENT
Part A
1. Steady State Conduction in Solid
2. Steady State Convection in Solid
3. Steady State Radiation in Solid
4. Combined conduction and convection
5. Unsteady state conduction and convection
6. Unsteady state conduction and radiation
Part B
1. Steady state conduction in Fluids
2. Steady state convection in Fluids
3. Two-phase flows
4. Condensation and boiling heat transfer
5. Solar Radiation Model
6. Energy system simulations and Aero dynamical model studies using wind tunne
COURSE OUTCOMES: Students shall able to.

1. The students can program any mathematical model using MATLAB or C ++ or
other simulation softwares
2. Analyse the different programme written using MAT Lab or C++ for different
convection, conduction and radiation problems.
MT-68
Continuous Internal Marks Semester End Evaluation Marks
Evaluation (Laboratoruy-50 (SEE) (Laboratory – 100
marks) marks)
the Laboratory every week
Test at the end of the semester 20 Experiment- 1 (Part-A)= 35 70
marks
Experiment- 1 (Part-A)= 35
marks
Total 100
Note:* SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be
reduced for 50 marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
MT-69

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

2 Prepare a technical report, reflecting his/her depth of understanding, on the
selected area/topic and prepare content rich presentation.
GUIDE LINES
2 Topic may be of general/ specific interest to program of engineering or electives
not offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the faculty/Guide
assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
allocated. Overcome inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the
spirit of team work.
MT-70



PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MT-71

No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT –I
05hrs
UNIT –II
04hrs
UNIT –III
 Teacher‟s attitudes and beliefs and pedagogic strategies.
05hrs
MT-72
UNIT –IV
 Peer support
05hrs
UNIT –V
 Research design
 Contexts
 Pedagogy
 Dissemination and research impact.
05hrs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
and learning.

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools,
Compare, 31 (2): 245-261.
2. Agrawal M (2004) Curriculum reform in school: The importance of evaluation,
Journal of Curriculum Studies, 36(3): 361-379.
6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, „learning to read‟ campaign.
MT-73

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1
CO2 1
CO3 1 1 1
MT-74
SEMESTER III
M.Tech (Thermal Science
and Engineering)
Course title ADVANCED IC ENGINES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Analyse engine cycles and the factors responsible for making the cycle different from the
Ideal cycle.
2. Apply principles of thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and heat transfer to influence the
engine’s performance
3. Understand the delay period and fuel injection system
4. Become aware of the relevance of environmental and social issues on the design process
of internal combustion engines
5. To understand formation of pollutants and their control in IC engines
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction – Historical Review – Engine Types – Design and operating Parameters. Cycle
Analysis: Thermo-chemistry of Fuel – Air mixtures, properties – Ideal Models of Engine
cycles – Real Engine cycles - differences and Factors responsible for – Computer Modelling.
(6 hrs)
UNIT – II
ENGINE COMBUSTION IN S.I ENGINES: Combustion and Speed – Cyclic Variations –
Ignition – Abnormal combustion Fuel factors, MPFI, SI engine testing. Combustion in CI
engines: Essential Features – Types off Cycle. Pr. Data – Fuel Spray Behaviour – Ignition
Delay – Mixing Formation and control, Common rail fuel injection system. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Design of engine components, Piston connecting rod, Crank case, Crank shaft, Manifolds,
Valves, Design of cooling systems, Lubricating oil system and radiator fans, Computer aided
design of engine components, Engine balancing, Recent advances. Modern Trends in IC
Engines: Lean Burning and Adiabatic concepts, Rotary Engines, Modification in I.C engines
to suit Bio – fuels, HCCI and GDI concepts. (12 hrs)
UNIT – IV
Gas Exchange Processes: Volumetric Efficiency – Flow through ports – Supercharging and
Turbo charging.
Charge Motion: Mean velocity and Turbulent characteristics – Swirl, Squish – Pre-chamber
Engine flows. (12 hrs)
MT-75
UNIT – V
Pollutant Formation And Control: Nature and extent of problems – Nitrogen Oxides, Carbon
monoxide, unburnt Hydrocarbon and particulate – Emissions – Measurement – Exhaust Gas
Treatment, Catalytic converter, SCR, Particulate Traps, Lean, NOx, Catalysts.
(6 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Apply thermodynamic analysis to IC engines and describe combustion phenomena in
spark ignition and compression ignition engines.
2. Describe the working of major systems used in conventional and modern engines.
3. Summarize the methods used to improve engine performance and estimate performance
parameters.
4. Describe engine emission control techniques and implement viable alternate fuels
5. Learn the causes and measurement of various pollutants emitted by IC engines
References:
1. I.C. Engines / V.Ganesan/TMH
2. I.C. Engines/G.K. Pathak & DK Chevan/ Standerd Publications
3. I.C. Engines Fundamentals/Heywood/TMH
4. Dual-Fuel Diesel Engines – Ghazi A. Karim – CRC Press
5. I.C. Engines /RK Rajput/Laxmi Publications
6. Internal Combustion Engines – S.S. Thipse - Jaico
7. Computer Simulation of C.I. Engine Process/ V.Ganesan/University Press
8. Fundamentals of IC Engines/HN Gupta/PHI/2nd edition
9. I.C. Engines/Fergnson/Wiley
10. 10. The I.C. Engine in theory and Practice Vol.I / Teylor / IT Prof. And Vol.II
11. Computer Simulation of Spark-Ignition Engine Processes – V. Ganesan – Universities
Press
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

marks
MT-76

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 3
MT-77

Engineering)
Course title CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Basics of Heat Transfer.

1. Gain a fundamental understanding of the convective heat transfer.
2. Understands the concepts of Natural and forced convection both Internal and External
flow.
3. Apply the combined convection, Understand the Boundary layer concept,
4. Apply the – Fully developed mixed convective flow in a vertical plane channel & in a
horizontal duct.
5. Applies the recent advances in convective heat transfer.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Introduction to Forced, free & combined convection – convective heat transfer coefficient –
Application of dimensional analysis to convection – Physical interpretation of dimensionless
numbers. Equations of Convective Heat Transfer: Continuity, Navier-Strokes equation &
energy equation for steady state flows – similarity – Equations for turbulent convective heat
transfer – Boundary layer equations for laminar, turbulent flows – Boundary layer integral
equations. (12 hrs)
UNIT – II
External Laminar Forced Convection: Similarity solution for flow over an isothermal plate –
integral equation solutions – Numerical solution – Viscous dissipation effects on flow over a
flat plate. External Turbulent Flows: Analogy solutions for boundary layer flows – Integral
equation solutions – Effects of dissipation on flow over a flat plate. Internal Laminar Flows:
Fully developed laminar flow in pipe, plane duct & ducts with other cross-sectional shapes –
Pipe flow & plane duct flow with developing temperature field – Pipe flows & plane duct flow
with developing velocity & temperature fields. Internal Turbulent Flows: Analogy solutions
for fully developed pipe flow –Thermally developing pipe & plane duct flow. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Natural Convection: Boussineq approximation – Governing equations – Similarity –Boundary
layer equations for free convective laminar flows – Numerical solution of boundary layer
equations. Free Convective flows through a vertical channel across a rectangular enclosure –
Horizontal enclosure – Turbulent natural convection. (12 hrs)
MT-78
UNIT – IV
Combined Convection: Governing parameters & equations – laminar boundary layer flow
over an isothermal vertical plate – combined convection over a horizontal plate – correlations
for mixed convection – effect of boundary forces on turbulent flows – internal flows - internal
mixed convective flows – Fully developed mixed convective flow in a vertical plane channel
& in a horizontal duct. (6 hrs)
UNIT – V
Convective Heat Transfer Through Porous Media: Area weighted velocity –Darcy flow model
– energy equation – boundary layer solutions for 2-D forced convection – Fully developed
duct flow – Natural convection in porous media – filled enclosures – stability of horizontal
porous layers. (6 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Understand the fundamental and advanced principles of forced and natural convection
heat transfer processes.
2. Formulate and solve convective heat transfer problems
3. Apply the principles of convective heat transfer to estimate the heat dissipation from
devices.
4. Evaluate the energy requirements for operating a flow system with heat transfer.
5. Relate to the current challenges in the field of convective heat transfer.
References:
1. Convective Heat & Mass Transfer/ Ghiaasiaan / Cambridge
2. Introduction to Convective Heat Transfer Analysis/ Patrick H. Oosthuigen& David Naylor
/McGraw Hill
3. Convective Heat & Mass Transfer /Kays& Crawford/TMH
4. Fundamentals of Heat & Mass Transfer – Thirumaleshwar – Pearson
5. Heat Transfer – Gregory Nellis& Sanford Klein – Cambridge

CIE – 50 Total:50
marks
marks
MT-79

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 3
MT-80

Engineering)
Course title JET PROPULSION AND ROCKET ENGINEERING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
Prerequisites (if any): Basic of Fluid Mechanics and Machinery

1. Develop an understanding of how air-breathing engines and chemical rockets produce
thrust.
2. Analyze the overall engine performance
3. Analyze the characteristics of the nozzle
4. Analyse the performance analysis rockets;
5. Understand and evaluate the solid and liquid propellants engines.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I
Turbo Jet Propulsion System: Gas turbine cycle analysis – layout of turbo jet engine. Turbo
machinery- compressors and turbines, combustor, blade aerodynamics, engine off design
performance analysis. Flight Performance: Forces acting on vehicle – Basic relations of
motion – multi stage vehicles. (6 hrs)
UNIT – II
Principles Of Jet Propulsion And Rocketry: Fundamentals of jet propulsion, Rockets and air
breathing jet engines – Classification – turbo jet , turbo fan, turbo prop, rocket (Solid and
Liquid propellant rockets) and Ramjet engines. Nozzle Theory and Characteristics Parameters:
Theory of one dimensional convergent – divergent nozzles – aerodynamic choking of nozzles
and mass flow through a nozzle – nozzle exhaust velocity – thrust, thrust coefficient, Ac / At
of a nozzle, Supersonic nozzle shape, non-adapted nozzles, summer field criteria, departure
from simple analysis – characteristic parameters – 1) characteristic velocity, 2) specific
impulse 3) total impulse 4) relationship between the characteristic parameters 5) nozzle
efficiency, combustion efficiency and overall efficiency. (12 hrs)
UNIT – III
Aero Thermo Chemistry Of The Combustion Products: Review of properties of mixture of
gases – Gibbs – Dalton laws – Equivalent ratio, enthalpy changes in reactions, heat of reaction
and heat of formation – calculation of adiabatic flame temperature and specific impulse –
frozen and equilibrium flows. Solid Propulsion System: Solid propellants – classification,
homogeneous and heterogeneous propellants, double base propellant compositions and
manufacturing methods. Composite propellant oxidizers and binders. Effect of binder on
propellant properties. Burning rate and burning rate laws, factors influencing the burning rate,
methods of determining burning rates. (6 hrs)
MT-81
UNIT – IV
Solid propellant rocket engine – internal ballistics, equilibrium motor operation and
equilibrium pressure to various parameters. Transient and pseudo equilibrium operation, end
burning and burning grains, grain design. Rocket motor hard ware design. Heat transfer
considerations in solid rocket motor design. Ignition system, simple pyro devices. Liquid
Rocket Propulsion System: Liquid propellants – classification, Mono and Bi propellants,
Cryogenic and storage propellants, ignition delay of hypergolic propellants, physical and
chemical characteristics of liquid propellant. Liquid propellant rocket engine – system layout,
pump and pressure feed systems, feed system components. Design of combustion chamber,
characteristic length, constructional features, and chamber wall stresses. Heat transfer and
cooling aspects. Uncooled engines, injectors – various types, injection patterns, injector
characteristics, and atomization and drop size distribution, propellant tank design. (12 hrs)
UNIT – V
Ramjet And Integral Rocket Ramjet Propulsion System: Fuel rich solid propellants, gross
thrust, gross thrust coefficient, combustion efficiency of ramjet engine, air intakes and their
classification – critical, super critical and sub-critical operation of air intakes, engine intake
matching, classification and comparison of IIRR propulsion systems. (12 hrs)
UNIT – VI

1. Distinguish the ideal and real thermodynamic cycles of air-breathing engines and
Industrial gas turbines
2. Design the blading, study the velocity triangles and estimate the performance of
centrifugal and axial flow compressors.
3. Describe the combustion process and design the combustion chamber of a gas Turbine.
4. Design the blading, study the velocity triangles and estimate the performance of axial and
radial in-flow turbines
5. Analyse the off-design performance and matching of the components of a gas turbine.
References:
1. Mechanics and Dynamics of Propulsion/ Hill and Peterson/John Wiley & Sons
2. Rocket propulsion elements/Sutton/John Wiley & Sons/8th Edition
3. Gas Turbines/Ganesan /TMH
4. Gas Turbines & Propulsive Systems/Khajuria & Dubey/Dhanpat Rai & Sons
5. Rocket propulsion/Bevere/
6. Jet propulsion /Nicholas Cumpsty/
7. Elements of Gas Turbine Propulsion/Jack D. Mattingly/TMH
8. Turbines, Compressors and Fans/S M Yahya /MGH
MT-82

CIE – 50 Total:50
marks

marks

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2 3
MT-83

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

GUIDE LINES
not offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the faculty/Guide
assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

MT-84


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MT-85
Course Code 18TS3I01 M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering)

No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 10 --- 5
batch of 6 students
INTERNSHIP
1. Provide an opportunity to see how classroom and textbook learning applies to the real
world, and to expose the students to the relevant work experience.
2. Pay close attention to all the steps that go onto completing a job, thereby, help
students to become workforce ready before entering the job market as a graduate.
Provide an opportunity to select the topic of dissertation work by evaluating the
requirement of organisation.
GUIDELINES
1. Student has to approach the concerned heads of various Industries/organization, which

are related to the field of specialization of the M. Tech program.
2. If any student gets internship, he/she has to submit the internship offer letter duly
signed by the concerned authority of the company to the Chairperson of the
Department.
3. The internship on full time basis will be immediately after the examination of II
semester and during vacation of III semester for a minimum period of 8 weeks without
affecting the regular class work.
Chairperson as per the format acceptable to the respective industry /organizations and
to the Institution.
submit.
evaluation.
MT-86
The broad format of the internship final report shall contain Cover Page, Certificate from
College, Certificate from Industry / Organization of internship, Acknowledgement,
structure, Products, Services, Business Partners, Financials, Manpower, Societal
Concerns, Professional Practices, Activities of the Department where internship is done,
Tasks Performed and summary of the tasks performed. specific technical and soft skills
that student has acquired during internship, References & Annexure.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
50*
Marks
= 50 marks
SEE
Note: *= CIE be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for 50
marks.
**= SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for
50 marks.
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
50*
4 Documentation 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
MT-87
Rubrics for SEE:

no of SEE
50**
4 Document 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
Note: ** = SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced
for 50 marks.

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 3
MT-88
MINI PROJECT
1. Understand the method of applying engineering knowledge/use application software to

solve specific
Student shall take up small problems in the field of domain of program as mini project. It can
be related to a solution to an engineering problem, verification and analysis of experimental
data available, conducting experiments on various engineering subjects, material
characterisation, familiarising a software tool for solution to selected engineering problem,
etc.
department/college and it can be of interdisciplinary also .
COURSE OUTCOMES:

50*
Marks
= 50 marks
SEE
marks.
50 marks.
MT-89
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
Total 100%
Rubrics for SEE:
project. The following weightage would be given for the examination. Evaluation shall be
done in batches, not exceeding 6 students.
no of CIE
Discussion 50**
4 Report 25%
5 Viva Voce 20%
Total 100%
for 50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 2 3
CO3 3
MT-90
Course Code 18TS3D01 M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering)

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 10 0 5
results and identifying relevant applications. Preparation of synopsis, preliminary report
for approval of topic selected along with literature survey, objectives and methodology.
GUIDELINES
potential and should involve scientific research, design, generation/collection and analysis
of data, determining solution and must preferably bring out the individual contribution.
carried out, on-campus or in an industry or in an organisation with prior approval from the
Chairperson of the Department. The student has to be in regular contact with the guide
atleast once in a week.
survey, Conclusion of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of Dissertation,
Methodology to be followed, Experimental requirements, References and Annexure.
MT-91
COURSE OUTCOME:

CIE

SEE
marks.
50 marks.


PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 2 3
MT-92
SEMESTER IV
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

same effectively.
GUIDE LINES
assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Overcome inhibition in interacting with peers and hence develop the spirit of team
work.
MT-93


member nominated by Chairperson of the department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MT-94
Course Code 18TS4D01 M.Tech (Thermal Science and Engineering)

No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 30 --- 15

3. Create a detailed technical document as per format based on the outcome of
dissertation work phase I and II.
GUIDELINES
report of final dissertation work in bound form that includes Cover Paper, Certificate from
College/Industry/Organisation, Acknowledgement, Abstract, Table of contents, List of
Figures and Table, Nomenclature, Chapter of Introduction, Literature survey, Conclusion
of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of dissertation work, Methodology,
Experimentation, Results, Discussion, Conclusion, Scope for future work, References,
Annexure and full text of the publication (submitted or published).
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Conduct experiments/ implement the capabilities of different Software /Computational
/ Analytical/Modelling and simulation tools individually and generate data for
validation of hypothesis.
3. Prepare a detailed technical document, present and defend the contents of Dissertation
work before technically qualified audience effectively.
MT-95

100 50*
marks marks
300 50**
marks marks
marks.
** = SEE shall be conducted for 300 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for
50 marks.
1 Presentation of background of dissertation work = 10%

2 Literature survey, Problem formulation and Objectives = 30%
3 Presentation of methodology and experimentation = 30%
4 Results and Discussion = 20%
5 Questions and Answers = 10%

1. Originality = 5%
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3
MT-96
18MSMOOC M.Tech ( Thermal Science and

Course Code
Engineering )
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- --- --- 3

COURSE CONTENTS
The courses shall be from the related topics not taught in M. Tech program or other recent
trends in mechanical engineering.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks Marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
MT-97
Department of Mechanical Engineering,
University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering,
KR Circle, Bengaluru – 560 001
Major: Advanced Materials Technology
MA-1
VISION
“To strive for excellence in education for the realization of a vibrant

and inclusive society through knowledge creation and dissemination”
MISSION

publications
 Provide access to all sections of society to pursue higher
education
 Inculcate right values among students while encouraging
competitiveness to promote leadership qualities
MA-2

University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering (UVCE) was started as a School of

Mechanical Engineering by Bharat Ratna Sir. M. Visvesvaraya in the year 1913 to
meet the needs of the State for skilled workers with S V Setty as its Superintendent.
Later, it was converted to a full-fledged Engineering College in the year 1917 under
the name Government Engineering College and was affiliated to the University of
Mysore. It is the fifth Engineering College to be established in the country.
Constituent Colleges of Bangalore University. This is one of the oldest Institutions in
the country imparting technical education leading to B.E., M.E, B.Arch., M.Sc.
(Engineering), M.Arch. and Ph.D. degrees in various disciplines of Engineering and
Architecture. The Institution currently offers 7 Undergraduate (B.E. / B.Arch.) Full-
time, three Undergraduate (B.E.) Part-time and 24 Postgraduate (M.E. / M.Arch.)
Programmes.
VISION
The vision of UVCE is to strive for excellence in advancing engineering education
through path breaking innovations across the frontiers of human knowledge to realize
a vibrant, inclusive and humane society.
MISSION
The mission of UVCE is to prepare human resource and global leaders to achieve the
above vision through discovery, invention and develop friendly technologies to
promote scientific temper for a healthy society. UVCE shapes engineers to respond
competently and confidently to the economic, social and organizational challenges
arising from globally advancing technical needs.
MA-3
Name of programme: M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

Major: Advanced Materials Technology
Strive for Centre of Excellence in advancing Mechanical Engineering education to

produce highly qualified human resources to meet local and global requirement.
MEM1. Implementing effectively, the outcome based education by imparting

knowledge of basics and advances in Mechanical Engineering and other allied disciplines.
MEM3. Creating conducive environment for effective teaching and learning process
through interdisciplinary research, online courses, interaction with institutions of higher
learning and industries, R and D laboratories of national importance, alumni, employers
and other internal & external stake holders.
MEM4. Imbibing awareness of entrepreneurship, ethics, honesty, credibility, social

and environmental consciousness.
improvement and to equip them with then latest trends in Mechanical engineering and there
By inculcate the habit of continuous learning in faculty, staff and students.
MA-4
MDPEO1: Have successful career through the application of latest developments in the
area of Advanced Materials.
MDPEO2: Communicate effectively and ability to work individually and in team with a
zeal for venturing into entrepreneurship and involve in life-long learning.
MDPEO3: Pursue high level research, higher studies and choose professional career.
Program outcomes:
Post Graduates with M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology) degree will be able
to:
MDPO1: Independently carry out research/investigation and development work to solve

practical problems of the domain of program.
MDPO2: Prepare and present a substantial technical report/document.
MDPO3: Demonstrate a higher degree of mastery in the various fields of Advanced

Materials.
MA-5
SCHEME OF STUDIES AND EXAMINATIONS FOR 24 MONTHS COURSE FOR THE AWARD OF
M. Tech. DEGREE IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING under CBCS Scheme 2K18 Scheme
MAJOR: ADVANCED MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY
Semester I
Teaching Scheme
Sl. Course Teaching Total CIE *SEE
Course Title (No. of hrs per week) Credits
No. Type/Code Dept. hrs/week Marks Marks
L T P S
1. 18MA1C01 Mathematical Methods in Engineering 3 2 0 0 Maths 5 50 50 4
2. 18MA1C02 Heat Treatment of Engineering Materials 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18MA1C03 Mechanical Behavior of Materials 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
1. Smart Materials, MEMS & Structures
18MA1E1A
2. Materials for Engineering Applications
4. 18MA1E1B 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. Super Conducting Materials &
18MA1E1C
Applications
18MA1E2A 1. Nanomaterials and Technology
5. 18MA1E2B 2. Materials Characterization 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MA1E2C 3. Particulate Technology
Material Testing and Mechanical
6. 18MA1L01 0 0 4 0 Mech 4 50 50 2
Behaviour Lab – I
7. 18MA1M01 2 0 0 0 Mech 2 50 50 2
Property Rights
8. 18MA1S01 Seminar-I 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
Technical Paper Writing
9. 18MA1M02 2 0 0 0 English 2 50 1
Audit Course – I
Total 23 02 06 -- 31 450 350 26
MA-6
Semester II
Teaching Scheme
Sl. Course (No. of hrs per Teaching Total *SEE
Course Title CIE Marks
No. Type/Code week) Dept. hrs/week Marks Credits
L T P S
1. 18MA2C01 Metallurgical Failure Analysis 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
2. 18MA2C02 Advanced Composite Materials 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18MA2C03 Selection of Materials 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MA2E1A 1. Testing of Materials
4. 18MA2E1B 2. Non Destructive Testing 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MA2E1C 3. Polymer Engineering
18MA2E2A 1. Biomaterials and Technology
5. 18MA2E2B 2. Ceramic Science and Technology 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MA2E2C 3. Nuclear Materials
Material Testing & Mechanical Behavior –
6. 18MA2L01 0 0 4 0 Mech 4 50 50 2
LAB II
7. 18MA2S01 Seminar-II 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
8. 18MA2M01 Pedagogy Studies (Audit Course – II) 2 0 0 0 Mech 2 50 1
Total 22 -- 6 -- 28 400 300 24
MA-7
Semester III
Teaching Scheme
Course Title (No. of hrs per week)
No. Type/Code Dept. hrs/week Marks Marks Credits
L T P S
1.
18MA3E1A Corrosion Engineering
4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
18MA3E1B High Temperature Materials
18MA3E1C Advanced Manufacturing Processes
2. Open Elective 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3. 18MA3S01 Seminar-III 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
4. 18MA3I01 Internship/ Mini Project --- --- 10 --- Mech 10 50 50 5
5. 18MA3D01 Dissertation Work Phase-I 0 0 10 0 Mech 10 50 50 5
Total 08 -- 22 -- 30 250 200 19
MA-8
Semester IV
Teaching Scheme
Course Title (No. of hrs per week)
No. Type/Code Dept. hrs/week Marks Marks Credits
L T P S
1. 18MA4S01 Seminar-IV 0 0 2 0 Mech 2 50 1
2. 18MA4D01 Dissertation Work Phase-II -- -- 30 0 Mech 30 50 50 15
Total -- -- 32 -- 32 100 50 16
1. 18MAMOOC MOOC Course -- -- -- -- 03
Grand Total of Credits -- -- -- -- 88

1) 18MA3P1A – Composite and Smart Materials
COURSE TYPE
MA : Advanced Materials Technology C : Professional Core E : Professional Elective
P : Open Elective M : Mandatory L : Lab
S : Seminar I : Mini Project/Internship D : Dissertation Phase
L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial, P – Practical/Lab work, S – Self Study

MA-9
NOTE:
1) In any course (Program Core or Program Elective), if self study of 4hrs per week for students is allocated, then the teaching scheme of such
courses will be 3-0-0-4 and the total credits will be 4.
# = The CIE test for the lab component of integrated course shall be conducted with the external examiner for 50 marks and shall be reduced
to 25 marks.
MA-10
Semester III
L T P S
1.
18CV3P1B Water Laws, Rights & Administration
18CV3P1C Waste to energy 4 0 0 0 Civil 4 50 50 4
Remote sensing and Geographic
18CV3P1D
information system
2. 4 0 0 0 Mech 4 50 50 4
3 18EE3P1B Robotics and Automation 4 0 0 0 EEE 4 50 50 4
18CS3P1C Modelling and Simulation
MA-11
Department of Mechanical Engineering, U. V. C. E., M. Tech. – Advanced materials Technology
SEMESTER: I
Course Code 18MA1C01 M.Tech ( Advanced Materials Technology )


No. of Hours/Week
3 2 0 0 4

1. Analyse the concepts and importantance of Probability theory and various
distributions.
2. Analyse the concepts of statistical technique to analyse multi variant
functions.
3. Apply the knowledge of ordinary and partial differential equations of solving
4. Apply the basic concepts of partial differential equations and complex algebra
for engineering problems.
UNIT I
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS
Baye's rule, Discrete random variables and their probability distributions; The binomial
probability distribution, The Poisson probability distribution, The normal probability
distribution for continuous random variables. Simplify distributions like x2, t, F. 6 hours
UNIT II
PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

Statistics and sampling distributions, central limit theorem, the sampling distribution of the
sample mean and of the sample proportion. Testing hypothesis about population parameters.
A Statistical test of hypothesis, large sample test of a population mean. 6 hours
UNIT III
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Initial value problems: Difference equations, Single step methods: Classical Runge Kutta 2nd
and 4th order methods- Stability analysis. Predictor Corrector methods: Modified Euler's
method, Milne's Predictor-Corrector method. 12 hours
MA-12
Department of Mechanical Engineering, U. V. C. E., M. Tech. – Advanced material Technology
UNIT IV
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS, Finite

difference solution of one dimensional heat equation, one dimensional wave equation and two
dimensional Laplace equation. Stability analysis of finite difference methods for heat and wave
equations- Von-Neumann method. 12hours
UNIT V
CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS
Functional, Variation of a functional, necessary condition for extermination of a functional.
Euler-Lagrange equation and Euler-Poisson equation- special cases. Constrained
extermination problems-isoperimetric problems. 12 hours
UNIT VI:
COURSE OUTCOMES:
STUDENTS SHALL BE ABLE TO
1. Determine the appropriateness of applying probability distributions under
various engineering applications.
2. Differentiate hypothesis testing procedures based on type of outcome variable
and number of samples.
3. Select appropriate numerical methods to apply to various types of problems in
engineering in consideration of the mathematical operations involved and
accuracy requirements.
4. Derive and analyse standard finite difference methods for the one dimensional
wave and heat equations and are able to understand the concepts of stability of
numerical methods..
5. Solve engineering problems using the methods and techniques of the calculus of
variations and prepare for the study of modern optimal control theory.
1. Mendenhall, Beaver J and Beaver M: Introduction to Probability and

Statistics, Twelfth edition. 2012.
2. Jain, Iyengar and Jain: Numerical methods for scientific and engineering
computation, Fifth edition, New age international publishers, 2014
3. E. Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons,
10th Ed., 2015
4. B.S. Grewal: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 43rd Ed.,
2015.
5. Ronald E, Walpole, Sharon L. Myers, Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics
for Engineers and Scientists (8th Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 07 (for
Units I & II).
MA-13
6. J. B. Doshi, Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers, Narosa, New Delhi,
10 (for Units III & IV).
Student Edition, 09.
Statistical for Engineering, (4th Edition), Willey Student edition, 06.

Quiz / AAT = 5 marks Total:50
CIE – 50 marks
Unit-VI(AAT) =15 marks marks
SEE – 100 marks Answer FIVE full questions

(i) Questions Q1 & Q 2 from Unit I and Unit II
respectively shall be answered and shall not have 20* 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
internal choice. marks
(ii) Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5 from Unit III, Unit IV &
internal choice
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 2 3
MA-14
M.Tech ( Advanced Materials

Course Code 18MA1C02
Technology )
Course title HEAT TREATMENT OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the concept of heat treatment & different heat treatment processes
2. Apply suitable heat treatment technique to improve certain mechanical properties.
3. Analyze various heat treatment equipment’s/furnaces based on their capacity.
4. Evaluate the heat treatability of C.I, tool steels, SS, super alloys etc.
5. Create an awareness & importance of heat treatment of non-ferrous materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Heat Treating of Steel, Principle, Quantitative prediction of transformation Hardening, Stress

relief, Heat treating of steels, Normalizing of steels, Annealing of steels, Quenching of steels,
Tempering, Martempering, Austempering of steel, Cold treating of ultrahigh strength steels.
05 hours
UNIT – II
Surface Hardening of Steel, Flame hardening, Laser surface hardening, Electron beam
surface hardening, Gas Carburizing, Pack Carburizing, Liquid carburizing & Vacuum
carburizing, Microstructure and properties of carburized steels, Carbonitriding, Gas
Carbonitriding, Ion Carbonitriding, Bionizing, Thermo reactive diffusion process.
12 hours
UNIT – III
Heat treating equipment, Types of heat treating furnaces, Salt bath equipment, Fluidized bed
equipment, Auxiliary equipment, Heat resistant materials, Fire furnace parts, Trays &
fixtures, Energy efficient furnace design & operation, Process & Quality control
considerations, Temperature control, Furnace atmosphere & control, Control of surface
carbon content, Evaluation of carbon control in processed parts, Defects & distortion in Heat
treated parts, Statically process control, Computerized properties prediction & technology
planning, Furnace safety. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Heat Treating of Cast Irons, Heat treating of Gray irons, Heat treating of ductile irons, Heat
treating malleable irons, Heat treating high alloy irons, Heat treating of tool steels, Process &
furnaces equipment, Specific classes of furnace equipment, Control of distortion in tool
steels, Heat treating of stainless steels & Heat Resistant alloys, Heat treating of stainless
steels, Heat treating of super alloys, Heat treating of refracting metals & alloys.
12 hours
UNIT – V
Heat treating of non-ferrous alloys, Principles of Non-ferrous alloys, Heat treating of
aluminium alloys, Copper alloys, Magnesium alloys, Nickel & Nickel alloy, Titanium &
Titanium alloy, Tin rich alloys, Lead & lead alloys, Uranium & uranium alloys, Annealing of
precious metals. 07 hours
MA-15
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Describe and compare various heat treatments methods.
2. Determine the appropriate hardening & nit riding techniques.
3. Distinguish various melting and heat treatment equipment’s.
4. Assess the heat treatment ability of C.I various steels and alloys
5. Formulate the different processes for heat treatment of Al,Cu,Ni,Ti etc.,
References:
1. Steel heat treatment equipment and process design edited by George E. Totten
2. Heat Treatment: Principles and Techniques by Rajan T.V
3. ASM hand book volume-4.
4. Handbook of metal treatments and testing Robert B. Ross
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 Quiz - 05 marks

marks Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 Unit VI [AAT] - 15 marks marks
marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 2 3
CO5 3
MA-16

Technology )
Course title MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR OF MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basics of mechanics.
2. Understand Elasticity and Plasticity behavior of materials
3. Understand the mechanics behind dislocations.
4. Analyze on the mechanisms occurring in mechanical behavior of materials
5. Understand the fracture mechanics.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Stiffness, Strength, and toughness, Types of mechanical behavior, Relevance, Measurement,

data, Macroscopic, Continuum behavior, Physical mechanisms controlling behavior.
06 hours
UNIT – II
Elasticity, Stress, Strain, Compliance and stiffness tensors, Physical origin of elastic moduli,
Generalized Hooke‟s law and its application to crystals,
Continuum Plasticity, True stress-true strain, Necking and Considère‟s Criterion, Strain rate
and temperature dependence of flow curve, Yield Criteria and yield locus, Normality,
Isotropic and kinematic hardening, Plastic stress-strain relations, Microstructural aspects of
plasticity and residual stresses. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Theoretical shear strength, Dislocations and Burger‟s vector, Elastic properties and energy of
dislocations, Forces between dislocations, Partial dislocation and stacking faults, Dislocation-
dislocation interactions, The Peierls-Nabarro Stress, Origin and multiplication of dislocations,
Crystallography of Slip and Independent Slip systems, Slip plane rotation, Twinning and twin
geometry, Twinning in HCP crystals Strengthening. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Mechanisms of work hardening, Solid solution strengthening, Point defect dislocation

interaction energy, Yield point phenomenon, Precipitation hardening, Dislocation-precipitate
interactions 06 hour
UNIT – V
Fracture, Importance of Fracture Mechanics, Griffith Fracture Theory, Crack Driving Force
& Energy Release Rate, Modes of fracture, Stress intensity factors, Similitude, Role of
Crack-tip, Plasticity, Plastic Zone Size & Shape, K-dominance, Fracture Toughness-
Microstructural Issues programming.
12 hours
MA-17
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain basic mechanics of material.
2. Explain Elasticity and Plasticity side by side and describing its micro-structural aspect
3. Describe the concepts of dislocation and its types
4. Illustrate the different mechanisms occurring in mechanical behavior of materials
5. Discuss the importance of fracture mechanics in materials.
References:
1. Mechanical Behavior of Materials William F. Hosford
2. Dislocations and Mechanical Behaviour of Materials Engineering Materials M. N. Shetty
3. Mechanical Metallurgy George E. Dieter
4. Mechanical Metallurgy: Principles and Applications Marc A. Meyers, K K Chawla
5. Mechanical Behavior of Materials: Engineering Methods for Deformation, Fracture, And
Fatigue Norman E. Dowling

marks
marks.
Mapping of Course Outcomes (COS) to Program Outcomes (POs))
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 1
CO3 3
CO4 2
CO5 1
MA-18
18MA1E1A M.Tech ( Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
Course title SMART MATERIALS, MEMS & STRUCTURES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the smart materials like SMA, piezo-electric materials, ER & MR fluids.
2. Apply the thermodynamic and modelling approach to evaluate thermos-mechanical
behavior of smart materials.
3. Analyze the experimental methods for sensing, actuation and monitoring for smart
structures.
4. Understand the concepts of Fiber Optic based structural monitoring of aerospace and
civil structures.
5. Understand the mechanical properties of MEMS, characterization of MEMS devices and
its applications.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to smart materials, Shape Memory Alloys & Polymers, Peizo electric materials,
ER & MR fluids, Fibre optic sensors. 06 hours
UNIT – II
Bi/Multi Functionalities in smart materials, Phase transformations, Evaluation of thermo -

mechanical and other coupled behaviour, Constitutive equations based on thermodynamics
and Modelling approach. 12
hours
UNIT – III
Smart & Adaptive structures concepts, Experimental methods for sensing, Actuation &
monitoring, Active-passive vibration control & shape control of structures, 06 hours
UNIT – IV
Fiber Optic based Structural health monitoring of aerospace and civil structures, Applications
of smart materials in sensing, Vibration and shape control of aerospace and other structures.
12 hours
UNIT – V
MEMS, Mechanical properties of MEMS materials including sensors and actuators, Optical
MEMS, Characterization of MEMS devices, MEMS integration and packaging, MEMS
products and applications. 12 hours
MA-19
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain various smart materials like SMA, piezoelectric materials, fiber optics, and ER &
MR fluids.
2. Determine characterization and thermos-mechanical behavior of smart materials.
3. Verify the experimental methods for sensing, actuation and monitoring of smart
structures.
4. Discuss the various applications of smart structures in aerospace and civil structures.
5. Explain the mechanical properties, integration and packaging of MEMS.
References:
1. M. V. Gandhi and B. So Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman & Hall,
London, New York, 1992 (ISBN: 0412370107).
2. Chang Liu „Foundations of MEMS‟ Pearson Prentice Hall
3. B. Culshaw, Smart Structures and Materials, Artech House, Boston, 1996
(ISBN:0890066817).
4. V. Srinivasan, Smart Structures: Analysis and Design, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, New York, 2001 (ISBN: 0521650267).
5. Inderjit Chopra „Smart structures‟ University of Maryland College park
Mohammed Gad-El-Hak, „MEMS :Introduction and Fundamentals‟, CRC Pre

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 1 2
CO5 1
MA-20
18MA1E1B M.Tech ( Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
Course title MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Apply the knowledge relating to selection of materials.
2. Understand the concepts pf materials performance of requirements.
3. Apply the concepts of materials engineering the Bio metallic applications.
4. Analyze the practices behind the selection of materials for cutting tool.
5. Evaluate the materials for aerospace applications.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction, Major classes of engineering materials, Systematic selection procedures.

04 hours
UNIT – II
Material performance requirements, Quantitative Initial screening processes, Performance

Index, Cost basis for material selection, Numerical problems, Selection of materials based on
strength, Toughness and stiffness, Fatigue, Creep behaviour, Numerical problems. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Materials for Bio-medical applications, General requirements, Materials for applications such
as total knee replacement, Replacement of eye parts, Tissue replacement, Stents and valves of
smart materials. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Materials for cutting tools materials for low and high temperature applications. 08 hours
UNIT – V
Materials for automotive applications for engine parts, Structural parts with analysis of the
requirements of the parts, Materials for aerospace applications such as structural parts,
Control surfaces, Turbine parts with analysis of the requirements of the parts. 12hours
UNIT – VI
MA-21
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Apply the concepts learnt to the objective of selection of materials.
2. Incorporate the principles of materials performance requirements.
3. Discuss the principle of material science for Bio medical applications.
4. Analyze the principle behind materials selection for cutting tools.
5. Evaluate the rationale behind the selection of materials for aerospace applications.
References:
1. Engineering Materials: Properties and Applications of Metals and Alloys by Sharma
C.P (Author)
2. Material Selection by Myer Kutz, Wiley Publications.
3. Selection and use of Engineering Materials by J. A. Charles, F. A. A. Crane, J. A. G.
Furness, Butterworth – Heinemann Publications.
4. Material Science and Metallurgy by O. P. Khanna, Dhanpatray Publications.
5. ASM Handbook Vol.20: Material Selection and Design

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 1 2
CO4 3
CO5 3
MA-22

Course Code 18MA1E1C
Technology )
Course title SUPER CONDUCTING MATERIALS & APPLICATIONS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Analyze the functioning of super conducting materials.
2. Understand the super conducting behavior under high pressures and magnetic fields.
3. Analyze the crystal structures of super conductors.
4. Understand the about advantages, applications of super conducting materials..
5. Understand the super conducting magnets.
6. Evaluate latest research papers about super conducting materials and their applications.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Zero electrical resistance, Meissner effect A.C. Diamagnetic susceptibility, Heat capacity,
Optical absorption by superconductor, Entropy change. 04 hours
UNIT – II
Thermal conductivity, Destruction of superconductivity by external magnetic fields, Type I

and Type II materials, Superconducting behavior under high pressures, Flux quantization,
Normal and Josephson tunneling. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Elemental superconductors, Superconducting compounds and its alloys, A-I5 compounds,

Chevral phase compounds, La-Ba-Cu-O, Y-Ba-cu-O, Bi-Sr-Ca-Cu-O and New systems and
their crystal structures, Experimental studies on the new materials, Organic superconductors,
fullerenes. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Isotope effect, BCS theory, Role of electrons and phonons, Applications of electron band
structure results to calculate electron, Phonon coupling constant McMillan‟s formula, GLAG
theory, Recent theories on high Tc materials, Coherence length, Expression for critical
temperature Tc, Critical field Hc, Critical current Jc, Heavy fermion superconductivity.
12 hours
UNIT – V
Superconducting magnets, Power generators, Motors, Transformers, Power storage, Power
transmission, Josephson junction devices, IR sensors, SQUIDS, SLUGS, Magnetically
levitated trains, Computer storage elements. 08 hours
MA-23
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Discuss the functioning of super conducting materials.
2. Describe the super conducting behavior under high pressures and magnetic fields.
3. Analyze the crystal structures of super conductors.
4. Explain advantages, applications of super conducting materials.
5. Explain the super conducting magnets.
6. Assess latest research papers about super conducting materials and their applications.
References:
1. Superconductivity Basics and Applications to Magnets by Sharma, R.G.
2. Hoi.S.Kowk and David T. Shaw (Eds.), “Superconductivity and its Applications”,
Elsevier Science Publishing, 1988.
3. Narlikar. A.V. and Ekbote, “Introduction to superconductivity”, South Asia publishers,
1983.
4. Tilley. D.R and Tilley. “Superfluidity and superconductivity”, Adam Hilger, 1986.
5. Narlikar. A.V., “Studies on High temperature superconductors- Advances in research and
applications” Nova Scientific, New Delhi, 1990

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 2
MA-24
18MA1E2A M.Tech ( Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
Course title NANOMATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the Nanomaterial’s and Technology
2. Understand the concepts in synthesis of Nanomaterial’s
3. Understand characterization of Nanomaterial’s.
4. Analyze Nanostructure and industrial Nano Technology
5. Understand the Bio-medical applications Nano Technology
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction, History, Background scope and Interdisciplinary nature of nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, Scientific revolutions, Bottom-Up and Top down approach, Challenges in
Nano technology, Applications, Nano materials, Type and shape of various nanoparticles
such as nanoclays, Carbon Nanofibers, Carbon nanotubes, Graphene, Fullerenes, Single wall
tubes, Multiwall tubes, Macroscopic Nanotube materials. 07 hours
UNIT – II
Synthesis, Chemical precipitation methods, Sol-gel method, Chemical reduction,
Sonochemical synthesis, Hydrothermal, Solvo-thermal, Solution combustion process.
Physical Methods, Ball milling, Physical Vapour deposition (PVD), Chemical Vapor
deposition (CVD), Sputter deposition, Electric arc deposition, Lithography techniques.
05 hours
UNIT – III
Characterization of Nano materials, Structural characterization. X-ray Photoelectron
Spectroscopy (XPS), Energy Dispersive X-ray analysis (EDAX), Principles and applications
of X-ray diffraction, Electron diffraction, Surface characterization Techniques, High
resolution microscopy, Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), Transmission electron
microscopy (TEM), Atomic force microscopy (AFM), Scanning tunneling microscopy
(STM), Mechanical properties characterization, Nano indentation techniques, Nano
Tribology. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Nanostructures, Electronic Structure of Nanoparticles, Kinetics in Nanostructured materials,
Zero dimensional, One-dimensional and two dimensional nanostructures, Clusters of metals
and semiconductors, Nanowires, Nanostructured beams, and Nanocomposites, Artificial
atomic clusters, Size dependent properties, Size dependent absorption spectra, Photons in
nanostructures.
Industrial nanotechnology, Solar cells, Thin film Si solar cells, Chemical semiconductor
solar cells, Dye sensitized solar cells, Polymer solar cells, Nano quantum dot solar cells,
Hybrid nano-polymer solar cells, Fuel Cells, Principle of working, Basic thermodynamics
and Electrochemical principle, Fuel cell classification, Fuel cell Electrodes and Carbon nano
tubes, Application of power and transportation. 12 hours
MA-25
UNIT – V
Biomedical applications, Biomedical applications and nanomedicines, Nanoparticles and
Micro–organism, Nano-materials in bone substitutes & Dentistry, Drug delivery and its
applications, Biochips- analytical devices, Biosensors, Natural nanocomposite systems as
spider silk, Bones, Shells, Organic-inorganic nanocomposite formation through self-
assembly, Developing of Nanomedicines, Nanosytems in use, Protocols for Nanodrug
Administration, Nanotechnology in Diagnostics applications, materials used in Diagnostics
and Therapeutic applications, Molecular Nanomechanics, Molecular devices, Nanotribology,
Studying Tribology at Nanoscale, Nanotribology applications, Aerospace applications, Nano
and pico satellites, Black box using nanosensors, CNT based electronic noses- CNT based lab
on a chip/biochip- CNT in epoxy composites, Fuel cells for onboard aircraft systems,
Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes in ballistic protection, Zyvere Nanocoatings- scratch,
Chemical and UV resistance. 12 hours
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Describe the different Nanomaterials
2. Explain types of synthesis in Nanomaterials
3. Explain the characterization using different technologies
4. Verify applications of nano technology in mechanical structures and Industrial
applications
5. Implement the knowledge on use of nano technology in Bio-Medical
References:
1. Nanostructured Materials, Volume 1, Editors: Gerhard Wilde
2. Nanostructures & Nano Materials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications: Guozherg Cao,
“Imperial college press.
3. Nanocomposites Science and Technology", Wiley-VCH, 2003: Ajayan P.M., Schadler
L.S., Braun P.V
4. NANO: The Essential understanding of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology:Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2007 T. Pradeep
5. Introduction to Nanotechnology: Chareles P.poole
6. Nanotechnology and Nano Electronics – Materials, devices and measurement Techniques
: WR .Fahrner.
marks
marks.
MA-26
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 1
CO5 1 2
MA-27

Course Code
Technology )
Course title MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Evaluate the advanced microscopic techniques and concepts of microscopy
2. Understand X-ray diffraction techniques and calculations of various crystal structures.
3. Apply the indexing pattern and determination of lattice parameters.
4. Analyze the working principles of various characterization instruments viz. TEM, SEM
etc.
5. Evaluate the chemical analysis using EDX, AFM, Auger spectroscopy etc.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Advance microscopic techniques, Phase contrast, Interference and polarized light Microscopy
and High temperature microscopy. 06 hours
UNIT – II
X Ray diffraction, Working principle, Counters, Filters and cameras, Calculations for SC,
BCC, FCC and HCP structures. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Indexing patterns, Precise lattice parameter determination Chemical analysis, Particle size
and strain. 06 hours
UNIT – IV
Electron microscopes, Construction and working principles of TEM, Image formation,
resolving power, Magnification, Depth of focus, Elementary treatment of image contrasts,
Important lens defects and their correction, Bright field and dark field images, Stereographic
projection, Formation of SAD patterns, Reciprocal lattice and Ewald sphere construction,
Indexing of diffraction patterns, Sample preparation techniques, Scanning electron
microscope, Construction, Interaction of electrons with matter, Modes of operation.
12 hours
UNIT – V
Chemical analysis using EDX, EPMA Atomic force microscopy, Working principles of XRF,
Augur spectroscopy, TG-DTA and DSC. 12 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-28
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Discuss advanced microscopic technique and concepts of microscopy.
2. Explain X-ray diffraction techniques and calculation of various crystal structures.
3. Discuss the indexing patterns, lattice parameter determination, particle size and strain.
4. Determine the principles used in TEM, SEM etc., to characterize the various materials.
5. Apply the knowledge of chemical analysis using various instruments to characterize the
materials.
References:
1. Smallman R. E., „Modern Physical Metallurgy‟, 4th Edition, Butterworths, 1985
2. Philips V. A., „Modern Metallographic Techniques and their Applications‟, Wiley
Interscience, 1971
3. Cullity B. D., „Elements of X-ray Diffraction‟, 4th Edition, Addison Wiley, 1978
4. Loretto M. H., „Electron Beam Analysis of Materials‟, Chapman and Hall, 1984

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 1 3
CO3 2
CO4 1
CO5 2
MA-29

Technology )
Course title PARTICULATE TECHNOLOGY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Evaluate about particulate processing methods.
2. Understand the advantages, disadvantages, applications of particulate processing.
3. Understand the production methods of metal and ceramic powders.
4. Apply the methods of powder compaction.
5. Evaluate recent developments in particulate technology.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to particulate processing, Advantages, Limitations and applications of

particulate processing. 04 hours
UNIT – II
Science of particulate processing, Issues related to particle morphology, Differences in

mechanical behavior (with respect to cast and wrought materials) and related mathematical
treatment, Similarities and differences between metal powder and ceramic powder
processing. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Production and Characterization of metal and ceramic powders, Compaction processes,

Powder properties and powder compaction, Pressing, Hot Isostatic Processing and Extrusion
12 hours
UNIT – IV
Sintering, Thermodynamic and process aspects, recent developments in mechanical alloying

and reaction milling. 08 hours
UNIT – V
Production of particulate composites, Application of P/M based on case studies,

Manufacturing of typical products, Near net shape processing.
12 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-30
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain the various aspects of particulate processing.
2. Describe the advantages, disadvantages, applications of particulate processing.
3. Discuss the production methods of metal and ceramic powders.
4. Determine the methods of powder compaction.
5. Discuss recent developments in particulate technology.
References:
1. German R.M., „Powder Metallurgy Science‟, Metal Powder Industries Federation, New
Jersey, 1994
2. Kuhn H. A. and Alan Lawley, „Powder Metallurgy Processing - New Techniques and
Analysis‟, Oxford IBH, Delhi, 1978
3. Introduction to Particle Technology by Martin Rhode
4. Particle Technology and Engineering: An Engineer's Guide to Particles, Powders, and
Multiphase Systems by Jonathan Seville, Chuan-Yu Wu

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 1 3
CO4 3
CO5 1 3
MA-31

Course Code 18MA1L01
Technology )
Category Program Lab Semester : I
Course title MATERIAL TESTING AND MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR LAB – I
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 4

1. Analyze different destructive testing commonly used in industries.
2. Understand the modern composite material preparation and microstructure study of
materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
1. To conduct the weldability tests of common materials like Cu, Steel
i. Tensile test.
ii. Bend test.
iii. Hardness variation across the weld.
2. To conduct the testing of cast metals
i. Fluidity Test
ii. Wedge Test
iii. Specimen casting
iv. Wear tests on cast metals: steel/Al/Cu etc., P. O. D., Abrasion, Erosion
Tests.
3. To conduct the Wear testing
i. Pin & Disc
ii. Dry abrasion wear
iii. Jet erosion wear
UNIT-II
4. To conduct the Fatigue testing and Impact behavior of metals & composites.
5. To prepare the F. R. P. composites using common matrix materials and dispersed phases.
(Polyester Epoxy with glass/carbon fibers) in known compositions
i. Tensile Tests
ii. Bending Test of the specimen prepared.
6. To determine the Micro-structures of engineering materials.
MA-32
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Discuss the different material testing equipment’s.
2. Develop the latest material technology and its preparation.

Performance of the student in the 20 Write up 20
laboratory, every week
Test at the end of semester 20 Experiments 1 = 30 60
Experiments 2 = 30
Total 50 100
Note: SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
MA-33
18MA1M01 M.Tech ( Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
Course title
RIGHTS
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 2

1. Analyse the criteria for selection of research problem.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
problems.
UNIT – II
Effective technical writing, How to write report, Paper, Developing a research proposal,
Format of research proposal, presentation and assessment by a review committee.
05hrs
UNIT – III
05hrs
UNIT – IV
for grants of patents in India, Patent licensing and transfer of Technology, Patent information
and databases. International scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property,
Patenting under Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT). 05hrs
UNIT-V
UNIT – VI
MA-34
COURSE OUTCOMES:
proposal.
rights.

1. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “research Methodology; an introduction for science
and engineering students”
3. Ranjit Kumar 2nd edition,” Research Methodology; a step by step guide for Beginners”
5. Mayall,‟Industrial Design” McGraw Hill,1992
CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III) = 15 marks Total:50

Quiz = 5 marks

20* 2 = 40
Marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3
MA-35
Course Code 18MA1S01 M.Tech ( Advanced Materials Technology)

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

1. Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and analyse
GUIDE LINES
assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

3. Make an effective presentation with seamless flow of content within the time
of team work.
MA-36


PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MA-37
18MA1M02 M.Tech (Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1

readability.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
sentences, being concise and removing redundancy, avoiding ambiguity and vagueness.
05hours
UNIT – II
Clarifying who did what, highlighting your findings, hedging and criticizing, Paraphrasing
and plagiarism, sections of paper, Abstracts, Introduction.
05 hours
UNIT – III
04 hours
UNIT – IV
Key skills needed when writing a title, Key skills needed when writing an Abstract, Key
skills needed when writing an Introduction, Skills needed when writing a review of the
literature. 05hours
UNIT – V
Key skills needed when writing the methods, Key skills needed when writing the Results,
Skills needed when writing a Discussion, Skills needed when writing the Conclusions.
05 hours
COURSE OUTCOMES:
STUDENTS SHALL BE ABLE TO:
4. Develop a complete conceptual technical report
.
MA-38

3. Highman N (1998) Handbook of writing for the mathematical sciences,SIAM, Highman’s
book.

CIE – 50
AAT = 20 marks Total:50 marks
marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MA-39
SEMESTER: II

Technology )
Course title METALLURGICAL FAILURE ANALYSIS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the various stages of failure and characteristics of ductile and brittle
fracture.
2. Analyze general concepts related to fracture and factors affecting fracture.
3. Understand wear failure, corrosion failure and analyze the damage failure.
4. Analyze the cause of failure in forging and welding.
5. Apply reliability concepts by using various models to study the failure and life testing.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Stages of failure analysis, Classification and identification of various types of fracture.
Overview of fracture mechanics, Characteristics of ductile and brittle fracture. 05 hours
UNIT – II
General concepts, Fracture characteristics revealed by microscopy, Factors affecting fatigue
Life, Creep, Stress rupture, Elevated temperature fatigue, Metallurgical instabilities,
Environmental induced failure. Some case studies failures. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Types of wear, Analyzing wear failure, Corrosion failures, Factors influencing corrosion
failures, Overview of various types of corrosion stress corrosion cracking, Sources,
Characteristics of stress corrosion cracking, Procedure for analyzing stress corrosion
cracking, Various types of hydrogen damage failures.
12 hours
UNIT – IV
Causes of failure in forging, Failure of iron and steel castings, Improper heat treatment, Stress
concentration and service conditions.
Failure of Weldments - Reasons for failure procedure for weld failure analysis. 07 hours
UNIT – V
Reliability concept and hazard function, Life prediction, Condition monitoring, Application
of Poisson, Exponential and Weibull distribution for reliability, Bath tub curve, Parallel and
series system, Mean time between failures and Life testing. 12 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-40
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Describe the various stages of failure both in brittle and ductile materials.
2. Determine the fracture characteristics at elevated temperature and by environmental
aspects.
3. Differentiate and analyze various types of wear failure and corrosion failure.
4. Predict the causes of failure in forging and welding
5. Explain the reliability concepts and life prediction by applying various models.
References:
1. ASM Metals Handbook “Failure Analysis and Prevention”, ASM Metals Park. Ohio,
Vol.10, 10th Edition, 1995.
2. Colangelo.V.J. and Heiser.F.A., “Analysis of Metallurgical Failures”, John Wiley and
Sons Inc. New York, USA, 1974.
3. Analysis of Metallurgical Failures by Vito J Colangelo and Francis A Heiser
4. Analysis of Metallurgical Failure by COLANGELO

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 1
CO2 1
CO3 3
CO4 1
CO5 3
MA-41

Technology )
Course title ADVANCED COMPOSITE MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the basic concepts of composites, matrices and its fabrication methods.
2. Apply the knowledge of fibers, metals, matrices in the fabrication process of composites.
3. Analyze suitable fabrication technique depending on the application.
4. Evaluate MMC’S & monolithic metals.
5. Create platform to know how to use low density composite materials for various
applications.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to composites, Brief history of composite materials, Technology overview,

Matrices, Material forms, Fabrication processes, Applications. 05 hours
UNIT – II
Constituent material forms, Selection factors, Reinforcement fibers, Glass fibers, Carbon
fibers, Ceramic fibers, Fabrics and preforms, Epoxy resins, Polyester resins, Polymide resins,
Cyanate Ester resins, Thermoplastic resins, Metallic matrices, Carbon matrices, Ceramic
matrices, Light weight structural course. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Open moulding, Prepeg and Ply cutting, Fiber placement, Automated tape laying, Curing,
Resin transfer moulding and structural reaction injection moulding, Vacuum infusion,
Compression moulding,
Filament winding, Pultrusion, Tube rolling, Processing of metal matrix composites, Ceramic-
matrix composites and Carbon-carbon composites. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Introduction, Comparison of MMCs with monolithic metals, Advantages and disadvantages

of MMCs, Reinforcement materials, Matrix materials, Characteristics and design
considerations, Fabrication methods, Need for production of MMCs, Selection procedure of
MMCs, Application of MMCs. 12 hours
UNIT – V
Automotive, Space, High-temperature, Aircraft, Sports and recreation, Thermal management

and electronic packaging, Marine, Civil infrastructure applications. 07 hours
MA-42
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Discuss the different types of composite materials & their fabrication technique.
2. Implement different fabrication methods for producing MMC’S or PMC.
3. Differentiate the different fabrication techniques depending on the application.
4. Asses potential of MMC’S and need for production of MMC’S.
5. Develop a new composite material depending on the typical application.
References:
1. Advanced Composite Materials by Pilato, Louis A., Michno, Michael J
2. Advanced Composite Materials Editors Ashutosh Tiwari, Mohammad Rabia Alenezi,
Seong Chan Jun
3. ASME Handbook Volume 10
4. “Fiber reinforced composites materials manufacturing & Design” Maneel Dekker Inc.
1993 by Mallick P K .
5. “Composite materials handbook” by M M Schwartz.
6. “Analysis & Performances of Fiber composites” by John Wiley & sons in 1990 by
Agarwal B D & Brontman L J.
7. “Primer on Composite materials & Analysis” Technomic publishing by Halpin J C.

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2
CO2 3
CO3 2
CO4 3
CO5 3
1. Low, 2. Medium, 3. Hig
MA-43

Technology )
Course title SELECTION OF MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand how to select materials for various applications.
2. Evaluate high corrosion resistant and wear resistant materials.
3. Understand high temperature strength materials.
4. Evaluate the materials used in aerospace, automobile, nuclear industries.
5. Analyze the materials having special thermal properties.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Technologically important properties of materials, Physical, Chemical, Mechanical and
Electrical properties of metals, Criteria of selection of materials like properties, Cost,
manufacturing process, Availability, Legal and safety factors. 06 hours
UNIT – II
Materials for atmospheric, Soil, Water, Acid and alkaline resistance, Corrosion prevention
coatings, Material for Chemical and Petroleum industries, Materials and coatings for wear
resistance. 06 hours
UNIT – III
High temperature strength and stability, Hot hardness requirements, High temperature steels
and super alloys, Ductile to brittle transition, HSLA steel, Low temperature materials.
12 hours
UNIT – IV
Materials for engine components, Cylinder block, Head, Liner, Piston, Ring, Pin, Connecting
rod, Crank shaft, Exhaust, Cam shaft, Rocker arm and tappet, etc. Materials for chasis,
Materials for aero structure, Wings, Landing gears, Turbine blades, shafts, compressor
blades,etc. 12 hours
UNIT – V
Nuclear Fuels, Control Rods, Coolants, Clad Materials Etc, Wear Resistant Materials, Impact
Resistant Materials, Friction Materials, Anti-Friction Materials, Bearing Materials, Electrical
& Magnetic materials, Power plant requirement, Materials with special thermal properties,
Thermal expansion. 12 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-44
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Describe the various properties of materials and criteria for selection of materials.
2. Determine the materials having high wear and corrosion resistance.
3. Explain about the materials having high temperature strength.
4. Discuss about the materials used in aerospace, automobile, nuclear industries.
5. Determine the electrical and magnetic materials with special thermal properties.
References:
1. Gladius Lewis, “Selection of Engineering Materials", Prentice Hall Inc. New Jersey USA,
1995.
2. Charles J A and Crane. F A.A., “Selection and Use of Engineering Materials”, 3rd Edition,
Butterworths, London UK, 1996
3. Materials Selection in Mechanical Design” by Ashby
4. Materials Selection in Mechanical Design” by Michael F Ashby

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1 2
CO2 2 1
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2
MA-45

Course Code 18MA2E1A
Technology )
Course title TESTING OF MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand different techniques to calculate stress and strain.
2. Analyze the mechanics in crystals.
3. Understand different material testing machines and sensors
4. Evaluate surface testing
5. Understand the microstructure of materials
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction, State of Stress in 2 & 3D, Mohr's Circle: 2 & 3D, Generalized Stress-Strain
Relationships, Theory of Elasticity, Stress Concentration, Strain Energy, Elements of the
Theory of Plasticity, The Flow Curve, Yielding Criteria for Ductile Metals, Basis of the
Theories of Plasticity, Flow Theories, Deformation Theories, Slip-field Theory. 12 hours
UNIT – II
Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals, Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates,
Dislocation Theory, Fracture, Internal Friction, Fatigue of Metals, Creep and Stress Rupture,
Residual Stresses, General Fundamentals of Metalworking, Forging, Sheet-metal Forming,
Rolling of Metals, Extrusion, Rod, Wire and Tube Drawing. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Testing machines and sensors, Types of Universal Testing machines and principles of
operations, Machine stiffness, load and strain measurement, Calibration and verification of
UTM, Digital Image Correlation (DIC) for full field measurements, X-Ray, Infrared camera
for extension measurements. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Friction, wear and surface testing, Testing of sliding contact, Abrasive wear, Adhesive wear,
Erosive wear, Testing and determination of surface characteristics of solid materials. (Surface
roughness measurements) Determination of characteristics of lubricants, Four ball testing.
06 hours
UNIT – V
Microscopy, Optical microscope, Scanning electron microscope, Preparation of specimens

for Microscopic study, ASTM Standards for mechanical property characterization of metals,
plastics, Ceramics composite materials and Nanomaterials. 06 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-46
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Describe the different theories of Elasticity and Plasticity.
2. Describe the mechanics in manufacturing.
3. Illustrate, testing on machines using this theoretical knowledge.
4. Discuss friction and wear of surface.
5. Describe ASTM standards for mechanical properties.
References:
1. Mechanical Metallurgy - GEORGE E. DIETER, JR.
2. ASM Vol.8: Mechanical Testing and Evaluation
3. ASM Vol.11: Failure Analysis and Prevention
4. ASM Vol.18: Friction, Lubrication and Wear
5. ASM Vol.9: Metallography and Microstructures
6. ASTM standards available on Internet

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 1
CO3 2
CO4 1 2
CO5 3
MA-47

Course Code 18MA2E1B
Technology )
Course title NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Apply the knowledge relating to fundaments of Nondestructive testing methodologies.
2. Understanding concepts of ultrasonic testing method.
3. Apply the concepts of radiographic testing methodologies for inspection.
4. Analyze the practices behind Eddy current testing.
5. Evaluate the residual stresses and its origin.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Visual Inspection tools, Applications and limitations, Liquid Penetrant Inspection, Principles,
Types and properties of penetrants and developers, Advantages and limitations of various
methods of LPI, Magnetic particle inspection, Principles, Applications, Advantages and
limitations. 12 hours
UNIT – II
Ultra Sonic Testing(UT), Nature Of Sound Waves, Wave Propagation, Modes Of Sound
Wave Generation, Various Methods of Ultrasonic Wave Generation, Types of UT Principles,
Applications, Advantages, Limitations, A, B and C Scan, Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD).
12 hours
UNIT – III
Radiography Testing (RT), Principles, Applications, Advantages and Limitations of RT,
Types and Characteristics of X Ray and Gamma Radiation Sources, Principles and
Applications of Fluoroscopy/Real-Time Radioscopy, Advantages and Limitations, Recent
Advances. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Eddy current testing, Principles, types, applications, advantages and limitations of eddy
current testing, Thermography, Principles, Types, Applications, Advantages and limitations.
06 hours
UNIT – V
Optical & Acoustical holography, Principles, Types, Applications, Advantages and
limitations. Case studies: Weld, Cast and formed components. 06 hours
MA-48
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Apply the concepts learnt, to the practical problems involving Non-destructive testing.
2. Incorporate the principles of ultrasonic testing.
3. Apply the principles of radiography techniques in Non-destructive testing.
4. Analyse the principle behind eddy current testing.
5. Evaluate the residual stresses developed in the engineering components.
References:
1. Practical Non – Destructive Testing, Baldev raj, Narosa Publishing House(1997).
2. Non-Destructive Testing, B.Hull and V.John, Macmillan (1988)
3. Krautkramer, Josef and Hebert Krautkramer, Ultrasonic Testing of Materials, 3rd edition,
New York, Springer-Verlag (1983)
4. Introduction to Nondestructive Testing: A Training Guide by Paul E Mix
5. Non-Destructive Testing of Fibre-Reinforced Plastics Composites by John Summerscales

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MA-49

Technology )
Course title POLYMER ENGINEERING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand polymers
2. Analyze the different properties of polymer
3. Analyze the property relationship of structure
4. Understand the polymer processing
5. Understand the different types of polymers
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Basic concepts on polymers, Classification of polymers, Polymer structure, Copolymers,
Tacticity, Geometric Isomerism, Nomenclature, Polymerization principles and processes.
12 hours
UNIT – II
Structure and properties of polymers, Amorphous state, Crystalline state, Thermal transitions,
Glass transition, Crystalline melting temperature. 06 hours
UNIT – III
Structure property relationships, Effect of weight, Composition and pressure on Tg,
Mechanical properties of polymers, Viscoelastic properties of polymer solutions and melts,
Dielectric analysis, Dynamic calorimetry, Additives, Blends and Composites, Plasticizers,
Fillers and reinforcements, Polymer blends. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Polymer processing, Extrusion, Molding, Calendering, Coating, Polymer Rheology,
Biopolymers, Natural polymers, Fibres, Engineering and Specialty polymers, Polyamides,
Polycarbonates, Engineering polyesters etc. 12 hours
UNIT – V
Ionic polymers, Liquid crystal polymers, Conductive polymers, High performance fibres,
Dendritic polymers, Environmental Problems with polymers. 06 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-50
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Describe the different Nomenclature in polymers
2. Describe different states of polymer
3. Explain the applications of polymers
4. Discuss different manufacturing methods of polymers
5. Explain the knowledge on fibers in polymers
References:
1. Polymer Science & Technology J.R.Fried
2. Polymer Science W.Billmerycr
3. Structure & Properties of Polymeic materials D.W. Clegg & A. A. Collyer
4. Engineering Materials Vol. I and II Jones

marks
 Questions Q1 & Q 2 from Unit II and Unit V
 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5 from Unit I, Unit III
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1
CO2 2
CO3 3
CO4 2
CO5 2
MA-51

Technology )
Course title BIOMATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand need of Biomaterials
2. Understand Biomaterials as implant material
3. Analyze preparation of Biomaterials
4. Evaluate techniques of Biomaterials
5. Analyze Biomaterials in Bio-medical field.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to biomaterials, Need for biomaterials, Salient properties of important material
classes, Property requirement of biomaterials. 06 hours
UNIT – II
Metallic implant materials, Ceramic implant materials, Polymeric implant materials,
Composites as biomaterials, Orthopedic, Dental and other applications. 06 hours
UNIT – III
Biomaterials preparation and characterization Processing and properties of different
bioceramic materials, Mechanical and physical properties evaluation of biomaterials, New
and novel materials for biomedical applications, Design concept of developing new materials
for bio-implant applications, Nanomaterials and Nanocomposites for medical applications,
Concept of biocompatibility, Cell-material interactions and foreign body response,
Assessment of biocompatibility of biomaterials,
12 hours
UNIT – IV
In-vitro and In-vivo evaluation, Dissolution study, Cytotoxicity test, Cell adhesion test,
Antibacterial assessment, Kirby–Bauer disc diffusion method or antibiotic sensitivity test and
spread plate method. 12 hours
UNIT – V
Biomaterials for drug delivery, Timed release materials, Biodegradable polymers, Blood
compatible materials, Biomimetics, Bone biology, Bone architecture, Collagen, Osteoblasts,
osteoclasts, etc, Protein mediated cell adhesion, Introduction to tissue engineering,
Applications of tissue engineering, Biomaterials worldwide market, Technology transfer and
ethical issues, Standards for biomaterials and devices. 12 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-52
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain the required properties in Biomaterials
2. Discuss the Biomaterials applications in implant
3. Design new materials for Bio-implant applications
4. Illustrate out test on Biomaterials
5. Discuss Biomaterial as future Biotechnology
References:
1. Hench L. Larry, and Jones J., (Editors), Biomaterials, Artificial organs and Tissue
Engineering, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2005.
2. Hench L. Larry, & Wilson J., (Editors), An Introduction to Bioceramics, World
Scientific, 1994.
3. Biomaterials: Introduction by Joon B Park and Roderic S Lakes
4. Biomaterials by Bhat and S V

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 2
CO4 2
CO5 2
MA-53

Course Code
Technology )
Course title CERAMIC SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the structures and defects of ceramic materials.
2. Analyze silicate glasses and glass ceramics.
3. Create toughening mechanisms using ceramic materials
4. Understand thermal, electrical, magnetic properties of ceramic materials.
5. Understand structure property relation and applications of ceramics.
6. Create presentations about the recent advances in ceramic science and technology.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Ceramics as a class of material, Bonding and structure of various ceramic materials, Crystal
structure and defects, Chronological developments, Structure of silicates, Polymorphic
transformations, Raw materials. 06 hours
UNIT – II
Non crystalline materials, Structure, Requirement for glass formation, Zachariasen rules,
viscosity based transition points, Devitrification, Glass forming methods, Important ceramic
systems, One component system- Silica, Binary and Ternary systems. Silicate glasses and
glass ceramics, Powder processing, Pre-consolidation, Shape forming processes,
Fundamental Sintering mechanisms, Various advanced sintering techniques
12 hours
UNIT – III
Mechnacial behaviour of structural ceramics, Brittleness of ceramics, Concept of fracture
toughness and different toughness and strength measurement techniques, Concept of various
toughening mechanisms, 06hours
UNIT – IV
Thermal, Electrical, Magnetic and Optical properties of ceramic materials, Emphasis on the
effects of composition, Microstructure, Processing, Temperature and atmosphere on these
properties. 12 hours
UNIT – V
Introduction to specific ceramic materials, Structure property correlation, Processing and
applications, Superconductors, Piezoelectrics, Silicon carbide and Nitride, Sialons, Cermets,
Bioceramics and bio-glass, Cements, Castables, Refractories. 12 hours
MA-54
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain about the structures and defects of ceramic materials.
2. Discuss about silicate glasses and glass ceramics.
3. Explain the toughening mechanisms using ceramic materials
4. Explain the thermal, electrical, magnetic properties of ceramic materials.
5. Discuss structure property relation and applications of ceramics.
6. Explain the recent advances in ceramic science and technology in terms of presentation,
report, etc.
References:
1. Kingery W. D., Bowen, H. K., Uhlhmen D. R., „Introduction to Ceramics‟, 2nd Edition,
John Wiley, 1976
2. Richerson D. W., „Modern Ceramic Engineering - Properties Processing and Use in
Design, 3rd Edition, CRC Press, 2006
3. Chiang Y.M., Birnie D. P., Kingery W.D., Physical Ceramics: Principles for Ceramic
Science and Engineering, John Wiley, 1997
4. Norton F. H., „ Elements of Ceramics‟ 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 1974
5. Van Vlack L. H., „Physical Ceramics for Engineers‟, Addison Wesley, 1964.

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 3
CO4 2 1
CO5 1 2
MA-55

Technology )
Course title NUCLEAR MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understand the effect of nuclear materials on ecology and environment.
2. Evaluate the exploration methods and processing of nuclear materials.
3. Understand structural materials, shielding materials, fuel rods of nuclear plants.
4. Analyze safety aspects and health hazards while handling nuclear materials.
5. Understand nuclear scenario in India and abroad.
6. Analyze the presentations about recent advances in nuclear materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to nuclear energy / Reactors, Comparison of different modes of energy
generation, Cological and environmental aspects. 05 hours
UNIT – II
Nuclear reactions, Concept of half life, Nuclear minerals, Related exploration and processing.
12 hours
UNIT – III
Material requirements, Structural materials, Coolants, Shielding materials and Fuel rods,
Fabrication requirements 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Nuclear irradiation effects on structural materials, Safe guards, Safety and Health protection
12 hours
UNIT – V
Strategic issues, Current status and major needs, Overview of nuclear scenario in India,
Nuclear scenario at international level. 07 hours
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain effect of nuclear materials on ecology and environment.
2. Discuss the exploration methods and processing of nuclear materials.
3. Explain about structural materials, shielding materials, fuel rods of nuclear plants.
4. Discuss about safety aspects and health hazards while handling nuclear materials.
MA-56
5.
6. Investigate case studies on nuclear scenario in India and abroad.
7. Explain about recent advances in nuclear materials.
References:
1. Benjamin M. M., Van Nostrand “Nuclear Reactor Materials and Applications”, Reinhold
Company Inc, 1983
2. Henley E.J., & Herbert Kouts, “Advances in Nuclear Science and Technology”
3. Nuclear Materials Science by Karl WhittlePublished
4. An Introduction to Nuclear Materials: Fundamentals and Applications by K. Linga
Murty, Indrajit Charit

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2
CO2 2
CO3 1
CO4 2
CO5 2
MA-57

Course Code 18MA2L01
Technology )
Category Program Lab Semester : II
Course title MATERIAL TESTING & MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR – LAB II
No. of Hours/Week
0 0 4 0 4

1. Understand advanced material testing method.
2. Analyze different non-destructive testing commonly used in industries.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
1. To conduct the tensile testing of ferrous and non-ferrous materials and characterization
using optical microscope and SEM.
2. To determine the fatigue behavior of different materials and its characterization.
3. To determine the Young‟s modulus of ferrous and non-ferrous materials using ultrasonic
tests
4. To determine the Formability of sheet metals.
UNIT-II
5. To determine the internal defects identification in casting and welded components using
NDT.
6. To conduct the experiments on Non-Destructive testing method
i. Ultrasonic testing methods
ii. X-ray methods
iii. Die-penetrant magnetic particles testing.
7. To determine the Fractography of different tested materials( i.e. Tensile, Impact and
Fatigue) using SEM
To conduct experiments in MATLAB: plotting 2-D plots, programming (scripts and
functions) for solving problems in linear algebra, curve fitting and interpolation, data analysis
and statistics, numerical integration and Non-linear algebraic equations.
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Categorize the different advanced material testing equipment’s.
2. Compare the use of non-destructive testing in industries.
MA-58

Performance of the student in the 20 Write up 20
laboratory, every week
Test at the end of semester 20 Experiments 1 = 30 60
Experiments 2 = 30
Total 50 100
Note: SEE shall be conducted for 100 marks for practical and the marks obtained shall be
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
MA-59
Course Code 18MA2S01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology)

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

1 Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and
analyse the same effectively.
GUIDE LINES
not offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the
faculty/Guide assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

MA-60


PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MA-61
18MA2M01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
No. of Hours/Week
2 0 0 0 1

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT –I

05 hours
UNIT –II
04 hours
UNIT –III
 Teacher‟s attitudes and beliefs and pedagogic strategies.
05 hours
UNIT –IV

 Peer support
05 hours
MA-62
UNIT –V

 Research design
 Contexts
 Pedagogy
 Dissemination and research impact.
05hours
COURSE OUTCOMES:
and learning.

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare,
31 (2): 245-261.
2. Agrawal M (2004) Curriculum reform in school: The importance of evaluation, Journal of
Curriculum Studies, 36(3): 361-379.
6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, „learning to read‟ campaign.

CIE – 50 Quiz = 5 marks Total:50
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1
CO2 1
CO3 1 1 1
MA-63
SEMESTER: III

Technology )
Course title CORROSION ENGINEERING
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Understanding phenomenon of corrosion and parameters involved in corrosion.
2. Apply the knowledge of corrosion to understand different forms of corrosion and their
mechanics.
3. Analyze different corrosion testing on monitoring.
4. Evaluate different corrosion control techniques.
5. Create data base regarding the development resistance materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Principles of corrosion phenomenon, Thermodynamics and kinetics, Emf/galvanic series,
Pourbaix diagram, Exchange current density, Passivity, Evans diagram, Flade potential.
06 hours
UNIT – II
Different forms of corrosion, Atmospheric/uniform, Pitting crevice, Intergranular, Strees
corrosion, Corrosion fatique, Dealloying, High temperature oxidation-origin and Mechanism
with specific examples. 12 hours
UNIT – III
Corrosion testing and monitoring, Non-Elecrochemical and Electrochemical methods, Weight
loss method, Tafel Linear polarization and Impedance techniques, Lab, Semi plant & field
tests, Susceptibility test, Corrosion prevention through design, Coatings, Inhibitors, Cathodic,
Anodic protection, Specific applications, Economics of corrosion control. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Corrosion & its control in industries, Power, Process, Petrochemical, Ship building, Marine
and fertilizer industries, Some case studies-Corrosion and its control in different engineering.
12 hours
UNIT – V
Materials, Concrete structures, Duplex, Super duplex stainless steels, Ceramics, Composites
and polymers, Corrosion auditing in industries, Corrosion map of India. 06 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-64
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Illustrate the concepts of corrosion.
2. Determine corrosion mechanisms with specific examples.
3. Differentiate different corrosion testing & monitoring methods.
4. Asses corrosion control in various industries.
5. Design corrosion resistance material for industrial & naval application.
References:
1. Fontana. M.G., Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2005.
2. Jones.D.A. Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1996.
3. NACE Corrosion Engineer's Reference Book, 3rd Edition.
4. “Corrosion Engineering” by Mars G Fontana

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 2 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
MA-65

Course Code 18MA31B
Technology )
Course title HIGH TEMPERATURE MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Learn about effect of stress, temperature, and strain rate on materials.
2. Study about time hardening, strain hardening, transient creep of materials.
3. Gain knowledge about ductile fracture, brittle fracture in materials.
4. Know about effect of oxidation, hot gas corrosion on high temperature materials.
5. Know about iron based, nickel based, cobalt based alloys.
6. Make presentations about recent advances in high temperature materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Factors influencing functional life of components at elevated temperatures, Definition of
creep curve, Various stages of creep, Metallurgical factors influencing various stages, Effect
of stress, Temperature and Strain rate. 07 hours
UNIT – II
Design of transient creep, Time hardening, Strain hardening, Expressions for rupture life for
creep, Ductile and brittle materials, Monkman - Grant relationship. 05 hours
UNIT – III
Various types of fracture, Brittle to ductile from low temperature to high temperature,
cleavage, Ductile fracture due to microvoid coalescence - Diffusion controlled void growth,
Fracture maps for different alloys and oxides. 12 hours
UNIT – IV
Oxidation, Pilling-Bedworth ratio, Kinetic laws of oxidation, Defect structure and control of
oxidation by alloy additions, Sulphation, Hot gas corrosion deposit, Modified hot gas
corrosion, Effect of alloying elements on hot corrosion. 12 hours
UNIT – V
Iron base, Nickel base and Cobalt base superalloys, Composition control, Solid solution
strengthening, Precipitation hardening by gamma prime, Grain boundary strengthening, TCP
phase - Embrittlement, Solidification of single crystals. 12 hours
UNIT – VI
MA-66
COURSE OUT COMES:

1. Explain effect of stress, temperature, and strain rate on materials.
2. Discuss the concepts of time hardening, strain hardening, transient creep in high
temperature materials.
3. Explain about the ductile fracture, brittle fracture in materials.
4. Discuss effect of oxidation, hot gas corrosion on high temperature materials.
5. Explain iron based, nickel based, cobalt based alloys.
6. Explain about recent advances in high temperature materials in terms of presentation,
report, etc.
References:
1. Courtney T.H, „Mechanical Behaviour of Materials‟, McGraw Hill, 199
2. High Temperature Materials and Mechanisms, Yoseph Bar-Cohen
3. Raj R, „Flow and Fracture at Elevated Temperatures‟, American Society for Metals, 1985
4. Hertzberg R. W, „Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials‟, 4th
Edition, John Wiley, 1996

marks
marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 1 2
CO2 1 2
CO3 2 1
CO4 3
CO5 3
MA-67
M.Tech (Advanced
Materials Technology)
Course title ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Apply the different technologies used in rapid prototyping.

2. Understand the capabilities of a few Non-Traditional Machining Processes.
3. Analyse the different hybrid Non-Traditional Machining Processes.
4. Analyse the steps involved in manufacturing of integrated circuit chips.
5. Evaluate the near methods of forming, welding and metalizing.
UNIT –I
Rapid Prototyping- Introduction, Basic concepts in free form fabrication, photo polymer
based free form process - Solid ground curing, Deposition based FF process - Fused
deposition modeling powder based FF process - S selective laser sintering soligen & inkjet
binder lamination based FF process, Rapid tooling. 10hours
UNIT –II
Non Traditional Machining process - Principle of operation, Process description,
process parameters, process capabilities, limitations, applications of Abrasive Water Jet
Machining, Abrasive flow Machining, Ion Beam Machining, Laser Beam Machining. High
speed machining. 10 hours
UNIT –III
Hybrid Non Traditional Machining Processes- Introduction, Principle of material removal,
Process description, capabilities and applications of the following
i. Hybrid Electro Chemical Processes - Electrochemical Grinding, Honing and
Superfinishing.
Ultrasonic assisted Electrochemical machining (ECM) and Leaser assisted ECM.
ii. Hybrid Thermal Processes – Electro Erosion Dissolution Machining, Electro
Discharge Grinding, Abrasive Electro Discharge Machining, EDM with Ultrasonic
assistance and Electro chemical Discharge Grinding.
10 hours
UNIT –IV
Micro Electronic Manufacturing & Electronic Assembly Introduction,
Semiconductors Manufacture of Integrated Circuit Boards, Silicon wafer, I.C. on
silicon wafer, Thin film deposition- Chemical Vapor Deposition, Epitaxial deposition,
I.C. component interconnection, I.C. yield and economics, I.C. packaging types, packaging
processes, printed circuit boards, Electronic assembly. 10 hours
MA-68
UNIT –V
Advanced forming techniques - High Energy rate forming (HERF), Spinning, Forming with
rubber tooling or fluid pressure, Sheet Hydro forming, Tube Hydro forming, Fine edge
blanking, Electro forming & Spray forming. Advanced welding techniques - Electron beam
welding, Friction stir welding, Laser beam welding & cutting, Ultrasonic welding,
Diffusion welding, Explosive welding, Flash welding, welding of plastics, welding related
process - Surfacing metallizing. 08 hours
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Describe and differentiate between various types of rapid prototyping technologies.
2. Compare the Non Traditional Machining for a particular application in engineering.
3. Select the suitable Hybrid Non-traditional Machining Processes for a given situation.
4. Appraise the manufacturing processes involved in manufacturing of IC chips
5. Assess the new methods of forming, welding and surface metalizing. Highlight the recent
trends and research advances in the topics of the course.
Books for Reference:

1. E. Paul Degarmo, J.J. Black and Ronald A. Kosher - "Materials and Processes in
Manufacturing" John Wisely & sons.
2. Bhattacharya - "New Technology" B.S. publishers.
3. Phillip F. Ostwald & Jaiso Munoz, "Manufacturing Processes and systems, John
Wiley & sons.
4. Pandey P.C. - "Non Traditional Machining Processes", Tata Mc GrawHill Publishers.
5. Mikell P. Groover - Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing", PHE Publishers.
6. Nanua Singh - System approach to Computer Integrated Design & Manufacturing, John
Wiley & Sons.
7. Andrew Kusaik - Intelligent Manufacturing Systems.
Kelpakjian - Manufacturing Engineering & Technology, Addison Wesley Publishers.
CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III) = 15 marks Total:50

Quiz =5 marks

 Questions Q1 & Q 2 from Unit-I and Unit-II
20* 2 = 40
Marks
 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5 from Unit-III,
20*3= 60
Unit-IV & Unit-V respectively shall be
Marks
answered and shall have internal choice
marks.
MA-69
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 3
MA-70
Course Code 18MA3S01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology)

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

1 Carry out the literature review of general research area/current topic and
analyse the same effectively.
GUIDE LINES
not offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the
faculty/Guide assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

MA-71


Report of seminar :25%
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MA-72
Course Code 18MA3I01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology)

No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 10 --- 5
batch of 6 students
INTERNSHIP
1. Provide an opportunity to see how classroom and textbook learning applies to the
real world, and to expose the students to the relevant work experience.
2. Pay close attention to all the steps that go onto completing a job, thereby, help
students to become workforce ready before entering the job market as a graduate.
Provide an opportunity to select the topic of dissertation work by evaluating the
requirement of organisation.
GUIDELINES
1. Student has to approach the concerned heads of various Industries/organization,

which are related to the field of specialization of the M. Tech program.
2. If any student gets internship, he/she has to submit the internship offer letter duly
signed by the concerned authority of the company to the Chairperson of the
Department.
3. The internship on full time basis will be immediately after the examination of II
semester and during vacation of III semester for a minimum period of 8 weeks
without affecting the regular class work.
Chairperson as per the format acceptable to the respective industry /organizations and
to the Institution.
submit.
evaluation.
MA-73
The broad format of the internship final report shall contain Cover Page, Certificate
from College, Certificate from Industry / Organization of internship, Acknowledgement,
structure, Products, Services, Business Partners, Financials, Manpower, Societal
Concerns, Professional Practices, Activities of the Department where internship is done,
Tasks Performed and summary of the tasks performed. specific technical and soft
skills that student has acquired during internship, References & Annexure.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
= 50 marks Marks
SEE
marks.
50 marks.
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
50*
4 Documentation 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
MA-74
Rubrics for SEE:

no of SEE
50**
4 Document 40%
5 Presentation 20%
Total 100%
for 50 marks.

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 3
MA-75
MINI PROJECT
1. Understand the method of applying engineering knowledge/use application software to

solve specific
Student shall take up small problems in the field of domain of program as mini project. It can
be related to a solution to an engineering problem, verification and analysis of experimental
data available, conducting experiments on various engineering subjects, material
characterisation, familiarising a software tool for solution to selected engineering problem,
etc.
department/college and it can be of interdisciplinary also .
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Conduct experiments / use the capabilities of relevant application software/ simulation

tools individually to generate data/ solve problems.
= 50 marks Marks
SEE
marks.
marks.
MA-76
Rubrics for CIE:

no of CIE
Total 100%
Rubrics for SEE:

project. The following weightage would be given for the examination. Evaluation shall be
done in batches, not exceeding 6 students.

no of CIE
Discussion 50**
4 Report 25%
5 Viva Voce 20%
Total 100%
for 50 marks.
PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 3 3
CO2 2 3
CO3 3
MA-77
Course Code 18MA3D01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology)

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 10 0 5
results and identifying relevant applications. Preparation of synopsis, preliminary report
for approval of topic selected along with literature survey, objectives and methodology.
GUIDELINES
potential and should involve scientific research, design, generation/collection and analysis
of data, determining solution and must preferably bring out the individual contribution.
carried out, on-campus or in an industry or in an organisation with prior approval from
the Chairperson of the Department. The student has to be in regular contact with the guide
atleast once in a week.
survey, Conclusion of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of Dissertation,
Methodology to be followed, Experimental requirements, References and Annexure.
MA-78
COURSE OUTCOME:

CIE

SEE
marks.
50 marks.

PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 2 3
MA-79
Course Code 18MA4S01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology )

No. of Hours/Week
0 0 2 0 1

GUIDE LINES
offered in the semester and to be selected in consultation with the faculty/Guide assigned.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
MA-80


member nominated by Chairperson of the department. The evaluation criteria shall be as per

PO1 PO2 PO3
CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3
CO3 2
MA-81
Course Code 18MA4D01 M.Tech (Advanced Materials Technology)

No. of Hours/Week
--- --- 30 --- 15

3. Create a detailed technical document as per format based on the outcome of
dissertation work phase I and II.
GUIDELINES
report of final dissertation work in bound form that includes Cover Paper, Certificate
from College/Industry/Organisation, Acknowledgement, Abstract, Table of contents, List
of Figures and Table, Nomenclature, Chapter of Introduction, Literature survey,
Conclusion of literature survey, Objectives and Scope of dissertation work, Methodology,
Experimentation, Results, Discussion, Conclusion, Scope for future work, References,
Annexure and full text of the publication (submitted or published).
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Conduct experiments/ implement the capabilities of different Software /Computational
/ Analytical/Modelling and simulation tools individually and generate data for
validation of hypothesis.
3. Prepare a detailed technical document, present and defend the contents of
Dissertation work before technically qualified audience effectively.
MA-82

100 50*
marks marks
2. Dissertation evaluation by external examiner =100 marks 300 50**
dissertation = 100 marks marks marks
marks.
** = SEE shall be conducted for 300 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced for
50 marks.
1 Presentation of background of dissertation work = 10%

2 Literature survey, Problem formulation and Objectives = 30%
3 Presentation of methodology and experimentation = 30%
4 Results and Discussion = 20%
5 Questions and Answers = 10%
1. Originality = 5%
4. Methodology, Experimentation/Theoretical modelling = 10%
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3
MA-83
18MAMOOC M.Tech ( Advanced Materials

Course Code
Technology )
No. of Hours/Week
--- --- --- --- 3

COURSE CONTENTS
The courses shall be from the related topics not taught in M. Tech program or other recent
trends in mechanical engineering.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CIE – 50 Total:50
marks Marks
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
MA-84

K R Circle, Bengaluru-560 001.
OPEN ELECTIVES
By
ME-1
Course Code 18ME3P1A M.Tech , Department of Mechanical Engineering
Category Open Elective Semester: III
Course title COMPOSITE AND SMART MATERIALS
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4
1. Understand the composite & smart materials, its classification.

2. Understand the strength and weaknesses of a given class of composite & smart materials.
3. Apply of composite & smart material to build smart systems.
4. Analyse Strengths and weaknesses of a composite &smart material in the design of a product.
5. Evaluate composite & smart materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
Introduction to Composite Materials: Definition, Classification, Types of matrices material and reinforcements
for composites, Characteristics & selection, Prepegs, and sandwich construction. Macro Mechanics of a
Lamina: Hooke's law for different types of materials, Number of elastic constants, Derivation of nine
independent constants for orthotropic material, Two - dimensional relationship of compliance and stiffness
matrix. Hooke's law for two dimensional angle lamina, engineering constants - Numerical problems. Invariant
properties, Stress-Strain relations for lamina of arbitrary orientation, Theories of failures, Numerical problems.
12hrs
UNIT – II
Fabrication methods: Layup and curing - open and closed mould processing, Hand lay-Up techniques, Bag
moulding and filament winding. Pultrusion, Pulforming, Thermoforming, Injection moulding, Cutting,
Machining and joining, tooling. Processing of diffusion bonding – stir casting – squeeze casting Quality
assurance, types of composite joints, types of defects, NDT methods. Production of carbon fibers, glass fibers
. 12hrs
UNIT-III
Smart Structures: Types of Smart Structures, Potential Feasibility of Smart Structures, Key Elements of Smart
Structures, Applications of Smart Structures. Piezoelectric materials, Properties, piezoelectric Constitutive
Relations, Depoling and Coercive Field, field strain relation. Hysteresis, Creep and Strain rate effects,
Inchworm Linear Motor. Applications and problems. 7hrs
UNIT – IV
Shape memory Alloy: Experimental Phenomenology, Shape Memory Effect, Phase Transformation, Tanaka’s
Constitutive Model, testing of SMA Wires, Vibration Control through SMA, Multiplexing. Applications of
SMA and Problems. ER and MR Fluids: Mechanisms and properties, Fluid Composition and behavior, The
Bingham Plastic and Related Models, Pre-Yield Response. Post-Yield flow applications in Clutches, Dampers
and Others. 10hrs.
ME-2
UNIT – V
Introduction to Self healing materials, Dielectric elastomer, Electroactive materials, Thermoelectric materials,
Photomechanical materials, Chromogenic material and Magnetochromic materials, Fiber Optics, Physical
Phenomena, Characteristics, Sensors, Fiber Optics in Crack Detection, applications. 07hrs.
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Categorise on composite & smart materials, its classification.

2. Describe and selection of composite & smart materials.
3. Demonstrates experiments to verify the predictions of composite & smart structures.
4. Verify on compatibility of smart structure & smart materials.
5. Assess simple models for composite & smart structures & materials.
1. M. V. Gandhi and B. S. Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman and Hall, London, New
York, 1992 (ISBN: 0412370107).
2. B. Culshaw, Smart Structures and Materials, Artech House, Boston, 1996 (ISBN: 0890066817).
3. A.V. Srinivasan, Smart Structures: Analysis and Design, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge;
4. M. Mukhopadhay, Mechanics of Composite Materials & Structures, Universities Press, 2004
5. A J. N. Reddy, Mechanics of Laminated Composite Plates & Shells, CRD Press, 2004
CIE – 50 Quiz = 5 marks Total:50

marks marks
Test II (Unit IV & V) – 15 marks Unit VI (AAT) = 15 marks
SEE – 100  Questions Q3 & Q5 from Unit III and Unit V 20* 2 = 40 Marks Total:100
marks respectively and shall not have internal choice. marks
 Questions Q1, Q2 and Q4 from Unit I, Unit II & Unit
20*3= 60 Marks
IV respectively shall be answered and shall have
internal choice
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3 3

ME-3
Course Code 18ME3P1B M.Tech , Department of Mechanical Engineering
Category Open Elective Semester: III
Course title INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
No. of Hours/Week
4 0 0 0 4

1. Identify Hazards and safety practices in industry.
2. Understand the safety practices and best practices in maintenance engineering.
3. Apply the techniques of fault tracing.
4. Evaluate the parameters for industrial safety.
5. Design and develop a model for better safety in working environment.
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – I
INDUSTRIAL safety: Accident, causes, types, results and control, mechanical and electrical hazards, types,
causes and preventive steps/procedure, describe salient points of factories act 1948 for health and safety,
wash rooms, drinking water layouts, light, cleanliness, fire, guarding, pressure vessels, etc, Safety colour
codes. Fire prevention and fire fighting, equipment and methods. 08hrs.
UNIT -II
Fundamentals of maintenance engineering: Definition and aim of maintenance engineering, Primary and
secondary functions and responsibility of maintenance department, Types of maintenance, Types and
applications of tools used for maintenance, Maintenance cost & its relation with replacement economy,
Service life of equipment. 08hrs.
UNIT -III
Wear and Corrosion and their prevention: Wear- types, causes, effects, wear reduction methods, lubricants-
types and applications, Lubrication methods, general sketch, working and applications, i. Screw down
grease cup, ii. Pressure grease gun, iii. Splash lubrication, iv. Gravity lubrication, v. Wick feed lubrication
vi. Side feed lubrication, vii. Ring lubrication, Definition, principle and factors affecting the corrosion.
Types of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods. 10hrs.
UNIT -IV
Fault tracing: Fault tracing-concept and importance, decision treeconcept, need and applications,
sequence of fault finding activities, show as decision tree, draw decision tree for problems in machine
tools, hydraulic, pneumatic, automotive, thermal and electrical equipment's like, I. Any one machine tool,
ii. Pump iii. Air compressor, iv. Internal combustion engine, v. Boiler, vi. Electrical motors, Types of faults
in machine tools and their general causes. 10hrs
UNIT -V
Periodic and preventive maintenance: Periodic inspection-concept and need, degreasing, cleaning and
repairing schemes, overhauling of mechanical components, overhauling of electrical motor, common
troubles and remedies of electric motor, repair complexities and its use, definition, need, steps and
advantages of preventive maintenance. Steps/procedure for periodic and preventive maintenance of i. Machine
tools, ii. Pumps, iii. Air compressors, iv. Diesel generating (DG) sets, Program and schedule of
preventive maintenance of mechanical and electrical equipment, advantages of preventive maintenance.
Repair cycle concept and importance. 12hrs.
ME-4
UNIT – VI
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. List and memories safety practices used in industries.

2. Implementation of safety system in working environment.
3. Predict the occurrences of hazards and build safety measures to prevent it.
4. Validate the safety measures and reliability.
5. Integrate the advanced safety systems to the industries.
1. Higgins & Morrow, “Maintenance Engineering Handbook”, Da Information Services.

2. H. P. Garg, “Maintenance Engineering”, S. Chand and Company.
3. Audels, “Pump-hydraulic Compressors”, Mcgrew Hill Publication.
4. Winterkorn, Hans, “Foundation Engineering Handbook”, Chapman & Hall London.
Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15marks

CIE – 50 Quiz = 5marks Total:50
marks Unit VI (AAT) = 15 marks marks

 Questions Q3, Q4 and Q5 from Unit III, Unit IV &
internal choice
PO1 PO2 PO3

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 2 3 3
ME-5

Mtec Bu Syllabus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mtec Bu Syllabus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BANGALORE UNIVERSITY

Department of Mechanical Engineering, UVCE, Bengaluru

Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)

Vision and Mission of the Bangalore University, UVCE and

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs), Program Outcomes

1. M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

2. M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

3. M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

4. M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

5.Open Electives offered by the Department - ME 1to ME 5

University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering

Department of Mechanical Engineering,

Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)-2018

M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

 Impart quality education to meet national and global challenges

University Visvesvaraya College of Engineering (UVCE) was started as a School of Mechanical

Name of programme: M. Tech. in Mechanical Engineering

Outcome based Education curricula (Academic Year 2018-19)

Vision of the Department

Mission of the Department

MEM4. Imbibing awareness of entrepreneurship, ethics, honesty, credibility, social and

Program Educational Objectives (PEO)

Program outcomes (PO):

MDPO1: Independently carry out research/investigation and development work to solve

MDPO2: Prepare and present a substantial technical report/document.

1. 18MEMOOC MOOC Course --- --- --- --- 03

Grand Total --- --- --- --- 88

L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial, P –Lab work, S – Self Study:

Course Code 18MD1C01 M.Tech (Machine Design )

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations: Initial value problems : Difference

Numerical solution of Partial differential equations: Finite difference solution of one

Calculus of Variations: Functionals, Variation of a functional, necessary condition for

Students shall be able to:

REFERENCES including e-resources and books

1. Mendenhall, Beaver J and Beaver M: Introduction to Probability and Statistics,

Test I (Unit I, II &III) = 15 marks

Answer FIVE full questions

Mapping of Course Outcomes (COS) to Program Outcomes (POs)

PO1 PO2 PO3

1. Low, 2. Medium, 3. High

Course Code 18MD1C02 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Course Code 18MD1C03 M.Tech (Machine Design)

Course Code 18MD1E1A M.Tech (Machine Design)

Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 Quiz = 05 marks

Course Code 18MD1E1B M.Tech (Machine Design)

COURSE OUT COMES

1. Low, 2. Medium, 3. High

Course Code 18MD1E1C M.Tech (Machine Design)

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

COURSE OUT COMES

CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 marks Quiz = 05 marks Total:50

PO1 PO2 PO3

Course Code 18MD1E2A M.Tech (Machine Design)

CIE – 50 Test I (Unit I, II &III)- 15 marks Quiz = 05 marks Total:50

Mapping of Course Outcomes (COS) to Program Outcomes (POs)

PO1 PO2 PO3

1. Low, 2. Medium, 3. High

Course Code 18MD1E2B M.Tech (Machine Design)

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

COURSE OUT COMES

PO1 PO2 PO3

1. Low, 2. Medium, 3. High

Course Code 18MD1E2C M.Tech (Machine Design)